Posted on Leave a comment

Mounting Specimens in Plastic

In my youth, my dad gave me a catalog from a supplier of scientific equipment. It used to be called Ward’s Natural Science Establishment. Their website is Wardsci.com. He let me buy things from the catalog from time to time. I started with some things like flasks and microscope slides. I was rapidly turning into a happy science nerd.

I noticed they had a little kit to make something called “Bio-Plastic Mounts.” With that little kit, I could take specimens such as bugs, coins, or postage stamps and embed them in clear plastic blocks. I fooled around with it for a while, then moved on to other pursuits.

What I’m thinking now is that embedding things in clear plastic could be a great business for someone. So far as I know, it’s not being offered anywhere.

Imagine, a client could send you an important keepsake, maybe a four-leaf clover, or a snapshot, or a scientific specimen, or a special coin. You embed it in plastic, and charge a lot of money!

Now there will be some difficulties to overcome. First, so far as I can tell, Ward’s no longer sells the kit. All they have is the bio-plastic material, a two-part liquid that hardens. The kit contained a mold, some of the liquid plastic, and mold release compound, plus some miscellaneous brushes and such, as I recall.

The procedure was to prepare the specimen. It had to be dry. I found out early on that any liquid would leak out and contaminate the mount. Then, I’d coat the mold with release compound, mix up some of the plastic liquid, and fill the mold about a third of the way. Shining an incandescent lightbulb on the mold, I let the plastic layer harden overnight. Then I’d set the specimen on that layer of hardened plastic, and fill the remaining two thirds of the mold with plastic. Once the plastic was hardened, I’d snap it out of the mold.

You’d think that would be it, but no, the work was just beginning. The surfaces of the mount were rough and not entirely transparent. Each surface had to be sanded until there were no bumps or depressions, then sanded and polished with ever finer grits until it became fully transparent. I did it by hand, and by the time I was done, the edges were often rounded. If I had a belt sander, my mounts would have been finished much faster, and come out much better.

No doubt you could improve on the process. There may be molds that you can acquire or make that leave a smooth enough finish that sanding and polishing is not required. There may be another, better source of plastic. I remember how stinky the stuff was. Perhaps Ward’s discontinued it because it was toxic.

If you can work out a nice process, you’d have a very nice home business on your hands! You could make mounts of things like four-leaf clovers (that you can buy on Ebay) and sell them locally such as at flea markets, or online through Ebay, Etsy or Amazon. You could let people know they can send their keepsakes or specimens to you for embedding. You would have to be practiced and careful, because you don’t want to wreck things that could be very important to your clients. But, you could charge a heck of a lot of money for a mount, right?

Taking the concept a step further, one could make coffee tables and other large things with embedded specimens in plastic.

Look at General Business Action Pack to make this business easy and profitable.

Posted on Leave a comment

Tiny Woodworking Projects

If you have woodworking skills, you’re all set to start a business. All you need is an idea for something you can make quickly that the public would like to buy.

Unique clothing buttons, desk toys, children’s toys, high-end ballpoint pens, and similar small objects come to mind.

Using rare and beautiful woods is a big plus.

Ordinary plywood can be made into interesting objects. For instance, I once cut a 42-inch disk from a piece of thick plywood. With a router, I carved a chess set into the middle by cutting alternate squares down through the top layer. The squares underneath were darker. I then covered the whole thing in a thick layer of clear resin. The thick resin-coated concept is a very 1970s art style, but it could make a great comeback.

I’m sure smaller objects could be carved from plywood, showcasing it’s unique laminated look as well.

Selling your objects can be done in all the usual ways. Find ones right here in the General Business Action Pack such as selling on Ebay, Etsy, Craigslist, yard sales, and consignment.

Artistic woodburning can be a nice way to enhance your projects. Simply making something like unique key fobs, but with names burned in, can be good sellers. You’d think you should just make fobs with the most common names such as Susan and John, but you may find that the rarer names such as Johan and Cassandra sell well also because items with those names are so much less common.

Posted on Leave a comment

Promotional Vehicles

If you have or can build a unique vehicle, you can earn a living from that vehicle in several ways.

The Smile Shuttle, pictured above, started life as a DC-3 airplane. The rumored history is quite colorful. It started flying in World War II. Later, when in service as a passenger plane for Allegheny Airlines, it was hijacked to Cuba, not once, but twice. On another occasion, while coming in for a landing at 180 miles per hour, it hit a goose going about 20 miles in the other direction. The poor goose broke through the fuselage, breaking the copilot’s legs. Another time while being serviced in Florida, a mechanic revved up an engine too much. The plane overran the wheel chocks, and crashed into a glass wall, narrowly missing passengers in a terminal.

Around 1976, it was purchased by a private person who made it into a motorhome by sawing off the wings and last 15 feet. The fellow who did the original work was very creative in reusing available components. There were seven different vehicles involved in the steering compartments. The steering wheel was from a Jeep Wagoneer. The column was from a Cadillac, The front wheels were originals on the International bus chassis. The flexible coupling from the steering shaft to the Ford steering gearbox was a 1/2-inch Craftsman socket set flexible joint. (That was quickly replaced by the new buyer:))

Socket set flexible coupling used in steering gear

In the early 1980s, it was sold to a couple who decided it looked like the Space Shuttle, which was a very popular NASA program at the time. They invested in new paint and many other improvements including an 8-foot diameter clear Plexiglas dome to cap the back end. The interior was designed to be multi-purpose. Someone said that at the time, it was the second-most famous vehicle in America, behind the Oscar-Meyer Weinermobile.

At one point, the Smile Shuttle gridlocked Las Vegas, as thousands of people stopped or drove around the block to take another look.

They rented the vehicle for $250/hour for anything from private parties to parades. Sometimes, the action was inside, such as ferrying a group of executives to a special event. Other times, the action was more on the outside. For instance, the inside could be staffed with people who handed out advertising flyers to everyone who came close.

Later, it was made into a cafe, as shown in the picture above.

This promotional vehicle can be put to many purposes, but single-purpose promotional vehicles can make a big and profitable splash as well. You can rent your vehicle to movie production companies, attach advertising banners to it, or have it be an attraction at grand openings and special events. Your vehicle doesn’t have to be street-legal or even be in running condition for many purposes, as long as you can get it to where someone wants it.

Furthermore, it doesn’t need to be custom. Many small businesses would be happy to make use of your antique tractor, classic car, or any unusual vehicle in their advertising and promotion strategy.

Posted on Leave a comment

Crush Art

Looking for a new business?

What if you took a trumpet that was too broken to play, put it under a piece of thick plywood, and drove your car over it? It would be crushed, right? Then, if you carefully mounted it on a background of some sort, put that in a frame, you’d have an interesting wall hanging, wouldn’t you?

I believe people would pay good money for crush art.

What else could you crush? I’m thinking of a wide assortment of musical instruments, but surely there are other things. Do you remember Jimmy Olson’s camera? He was Clark Kent’s photographer. It was a Speed Graphic press camera with bellows and lots of intricate metal parts. Great crush art, don’t you think? What if you run over your old cell phone? Crush art!

As far as display, you could mount your art on a wall as-is, or you might hot glue the pieces to a black, red, golden, velvet, burlap, veneer, or bronze background in a wooden frame. You might display your crushed art on a painted or collaged background. Use your imagination!

I believe it would be easy to get raw materials – broken things – on eBay. I believe you might be able to sell your crushes on eBay as well. You might find it even more profitable to sell your crushes in art galleries, and even places where art in general, let alone crush art, is not expected. For instance, you might be able to consign some crush art to a restaurant where they’ll sell it to their patrons.

 

Posted on Leave a comment

Bad Business


What the Ski Mechanic Did Wrong

What the Ski Mechanic Did Wrong

Consider one rule which is the most often violated by the people who fail: You must bring in more money than you spend!

I knew a guy who was an expert ski mechanic. He bought some waxes, some plastic, an iron, some files, all the things he would need. He rented bench space in a store and put up a sign in the store window. Sure enough, skis started coming in. At the end of the first day, he earned $160. Did he spend it on advertising? Or maybe on more materials, or tools to expand his available services? No, he bought himself a pair of fancy cowboy boots and went to a party. His business lasted about a week. When it was time to pay the second week’s bench rent, he didn’t have it! Now that’s just plain bad business! You laugh, but it’s a true story, and variations of it are surprisingly common.

You might enjoy knowing the crazy story of the shop where this happened. It was a bike shop in an eastern city, looking for some kind of business that would bring in people during the winter. The amazing and unexpected true story of that bike shop is here: 5 Years In The Bike Shop.

Posted on Leave a comment

General Business Action Pack

General Business Action Pack

Not all of this information is good for every business, but most of it is good for most businesses.

Business Action Pack

Ebay

Partnerships

The Sure-Fire Millionaire

Advertising and Publicity

Websites That Work

Social Networking

Craigslist

More About A Free Exchange

Your Own Retail Store

A Little Hypnotic Suggestion



Ebay

On Ebay, you can buy or sell anything from antennae to zithers. You may have a retail store, or a service business, and not realize the power of Ebay to grow what you have.

As a buyer, Ebay can be a source of rare items and common everyday things. Often, you’ll also find wholesale lots, and at times you can buy new merchandise for less than what you’d pay any wholesaler. First, I’ll talk about Ebay selling strategies. I’ll cover buying strategies later on.

As a seller, you have a national or even worldwide market, so rare things of interest to only a few people, things that would gather dust on a retail shelf, such as a tripod for a surveyor’s transit, or an antique clarinet, can sell for a lot of money on Ebay. At the same time, the ordinary things such as regular guitars, sunglasses, and digital cameras sell for the very bottom range of market value. Ebay is generally better for items smaller than sewing machines, since shipping charges add considerably to the cost of larger items.

Setting up an Ebay account is free and easy. You’ll also want to set up an account with PayPal, a money-handling website that is part of the Ebay empire and makes life easy for buyers and sellers in well over 90 percent of Ebay payment transactions. PayPal takes care of all the credit card processing and payment details. PayPal is also free. All you need to set up Ebay and PayPal accounts is about five minutes each, and the usual information, plus a credit card number, and if you have one available, a checking account number.

When an item sells on Ebay, the buyer almost always pays through PayPal. The seller gets to keep all the money collected except for an Ebay fee, typically around eight percent, and a PayPal fee of around three to four percent. The money is placed in the seller’s PayPal account, where s/he can transfer it to a checking account, or spend it in a variety of ways. The seller then packages the item and sends it to the buyer. If all goes well, and it usually does, the buyer can leave positive feedback for the seller. Feedback is a point that’s positive, neutral, or negative, along with optional ratings on issues such as shipping time and communication, and a comment. The seller too, can offer feedback for the buyer.

So, anyone doing business on Ebay can check feedback before committing to a transaction. If a seller has mostly positive feedback, you can feel confident in making the purchase. Therefore, as a seller, you want to treat your buyers well so you’ll get positive feedback.

Feedback isn’t as important as it once was because Ebay offers a variety of protections for buyers and sellers. For instance, if you buy a laptop computer, but the seller keeps your money and ships you a box of rocks, you can do more than issue negative feedback. You can contact Ebay, and they’ll refund your money – as long as you did everything right. That means to stay within Ebay’s normal parameters. If the seller asks you to pay by some means other than PayPal, or if the buyer asks the seller to ship it to a different address than the one listed with Ebay, the protection might be circumvented.

Selling on Ebay

Many buyers do not know about the Ebay buyer protection, or don’t trust it. For them, the seller’s feedback is very important. As a new seller, you might want to build positive feedback quickly. One way is to buy a few inexpensive things. You get feedback as a buyer. But most sophisticated Ebayers know the difference between feedback as a buyer and seller, and will want to see your seller feedback. Therefore, you can also start your Ebay business by selling some inexpensive things. Perhaps you have some old CDs or DVDs laying around the house. Sell them quickly, and get your feedback.

From this point forward, let’s pick a sample item, and discuss it as if it is something you really have on hand and will sell on Ebay. The item is Rolling Homes, a large-format paperback picture book about busses and trucks that were converted into motorhomes, by Jane Lidz, published in 1979.

The most important trick to selling on Ebay is knowing what to sell, since many items have too little value to sell online. It turns out Ebay has a tool for determining value. So let’s look up Rolling Homes.

At the top of almost any Ebay page is a search field. You can enter “Rolling Homes Jane Lidz.” Today, there are three copies for sale, ranging in price from $42 to $59. The prices and quantities will vary from day to day.

So far, we have learned that it seems to be a fairly valuable book, but we don’t really know how valuable. These auctions haven’t closed yet. Will anyone actually bid? How high will they bid? Let’s find out.

To the left of the listings, you have a column of refinements you can click, to limit your search based on condition, category and other things. In that column, click More Refinements. . . then Show Only. Check Sold Listings then click the Go button.

Now you’ll see a list of items that closed during the past 30 days. Today, I see that six copies sold during the past month, ranging in price from $39 to $45. So, it’s worth selling, don’t you think?

Grab your camera and take a few pictures. Ebay will allow for up to twelve free photos for each item you list. The first one will appear as a thumbnail – the little image to the left of a listing when shown in a group of similar listings. So, it should probably give an overview image of the book. It’s best to photograph items against a solid color background, so they are easy to see. I often use a red background, so if there are many similar listings, mine will stand out. You might also prefer a bright blue, green or yellow background. This is only a small advantage, so a white, even a wood-grained background is fine too. You’ll want your lighting about right, clear focus, and medium to very slightly higher than normal contrast. In the case of a book, shadows aren’t much of a concern, but with non-flat items, you’ll want to make sure shadows don’t obscure important details or make the thumbnail image hard to figure out. I use ordinary household lamps, with my camera’s color correction set to ‘auto.’ You might also experiment with color settings of ‘incandescent’ or ‘indoor.’ I use two lamps, one on either side, and slightly behind me and my camera,

Next you might take some other pictures, such as of the back cover, and maybe the table of contents pages.

Does your book have any flaws? If the cover is dog-eared or stained, maybe a close-up of the flaw would be a good idea. When selling on Ebay it is very important to clearly note flaws both photographically and in the text description. You don’t want negative feedback, and you don’t want to refund someone’s money because they were disappointed.

From the top of the Ebay home page, you can click Sell, then Sell Your Item. You are given a field in which you can enter what you have, and Ebay will give you matching categories. In the case of this book, it is easy. You can simply enter the ten-digit or 13-digit ISBN number that most published books have. Or you can browse to pick a category. Books | Nonfiction seems the most likely category, since this is a nonfiction book. But an option might be a category for motorhome accessories, since this book is of particular interest to the recreational vehicle crowd.

For DVD movies or music CDs, enter the UPC code found just under the barcode on the back.

If the item’s ISBN or UPC number is in the Ebay database, a template listing will come up, with title, number, brand name, model number, and such details already filled in.

Now it is time to edit or enter a title. This is not usually the place to be creative. You want to enter exactly what buyers for your book are searching for. So it would probably be “Rolling Homes by Jane Lidz, 1979.” Since there is room left over, you might pitch your book a bit. If it is in excellent condition, you can say so: “Rolling homes by Jane Lidz, 1979, Excellent Condition.”

Then you get to enter details such as listing the flaws your copy has, the publication year, a condition category, and some other things. Definitely enter the ISBN, or if it isn’t a book that you’re listing, enter a model or part number if one is available.

Then you get to upload your photographs. Below that, you can enter a description. For a book, if you have already entered condition notes, such as “minor yellowing, slightly dog-eared” then a description is not usually required. You could give a synopsis of what’s in the book, but most book buyers already know about what they want. If you’re selling something else, like a hat, you can describe it and pitch it to the best of your creative ability, keeping in mind that superlatives can actually hurt sales. So you might say something like this about a hat: “Size 7-3/8, hat in a vibrant purple. The brim measures 14 inches in diameter. The material is felt. Very slight shiny wear along the top edge that can’t be seen from more than five feet away. This hat was worn by people who felt sure of themselves in the fifties, and it still has that effect today. This is just the hat for a confident and stylish resident of the modern world.”

There is no limit to how long your description can be. That doesn’t mean your description has to be long. Getting back to Rolling Homes, no description at all is adequate. However, you could state something like, “I found this book fascinating, and so I took a 1/2-hour break to study it. A half-hour doesn’t really do it justice. A couple of full-time days would be more like it. I don’t really want to let it go, but you’ll probably enjoy it even more than I did. You will find photos of converted buses and trucks in these pages that you just wouldn’t expect.”

Keep in mind that an overly optimistic pitch like this doesn’t really help most products, so if you value your time, you might limit your descriptions to the basic facts.

As you are working your way down the page, you’ll see options that cost extra money such as sub-title and Gallery Plus. Most of these options have no effect on sales, but do generate extra income for Ebay. Don’t worry, they have plenty of money already, so I recommend that you do not select any enhancements that cost money.

Now, you get to choose whether to sell it as an Online Auction item or Fixed Price, also known as “Buy It Now.”

If you have an item that’s rare or collectible, and it is possible that two or more people will want it no matter the cost, then Auction is the way to go. You can start the bidding at whatever price you choose, and then decide if you’ll let the auction run for 1, 3, 5, 7 or 10 days. If after that time, no one was willing to pay your minimum price, you get to keep it, or try selling it again. If only one person in the world wants it, it will sell for your minimum price. On the other hand, two or more people can get into a bidding war.

I listed an old wooden radio with a starting bid of $50. At the end of the first day, the price had risen to $200. When the seven-day auction closed, the high bidder ended up paying me $1,200 plus shipping. This is a bit unusual in that the price went to $200 on the first day. Many experienced auction buyers wait until the last minute to bid, feeling that if they bid too soon, the higher price will only encourage other bidders. Taking that a step further, there is software that will bid on the buyers’ behalf at the last possible moment.

On the other hand, you might have an item that is common, and many copies are available on Ebay. This might be better sold as a Fixed Price item. You can set the price at, or slightly below the other ones currently being offered, unless the condition of yours is above the others. Fixed price items are more likely to sell because many buyers don’t want to play the auction game. They want an item as soon as possible, and they want to know for sure that they won the transaction. They don’t want to wait a week to see if their bid was sufficient.

Another advantage with Fixed Price is that you can save money. It costs around 30 cents (US) to list an auction item on Ebay, but as little as five cents for a fixed price item if you have an Ebay store, which I’ll cover in more detail a few paragraphs from now.

To get an idea about which items do best as Auction, and which are most often sold as Fixed Price, you can look again at Completed Listings, and see which were offered as Auction and which as Fixed Price. You can also study how other sellers handled shipping charges, and which categories they listed successful and unsuccessful items in. You can click on any item to drill in and see the pictures and read the description to figure out what the seller did, and whether it worked well – made money – or not. From there, you can even click on statistics on the seller to find out what kind of feedback the seller has, what other items the seller is currently selling, and what items the seller has actually sold during the past 30 days.

To give you another view on Fixed Price versus Auction, imagine that you have two saxophones. One is a regular student-model Bundy. The other is a Selmer Paris. There are two other Bundys for sale like yours. There are no Selmer Paris saxophones. So which one will do better sold as fixed price, a which is a better play for an auction?

Another example: You have a Swiss army knife that you’ve seen a hundred times before. There are six of the same model on Ebay already. That would be fixed price. On the other hand, what if even though you are an expert on Swiss army knives, the one you have is a knife you’ve never seen before? Some crazy obscure model. Right, auction!

After some more choices on the Ebay page, you get to decide about shipping options. You can have the buyer pay a shipping fee in any amount you choose, or you can include free shipping. Free shipping may make some items feel less costly to the buyers, but most are sophisticated enough to know that the shipping cost is absorbed in an inflated overall price. So, I generally go with an added shipping charge – charging slightly more than the packaging material and actual shipping cost. If the shipping price is too inflated, you may lose sales and get negative feedback.

You often see things like laptop computers listed for a remarkably low price, but a high shipping price. For instance, a MacBook Pro, that would normally be $2,000, is being sold for $500, but the shipping fee is $1,700. I believe the seller thinks he can trick someone into buying that laptop. But will the hassle and negative feedback be worth the ‘trick?’

You can figure out shipping costs at the major shipper websites. For instance at USPS.com (the United States Post Office), you can enter package weight, dimensions if needed, a specific shipping service such as Priority Mail, and figure out how much an item will cost to ship. Don’t forget that it will cost about a buck on average for a box and packing materials, unless you use the free Priority Mail and other envelopes and boxes supplied by USPS.com. It’s pretty much the same for UPS and Fed Ex. USPS tends to be a bit less costly for items under two pounds (1 kg) in weight. In time, you may want to buy a postal scale. Make sure to get a model that goes to at least 20 pounds (10 kg). When I started out, I had a five pound scale, and was constantly frustrated at having to guess the weights of six and seven pound packages. What’s the best source for a scale at a good price? Right, Ebay!

Keep in mind that when you just ship an occasional thing on Ebay, you can take all the time in the world to fashion your own packaging out of old cardboard boxes and junk you have in your garage. But as you start shipping five or ten items a day, you’ll want to spend some money on consistent packaging materials to save valuable time.

Also keep in mind that some things are really hard to ship. A bicycle will be much harder to package than you can imagine, until you’ve tried it once. Not only that, a bicycle probably surpasses the maximum size that the Post Office and UPS will allow. This reduces your shipping options and raises your cost. For fragile items such as guitars, double-boxing is best. Pack your guitar securely in a box, as if it had to survive a run-away conveyor belt, falling off the back of a truck, and an angry delivery person. Then, put that box in a larger box, with at least an inch (3cm) of padding all around.

If you live near a fairly large population, you can sell large items that are not cost effective to ship. You might have a chair that’s only worth $50, but the shipping cost would be another $100. So, shipping it is not a viable option. Instead, you set the shipping arrangement as No Shipping, Local Pickup Only. People in your area may bid on the chair and come by your place to pick it up. This severely reduces the number of people who are likely to want it. Occasionally, for a particularly valuable item, people will drive a thousand miles to come get it. This happens with antique tractors, for instance. If you do choose Local Pickup Only, add that to your description, to make it clear to people who are not in your area, that you are not providing a shipping option.

Ebay has a program called Global Shipping for US sellers with Ebay stores (which I’ll discuss in a moment). For most categories of items, you can click a checkbox, and Global Shipping will be allowed on your listing. If someone in one of the qualifying countries (not all countries are supported) buys your item, they pay an amount that’s more than the shipping charge you’re asking. You are reimbursed the same as if you were shipping to a US customer. You are given an address of a building in Kentucky, where your item is packaged with all other packages currently going to the same country and shipped in a big lot. Once it arrives in the receiving country, it is then mailed to the buyer using the best local transportation company. This saves the buyer money, and makes your life much easier. Otherwise, you’d have to figure out a price for the non-USA buyers, and fill out a customs form for each item you send. You’d also be responsible for refunding in the cases of lost packages, which is unfortunately common in overseas shipments. Ebay takes care of all those things for you with Global Shipping.

When you list an occasional item on Ebay, you pay 30 cents (US)for a fixed price listing, plus closing fees when it sells. If it doesn’t sell in a month, you’ve lost 30 cents. You have the option to keep it listed for another 30 cents. You can imagine that for a thousand items, this would start to add up.

The answer is Ebay Stores. A store subscription costs from $20 to $200 per month. You can save a bit with a long-term contract, but it is not required. At the basic store level ($19.95 per month), you can list up to 150 items for free – no insertion fee. At the highest level, you get to list 2,500 items with no listing fee, and after that, each item is only five cents. So, you can keep thousands of items listed month after month for a few hundred dollars per month. Once you have thousands of items, a mere few hundred dollars in listing fees will seem like an excellent deal. Stores give you some other advantages. Your listings that are similar to what others have can be promoted higher in Ebay search results. You can have a ‘presence’ on Ebay, with webpages specifically dedicated to your store. You get some special features, such as the ability to run a sale across all, or selected portions of your listings.

Once you have a store, you get to use a section of Ebay called Selling Manager Pro. With this, you can change prices of up to 500 items at a time, as well as many other bulk and individual adjustments. Let’s say you want to add Global Shipping to all your items. Just a few clicks, and they are all changed. With a store, you can organize your items into categories, include descriptions and pictures of your place of business, if you wish, build an opt-in email list of buyers and browsers, and some other tricks.

Having sold over 20,000 items on Ebay, I have found that Ebay and PayPal are good, responsive, reliable companies. I’ve also heard all sorts of rumors that PayPal does this ‘evil’ thing, and Ebay does that horrible thing. None of these rumors have proven to be true for me. If you have a store on Ebay, they offer additional options in support, including as much free support by telephone as you’d like.

Reverse Auctions

I have found the best way to get the most profit out of common, non-collectible items, is to use Fixed Price with what I call a reverse auction. I start the prices of everything way too high, then, lower the price by one percent per day using Selling Manager Pro. A few people will buy things at the way too high price, especially if there are no others like mine currently available. Most others will buy them when the price falls to market value. If something just doesn’t interest anyone in the world, the price continues to fall until it hits a chosen minimum and finally someone is willing to buy it. This is not a good thing for items which have good value, but are seldom purchased, but for common merchandise, reverse auctions is a profitable technique.

My minimum price is $9.95. I feel like anything less simply does not pay for the time in photographing, listing, picking, packing and shipping it, as well as handling the occasional emailed questions that might pop up.

So what’s with the people selling things for a dollar or less? Some are depending on the shipping price to make up the difference. Someone may sell a collectible coin for 99 cents, but then charge a $5 shipping fee. Their profit is in the difference between the $5 and the actual cost of shipping, which may be less than a dollar.

Still, that doesn’t explain all the super-cheap stuff out there. Why would someone sell a pack of guitar strings for $1 with free shipping? I don’t know! But I have some theories:

1. To some sellers, it is better to sell every item rather than throw them away. They are seriously interested in recycling to the best of their ability.

2. Some people live rent free in trailers behind their parents’ house. They ship with all recycled materials. Their merchandise came from dumpsters, house cleaning, or other free sources. To them, a dollar is a windfall.

3. Sometimes children may be responsible for the low prices. Under a parent’s supervision, a child may run an Ebay account, and be willing to sell an old X-Box game for pennies, just for the instructional thrill of participating in Ebay.

4. Sometimes, it is a mistake. The seller didn’t realize that an auction would actually close at the opening bid. The seller may have been dreaming that someone would bid $50 for his fossilized trilobite, but no, the only interested buyer got it for a buck.

With certain merchandise, people are less likely to buy something online that they can’t touch, hear, smell or feel. This kind of item is harder to get realistic bids on.

This is especially true of musical instruments, because most people would like to hear their sound quality. One trick if you happen to sell instruments is to link in a sound recording made from the instrument you’re selling. Taking that notion a step further, if you’re selling something like a camera, you might show a picture that was taken with that camera. selling a computer? Show something enticing on the screen of the computer.

Buying on Ebay

The experienced Ebay buyer often gets fantastic deals. Once the things arrive, you can sell them on Craigslist, through your own retail store, on consignment, or in some cases, you can put them back on Ebay at a profit.

There are two good ways to buy on Ebay.

The first way, the one you’d expect, is to win auctions. When something comes up that you’d like, or more specifically, something that you think you can make a profit on, perhaps a Korg keyboard, you can study the listing a bit.

First, you can see whether others like it have sold in the past 30 days on Ebay, and how much money people paid. As I mentioned earlier, you can just enter the item in the search field at the top of almost any Ebay page, then select “Sold Listings” from the options at the left. When looking at sold listings, make sure to factor in the shipping charge. For example, a steamer trunk that sold for $100, really cost the buyer $270, when you add in the $170 shipping charge.

That tells you the Ebay price, but Ebay prices are often depressed compared to what a person who can actually touch, hear, or smell an item, such as a local craigslist buyer, is willing to pay.

You might check Amazon.com and elsewhere to see if there are current price guides for the kind of items you focus on. I have an acoustic guitar price guide that I have referred to from time to time. Old price guides will mislead you, so make sure to get current ones.

Look at the item’s pictures and read the description carefully. Are there any photos that ought to be there but aren’t? For instance, if you can’t see the corner of a painting, it might be because the seller is hiding a defect in the corner. Descriptions can be deceptively worded, not clearly letting you know that parts are missing, or the item is misbehaving in some way. One thing that is seldom discussed, but can be important, especially for items with cloth or leather components, is the odor of mildew or cigarette smoke. You can contact the seller with questions that the description left unanswered.

In the rare case that the photos and description are clear, yet the item that arrives is unsatisfactory, the seller is responsible. If the seller won’t make good on the deal, Ebay has buyer protection – a kind of insurance – to back you up. In the worst case scenario, assuming you played by Ebay’s rules, within the permitted time frame, Ebay will refund your entire purchase price. Still, you may have to package and ship the item back to the seller at your expense. Let’s quickly examine two examples:

You purchased a Dell Studio 17 laptop, but instead got the smaller and less valuable Dell Studio 15. Nowhere in the listing did it say you’d be getting the 15-inch model. In fact, the listing’s title specifically said “Dell Studio 17.” If the seller won’t cover you, Ebay will.

You purchased a beautiful sweater, but it has a serious cigarette smoke oder. The listing doesn’t mention anything about the smell of the sweater, and you didn’t ask. I don’t know for sure, but I’m guessing that due to the ambiguity of the situation, Ebay may not cover you.

Feedback can be a good indicator for a buyer. If a seller has almost 100% positive feedback, and a lot of it, you can pretty well trust that all will be fine. If there is some neutral or negative feedback, you can drill into it and see what happened. Some negative feedback is just crazy. There is a small percentage of people who are not quite sane, and sometimes this results in inappropriate negative feedback.

In a recent case, I bought a laptop computer that was slow to arrive. I knew that I might expect that, since the seller had three negatives in the past month, all were about having taken more than a month to ship the items. I bought it because I wasn’t in a hurry, and I knew Ebay Buyer Protection would cover me if it didn’t arrive at all. It did arrive in a reasonable amount of time.

In another case, a seller had two negatives in the past month. In both cases, he took parts out of the laptops before shipping them. In my opinion, that’s just plain weird, but on Ebay, you’re dealing with everyone and anyone, so this kind of thing can happen. Needless to say, I didn’t buy that person’s computer.

There are two best ways to buy things on Ebay.

The first is exactly what you would expect: You can bid on items being auctioned, and if your bid is higher than anyone else’s, you’ll win. Auctions can run 1, 3, 5, 7 or 10 days. You can bid any time you want, and you can bid as much as you’re willing to pay. Even though your maximum bid may be quite a bit higher than the current price, your actual bid is only one increment up from the current high price, generally a dollar in the USA. So, if an item has been bid up to $78, and you enter a maximum bid of $150, your actual bid will be only $79. But, if someone then offers $80, your bid goes up to $81. Because almost everyone offers maximum bids in excess of the current price, the price can suddenly jump as the automated maximum bids duke it out. If the current high bid is $79, and the other person’s maximum is $140, then as soon as you offer $150, your actual bid goes to $141.

Everyone believes it is best to bid at the last possible moment. This way, people won’t see that others are interested, and the casual buyers are less likely to bid. You can watch items’ bids grow during the last minute. It is kind of fun to see, unless you are one of the bidders. You’ll see a porcelain vase go from $20, to $22, to $35, to $91, to $148, all in the last few seconds. Some bidders are actually sitting at their keyboards physically clicking their mice at the last possible moment. Others are using “sniping” software that will bid for them, based on rules they have set minutes or even days before.

Occasionally, items that were set to end in the wee hours of the morning will get fewer bids. Items that are only appealing to a few buyers, none of whom have been watching Ebay lately, may close at the minimum bid, or no bids at all. Items that are imperfect in some way that you are willing to accept can be good deals. This is especially true if you can repair things like computers, cameras, clothing, or musical instruments, and know exactly what’s wrong with an item being offered. One of the best ways to get things is to find items that are not properly described, or even misspelled. What if you search for “cammera?” You may find a very good camera that no one has bid on, because when other potential buyers entered “camera” it didn’t show up in their searches. This is especially true if the “cammera” is also listed in the wrong category. I once saw a guitar listed under fountain pens. However, the Ebay search engine is very intelligent. When you enter “cammera” it may show you a list of all cameras. Conversely, if a seller has called his thing a gituar it may show up in guitar search results. I believe most searches start with a keyword, not a category search, so again, there’s a bit less power in looking for things that are misspelled.

The other way to buy, and one that’s more consistent, less stressful, but also less exciting, and perhaps less profitable, is to find “Buy It Now” listings that are too low. A seller unloading his old student-day stuff might not realize that a saxophone in any reasonable condition is worth hundreds of dollars, and list it for $75. This happens more often than you’d guess.

The problem is that there are other dealers also looking for undervalued saxophones. So, the listing may last only fifteen minutes before someone snaps it up. The professional fixed price buyer has bookmarked Ebay search results sorted into just the right criteria, and checks the pages several times a day. For instance, the saxophone buyer may be looking in “Musical Instruments | Woodwinds | Saxophones,” with settings for “Fixed Price Only” sorted by “Most Recently Listed First,” and a price range under $200. The same buyer may have another bookmark on “Musical Instruments | Woodwinds | Flutes” and a maximum of $150. She may also have entered “-wood -wooden” in the search field, to exclude all the wooden flutes.

Did I say snapping up Fixed Price offerings is less stressful? Maybe not. When you see something that just came up, you’ve got to quickly read the description, check the pictures, check the shipping charge, check the seller’s feedback, then maybe check a price guide, and see if you already have too many of the item in your inventory, all before someone else buys it. But this can be fun, right?



Partnerships

When considering a partnership, you want to look for someone who has what you don’t have. Starting out with a partner who has the same strengths and weaknesses as you, means something won’t be covered. That’s a recipe for disaster. Generally, the three ingredients that a partnership (or an individual) needs are time, experience, and sometimes money. There’s a fourth ingredient – one that all partners need, and that’s enthusiasm. You absolutely don’t want to start something with someone who is not enthusiastic about the idea.

Before forming a partnership, carefully assess your partner’s personality. Will you be able to get along with this person? How about in cloudy weather? Is the person lazy? Does the person have shoddy ethics? Is the person obstinate? I once saw a bicycle shop almost destroy itself because one partner of the three who owned it suddenly decided that they needed new wall-to-wall carpeting just a few months after starting the store. That would have cost $10,000. I think any objective person would agree that carpeting was not a top priority in that store. It had a painted concrete floor that was just fine. But, he couldn’t be talked out of it, and the partners nearly came to blows. Finally, the two other partners bought this fellow out, at an inflated price that took them years to recover.

In another case, a partner got evicted from his apartment, and decided to live in the inventory storage area, against his partner’s wishes, leaving little room for the business, and violating the local zoning ordinance. This fellow would do things like wake up, and walk out among customers in the showroom at 11am, unshaven and shirtless. Nice partner, eh?

In putting together a performing group, whether it’s a duo, trio or a large band, all the members must have enough interest in the project that you can be absolutely sure they’ll show up at gigs on time. They must also be the sort of people who won’t embarrass the group by showing up drugged or drunk, or say inappropriate things on stage, or when mixing with the audience. You also need entertainers who are in alignment with your group’s philosophies and performance style. Finally, a band member must have ego and emotions sufficiently in check to avoid damaging the band’s potential as a group. All this is necessary, in addition to being an adequately skilled entertainer.

So, if you’re going to consider a partnership, think about all the things that might go wrong with your perspective partners. Do not mention the idea of a partnership to any of your prospects until you are absolutely certain. It is harder to burst their bubble after you’ve created it, than before they know a partnership is possible.

Family members can be the best, or the worst! I think you know what I’m talking about. A grandfather-grandson (or grandmother-granddaughter) partnership can be wonderful with the right people. I’m sure you can think of several successful family performing groups such as the Trapp Family, Jackson Five, and the Haygoods.




The Haygoods

Click for YouTube Video

In a retail setting, families can get away with some things that normal employee-employer relationships cannot. For instance, an uncle may own a store, and may have a 14-year-old neice operate the cash register for an hour a day after school. As a partner, she can be paid less than an adult would need and expect. At the same time, she is learning business skills and social interaction.

In another example, you may have a brother on disability with multiple sclerosis. During good times, your brother can help in the shipping department, and really enjoys being useful. Your brother can be a limited partner. During bad times, the brother is not required to come to work. During the good times, you can spend your time on inventory management, but during the bad times, you work in the shipping department.

Of course, arrangements like these are legally fuzzy, so you’ll want to check your local laws first. If you’re working with someone who is receiving government assistance of any kind, you want to carefully check the legalities and limits. For instance, you may discover that a person in a certain situation can earn up to $1,500 per month, but the amount earned must be deducted from disability payments. Or, perhaps someone can earn up to $300 per month without needing to report it. Or, in a more lucrative partnership, your family member, friend – whoever your partner is, may be in a perfect position to blow off government assistance entirely, earning a living from your partnership.

Here’s a look at another common but unfortunate scenario: Let’s say you have a brother who has been in jail twice for drunk driving. He’s unemployed again because he came to work too hung-over. You might think that if you offer this brother of yours a partnership, it will help him. Wrong! You must, absolutely must, consider partners for their strengths, not their weaknesses, if you intend to succeed. And if you don’t succeed, it will not help your brother in the slightest. It will probably make his lack of self-esteem worse.

How many partners should you consider? The minimum number you can get away with. If all you need is someone with repair skill, a good drummer, or someone who can keep the shop open during weekends, then one partner is sufficient. Additional partners means that the profit is split smaller. It also means it is harder to make decisions. Larry Page and Sergei Brin have been very successful with Google. When it came time to make decisions, they had a brief discussion, came to a consensus, and moved forward.

On the other hand, I knew of an organic restaurant that had 17 partners. One of their specialties was waffles. They had one waffle iron, and so customers had to wait up to 45 minutes for their orders in the morning. The 17 of them had a meeting to decide whether they should buy a second $30 waffle iron. The meeting, argument really, ran until after midnight, and they couldn’t come to a decision. In fact, it was weeks before they could all figure out that $30 was a reasonable price to pay for another waffle iron to satisfy their breakfast customers.

Once you’ve sorted out who your partners are going to be, you need to state some things up front. Is one going to be a silent partner? If so, how silent? How will various kinds of decisions be made? For instance, the person who’s just about to book a gig probably shouldn’t have to place a phone call to another partner before the gig can be scheduled. What happens as the business grows? Do you add more partners? Do you hire employees? How do the partners decide on new employees?

All the terms of partnership need to be discussed. More than discussed. You want the major points in writing, and a contract signed by all partners.

The very most important clause in that contract will be an escape hatch for each partner. What happens if the business loses money? What happens if a partner becomes sick or dies? What happens if two partners can’t stand the sight of each other after a while? Escape clauses need to be fluid. For instance, if a partner wants to leave early on, his value in the business is worth far less than after five years. These escape clauses must be manageable, so that it is truly possible to make changes in the partnership as needed. For instance, a very bad escape clause would be that if a partner leaves, the others have to immediately pay her $500,000. If a good escape clause and other such situations are all spelled out in writing ahead of time, all will be well in these eventualities – or at least as well as it can be.

Another consideration in partnerships is your own personality. Take me, for example. I can’t stand having to share my decisions with anyone. I have always had to have full control. I’d make a horrible partner unless I was allowed to run the show one hundred percent.

So, on the opposite end of the partnership spectrum we have sole proprietorship. The individual doesn’t have to defer to anyone before making major decisions. One hundred percent of the profit goes to the individual. That’s huge, even with just two partners. Let’s say that the profit of a business is $60,000 per year. That means that an individual takes home $60,000. But two partners owning the same business would only get $30,000 each.

There’s also an ego component. I love being able to say, “I own this.” For me, it would be miserable to say, “I own a portion of this.”

Getting back to the original question, what if you don’t have the time, experience or money to start a business on your own? And once again, there is a very simple answer. Start something evolutionary. Do you really need a drummer, or just a drum machine? Do you really need someone to keep the shop open in the evenings, or can you just close at 5pm? Start something that you can manage, and let it build as you gain experience, money, whatever you’ve been needing.



The Sure-Fire Millionaire

As I indicated in the last chapter, partnerships are expensive. I mean really expensive. I’m not saying don’t get partners, I’m just saying you should consider expensive options carefully, weighing them against potential profit.

For instance, you might think the decision to buy a cup of coffee at Starbucks is simple – just do it. But what if I tell you that cup of coffee will cost you $42? Would you still buy it?

Let me explain. If instead of that $3 cup of coffee, you put the money in an investment such as a mutual fund, and leave it there for 20 years, it will, on average, turn into $42. I knew a fellow who understood this so well that he made millions of dollars, yet he worked for nearly minimum wage.

When I met him, Brian was 48 years old. He had retired with several million dollars two years earlier at age 46. When he was 26 years old, he got a job for Sears, driving a van, and repairing washing machines and driers in peoples’ homes, which pays just a bit more than minimum wage.

At one home, Brian met a couple who told him that he ought to ‘pay himself first.’ He asked what they meant, and it sounded like a good idea. So every week, he took 25 percent of his paycheck after taxes, and put it in a savings account. Then whatever was left went to rent, food, and fun. That wasn’t very much, but he wasn’t making very much in the first place.

Week after week, Brian kept it up, until he had $10,000 in his savings account. He knew he’d have to learn something about investing. Even though he didn’t feel like learning about that, he went to the library and started studying up – this was before the Internet. He learned about mutual funds, municipal bonds, money market accounts, and even some things that didn’t begin with “m.” He moved the money from the savings account into better investments.

Brian was content with his job at Sears, and not really qualified for anything else. He kept ‘paying himself first’ year after year. In fact, in the first years, his investment fund grew frustratingly slowly. Yet, early on he remained what you might consider painfully careful about spending money. He could certainly have purchased a 35-inch TV, or even a 60-inch TV, but he knew how much that would actually cost. He felt his 21-inch TV was just fine, considering the bigger picture.

He learned to buy only the best car he could buy with cash – no payments. At first, this meant he had to keep his old car a few years longer than he might have.

He couldn’t really impress people with material goods. (He did impress people with his common sense.) He couldn’t buy fancy clothes. It had to be Wal-Mart, and only when necessary. Sometimes he bought clothes at the thrift stores. After twenty years, he retired. He can now have pretty much anything he wants. He dresses well. He travels when he wants. Brian has a new Jaguar that cost $88,000, paid with cash, of course. Now, he can really impress people with material goods!

I think you can see that Brian was patient. Patience is a wonderful attribute in business. Just about any business you start, if you are patient, if you are willing to accept the occasional setback, grow it slowly, stay interested, you’ll be successful. Maybe even beyond your wildest dreams!

The Psychology of Making Money

Here’s another little story about patience in business. Steve was a science-fiction writer. Or, well, he wanted to be. He figured that if he could co-write with the big names in science fiction, he’d succeed. He pitched ideas to Larry Niven, Robert Heinlein and other big names in science fiction, and some of them accepted the idea of co-writing with him. For eighteen years, he wrote with these famous writers. One after another, the books flopped. The publishers would pay a small advance, then no royalties came in. To make ends meet, he taught English at the local college. Eventually, Steve’s name became poison in the industry. No one would co-write with him any more. All these great writers knew that if they wrote a book with Steve, it would fail.

Out of desperation, he wrote a book by himself. It became an international best seller.

Now, eighteen years is extreme. I tell the story only to illustrate patience. For you and I, just a few months can seem like years. But if you can stick it out those months, you’ll probably see some level of success. Even if your success is slow, you can stick with it, and eventually you’ll have your major success.

Also, note that the story didn’t go the way Steve figured. He thought he had to co-write. Turns out, a little adjustment made all the difference. Don’t force your story to go the way you figure. Allow for some flexibility. Look around the edges of things. See what you can experiment with. See what you can change. Have fun. You’ll do fine. Better than fine! For instance, in my first bicycle store, I totally ignored used bikes. They were ‘beneath my dignity.’ I wanted my place to be a ‘pro’ store, and the way I saw it, used bikes didn’t fit the paradigm. Somehow, in my second bicycle store, I had loosened my grip a bit, and started dealing in some second hand bikes. Guess what? They brought four times more income than the new bikes. Furthermore, the ‘pro’ customers were attracted to the secondhand bikes, and bought and sold some very high-end used bikes with me.

You probably heard about the three gold miners in California. They staked a claim where they were fairly certain they’d hit a big vein, and dug. And dug. And dug some more, but no gold. Finally, they gave up, selling their mine for nearly nothing. The new owners started digging. They went three feet (1 meter), and hit the biggest gold vein yet found in California.



Advertising and Publicity

It is easy to buy advertising. There are many salespeple who would love to have you advertise in their newspaper, in their phonebook, their website, or on their radio or TV station. If it doesn’t bring the results you expected, they’ll just tell you that you didn’t buy enough advertising yet. They’ll tell you people need to hear the same message over and over. But you do need to buy some advertising, right?

Did I say, “buy” advertising? I meant “get free publicity.” Just about any form of advertising that a small business can afford will be entirely ineffective. Yellow pages ads are the worst. You end up paying a lot of money per month to the phone company, or a phonebook publisher, and get little effect. People don’t use phone books any more. They use the Internet. So you’ll want a website. It can be a simple one-page affair. All people want is your contact information. You can do some search engine optimization (SEO) tricks, discussed in the next chapter, to get people to your webpage. If you’re in a city with a dozen other similar businesses, they’ll all have their own websites, and without search engine optimization, you might be 13th on the list when people google your town name and specialty.

You can do more to boost a website in search results, but you may not have to. Remember that most people using the Internet to find a local business will already know your business name, and what your business does. They’re just looking for your address or phone number. You can bring in new customers through a website in a few ways, but it is perhaps more work than non-website ways to bring in customers. For instance, your website can have a virtual museum specializing in bicycles, musical instruments, vacuum cleaners, whatever you sell. If you have pages of pictures and descriptions of unusual or antique items, it becomes a valuable Internet resource. You can also become an ‘authority’ site. You might post the schedule of local events, a blog for people in your specialty, or the local competition schedule and results from last week’s competitions, and things of that nature.

So, when it comes to paid advertising, almost nothing works for a small business. Good free publicity, on the other hand, can change things overnight.

You may be thinking I’m talking about sending press releases to the local newspapers, radio and TV stations announcing that you have a new business or have added something to your business. That can have a small effect. Much greater is to do something newsworthy, meaning, something positively eccentric.

I mentioned this to a bike shop owner, and he said, “Oh, like give away free water bottles printed with the store logo?” He didn’t get it. Better is to sponsor something unique. Sponsoring a compelling but unusual free entertainment event, or offering a half-hour of free studio or workshop access is a start. Getting clients to wear your custom printed T-Shirts is a step in the right direction. Then, they will hopefully tell friends to do business with you. That will have a small effect, but it is not newsworthy, and it really isn’t free, because you have to pay for the T-shirts. I’m talking about something newsworthy. Let me give you an example.

Customers of an old bookstore in San Francisco used to complain from time to time because is was sort of dark in there, especially in the deeper shelves. That gave the owner an idea. He held a special sale. All books were 1/2-off. But, the sale ran from midnight to 1am one night. And, he turned all the lights out. At the door, all the customers were handed flashlights. That not only made the news, but it is still talked about today, 20 years later. After reading the story, thousands of new customers visited the store, mostly because they were curious to see if was as dark as people said.

At another bookstore, some college students created an art project. Their idea was to rearrange all the books, not by subject and title, but by color. Shopping there during that time may have been tedious, but all sorts of people came by to see it, and no doubt many of them came away with books they would never have noticed normally. (After two weeks, the same college students put all the books back in subject and alphabetical order.)

So, what kind of positive eccentricity can you think of for your business?

As I mentioned, having at least a basic website is important for most businesses. Fortunately, a one-page site is sufficient for most, and easy to create. You can do positive eccentricity on a website as well. We’ll talk a lot more about websites in the next chapter.

A guy who’s business was repairing Apple computers uploaded a little video to YouTube, and linked to his website, that showed him dropping a PC and a Mac computer off a six-story building. Both crashed to the sidewalk. The Windows computer was smashed to bits, but with the aid of trick photography, the Mac had only a couple of scratches. That was a fun video.

Then there’s the old fashioned way, business cards and flyers. Putting business cards in everyone’s hands who comes your way can build a business slowly, but surely. Of course, giving them something more interesting such as a keyring tape measure, or an interesting hologram will be more effective. A computer tutor can give out business cards that have a chart of the common [Ctrl] (or [Command] on Mac) keyboard shortcuts.
You know:

[Ctrl] + [A] = Select All

[Ctrl] + [C] = Copy

[Ctrl] + [F] = Find

[Ctrl] + [V] = Paste

[Ctrl] + [X] = Cut

[Ctrl] + [Z] = Undo

So what kind of information could you put on the back of your business cards?

For local businesses such as offering lessons, or repair, putting something on all the local bulletin boards can surprise you. You’ll get more business with no cost. Bulletin boards at laundromats work well, because patrons have to spend idle time waiting for the wash. You might think that laundromats attract low-end clientele – those who can’t afford their own appliances. This is true, but they also attract a higher-end clientele. These would be customers who have to wash blankets bigger than their home washer can handle, or people who are waiting for their home machine to be repaired, or – I hate to say it – people who will wash rags in a public machine because they don’t want to mess up their own machine.

Bulletin boards at natural food stores work especially well. I’m not quite sure why. Bulletin boards at diners, quick-change oil places, and elsewhere can work well, too. The best kind of flyer is one that makes only a few quick points, because too much text is hard to read. The best flyers have little pull-off tabs at the bottom with your name and/or what you do, and your contact info, generally your phone number. You might want to have full-page and half-page flyers, since many bulletin boards are too full to accommodate full pages. When space is very limited, you can put several business cards fanned out under a thumb tack, indicating to people it is OK to take a card. For this use, the cards ought to have large text that’s easy to read at a distance. There’s a color called “Solar Yellow,” that’s very bright and sometimes used for cards and flyers. It is a bit loud for sure, but in a jumble of white flyers, it gets noticed.

Sometimes people will tear off a tab on each of the flyers they put up. This is to make the general public think there’s interest in what the flyer advertises.



Websites That Work

Just about any business will benefit from a website. In fact, some businesses can be entirely websites.

You don’t have to be an HTML master programmer to make effective websites. In fact, you don’t have to know anything at all about HTML, Javascript, or any of that.

There are now several places where you can create your own website by simply cutting and pasting or entering text, dropping in a picture or two, and click an OK button. Wix, Blogger.com and Tumblr.com come to mind. However, if you want to take advantage of all the ideas below, you might want to learn some basic HTML, or just hire someone to help you with the optimization parts.

Whenever you hire someone to help you with a website, make sure to maintain all access. You don’t want the site on some guy’s server. You want it on a big national company’s server such as Bluehost.com or Godaddy.com. Because, what if your webmaster goes broke, leaves town, or has an argument with his wife and shuts down his server?

It is very important to get all passwords associated with the site. You don’t want to have to hire the same webmaster over and over again for each little change that you could eventually make yourself, or pay someone else to make for you. I can’t tell you how many times, I, as a business coach, have had to tell business owners (kindly), “I told you not to trust that webmaster.”

The most important thing websites need is visitors. There are three main ways to get visitors.

1. Buy advertising. That mostly doesn’t work. Or more specifically, with enough money you can buy visitors, but that would be fewer visitors than you would need to pay for the advertising. I think it was Pets.com that was famous for that. Right before the big tech crash of 2000, this company had a popular website. It turned out that the company had spent millions of investors’ dollars on advertising, and their revenue was far below the expenditures.

There is one form of advertising that can work for many businesses, especially local businesses. That’s Google AdWords. You can sign up for an AdWords account for free. Once there, you bid on keywords. They should actually be called “key phrases” because most keywords are more than one word. Let’s say your keyword is “Piano lessons San Francisco.” You may find that your closest competitor has bid $2.17 per click on that same keyword. You can bid $2.18. Then, your ad will show up at more websites, and closer to the top of the paid side of Google search results, than your competitor. So, your ad is then shown on random websites. Well, not random. Targeted. This means that if someone has a website that has to do with piano lessons in San Francisco, your ad – and your competitors’ ads – will show up on that site. Or if no one has a site about piano lessons in San Francisco, then you’ll show up on websites about piano lessons, and other sites about San Francisco. When someone clicks your ad to go to your website, Google takes $2.18 from your account. You can adjust maximums, and all sorts of other settings so that if it runs wild, you won’t go broke. You can do things like change your keyword to “Piano Lessons San Rafael (a small city on the other side of the Golden Gate Bridge), which may not cost anywhere near $2.18 per click.

AdWords works particularly well because it is well-targeted. Google’s automated software does a good job of making sure your ad shows up on only the most relevant sites, and with only the most relevant search results.

Google also uses a technique that some think of as magical, and others feel is an invasion of privacy. They will show your ads to someone who has shown interest in your product or service. For instance, I was looking at Dremel tools one day on a couple of websites. For the next two weeks, ads for Dremel tools showed up in the ads on many of the sites I visited.

Think about the results: If you’re teaching piano at $30 to $90 per hour, how much would you pay to get another student? Each student would be worth hundreds or maybe thousands of dollars, right? So what’s $2.18 compared to that? Not everyone who clicks through to your website will buy lessons, but the ads are well-targeted, so a good many will sign up for lessons. Especially if your website is well-designed, which we’ll talk about in a minute.

2. SEO – Search Engine Optimization. You can do some simple things to make sure your website shows up near the top of search results in Google, Yahoo, Bing, and other search engines. We’ll talk mostly about Google, because it is the elephant in the room. My guess is that at least 70 percent of all searches are done through Google, with the remaining 30 percent handled by Bing, Yahoo and many lesser search engines. Then too, if you make a website that works well with Google, it will work pretty much the same with the other search engines.

Google ‘ranks’ pages based on how closely parts of the page match the keyword people are searching for, and on how many other websites link to a page. The first aspect, matching elements of the page to the keyword is easy. The second is more work and takes longer to achieve, yet may be less important.

By the way, don’t let anyone tell you they have a magic formula to get top ranking. There are hundreds of companies out there willing to take your money for search engine optimization that is all smoke and mirrors. What you are going to read in the next few paragraphs is the heart and soul of search engine optimization. Oh, there are some complicated schemes that might bring a marginal increase in results, but these companies that promise the sky do not deliver. That’s guaranteed.

So, if people are searching for “piano lessons San Francisco,” all you need to do is put that phrase in the page title – between the title tags, and in the meta
description tags, in the head section of HTML of your web page, in a H1 tag near the top of the page, and in the body of the text in a couple of places.

It can be helpful to have a page filename that also matches the keyword, such as www.mywebsite.com/pianolessonssanfrancisco.htm. Google says that as of October 2012, having an exact match page name is no longer significant. However, I have noticed that if you have an exact match domain name, such as www.pianolessonssanfrancisco.com, Google seems to index your page – include it in their search engine listings – within a day or two, rather than within two to three weeks.

So how many people are looking for “piano lessons San Francisco?” It would be important to know that, wouldn’t it?

As of now, 210 people per month are entering that keyword. How do I know? I used the Google AdWords Keyword Planner. It’s free when you sign up at adwords.google.com. Signing up for AdWords is also free. It only costs money if you place a bid on a keyword. You can enter any potential keyword, and it will show you how many people are searching for that. It will also tell you how much AdWords bidders are paying for the keyword and some other interesting information. It will then offer a list of related keywords, in case you find there are already too many websites optimized for your keyword.

Once you are on the AdWords home page, select the “Tools and Analysis” tab, and then “Keyword Planner.” Once that’s in front of you, select “Search for new keyword and ad group ideas.” Enter a keyword in the “Enter Your Product or Service” field, the scroll down and click the “Get Ideas” button.

You’ll see an interesting list, but that’s not the list you’re looking for. Click the “Keyword Ideas” tab. Now you see information for your specific keyword – data about the people who have entered exactly your keyword into Google, and below that, you’ll see a long list of suggested keywords based on what you entered.

So, the next step is to see how many people have already optimized websites for your keyword. Good news, well fairly good: Not many people have optimized sites for “Piano Lessons San Francisco.” When you simply enter that keyword in the Google search engine, several sites come up, some which have the term in their titles, descriptions or

tags, but none seem to be doing it in all four.

As you may know, you can see the source code of any web page by right clicking (or [Ctrl] and click on a Mac) and selecting “View Page Source” in FireFox, or from within a context-sensitive menu on other browsers.

So if you were teaching piano lessons in San Francisco, you could be the top page in Google search results, and most of 210 people a month who are actually looking for piano lessons in San Francisco would click through to your website. Gosh, that could bring you 50 or 100 new students every month! So many that you could raise your rates and pick which students you want to teach.

But, if many websites already used your keyword, there are still some things you can do. You can change the keyword a little bit, checking the Google AdWords Keyword Tool and actual search results, until you get something that has enough people looking, and isn’t highly optimized. Maybe “Piano Lessons Berkeley” (a nearby community) or “Piano Instruction San Francisco,” or “Classical Piano San Francisco.”

You can optimize for more than one keyword. If you have a local business, you can make a whole bunch of similar web pages each focused on one area, or put several area names in your tags. For instance, “Piano Lessons San Francisco, Concord, San Mateo, San Rafael, Sausalito.”

If your business is national or international, such as a website designed to make money by itself leveraging Google AdSense, or perhaps selling rubber reptiles via mail order, then you might use a keyword that addresses a range of similar interests, like “fake rubber snake lizard turtle amphibian reptile.” Of course you wouldn’t put such a non-poetic name in the visible portions of your page, but you get the idea.

Next on the list is backlinks. This thickens the plot a bit. If a thousand websites have added links to your page, Google puts you higher in search results than someone who may actually have better on-page SEO, but fewer backlinks.

This is another place the charlatans go crazy. They tell you they have all sorts of ways to get instant, automatic backlinks, for only $39.95 per month. . . They also tell you that backlinks are essential. However, with a well-selected keyword you can usually ignore backlinks and still end up with lots of hits.

Don’t fall for any of that rubber snake oil. Much of what they do, when they do anything at all, is pure spam, and in the end, may weaken your position with Google. You don’t need to pay money for backlinks, and you don’t need to do spammy things to get them.

Simply asking webmasters to add a link to your site can work quite well. Many webmasters will, without cost, just because you asked. You can also trade links, as long as you don’t mind adding a reciprocal links list to your site. Better yet, you can post in newsgroups, forums, discussions. You can answer questions, or ask questions. At the end of every single post, you are allowed a tag line in almost all forums. Your tag line can contain a few words about what your site is, plus an actual link to your site.

Not only will these be noticed by Google as backlinks, but some real people will actually click through, bringing up your visitor count organically. The trick to not spamming is simple: Contribute legitimately to the discussions in which you participate. You can answer questions, postulate theories, bring up analogies. If you don’t know much about a subject, it is completely OK to ask questions, as long as you are not selling ‘expert service’ on your site on the very subject of which you’re asking questions.

What’s wrong with spam? Besides the fact that you’re interrupting people, and diluting the value of bonafide discussions, Google has become quite smart about spam, and actually penalizes a website in search results if the backlinks are of low quality.

One of the best sources of good backlinks is social networking, which will be covered in the next chapter. Social networking can work so well, that you may not need SEO at all.

Another little trick that can be helpful when you’re not at the top of the Google search results is to become a verified author through Google+. You need to join Google+, a social network, but it is free. Then using Google itself, you can look up “verified author Google+” where you will find the details. Basically, you have to certify that you are the author or owner of the content on your web page(s), then add a little bit of Javascript code to the page. When Google sees this, they put your picture next to the brief description in the search results. Google also ads some other data for you. But displaying your picture is the main thing. People are more likely to click through when they see who you are. Even if you are not particularly photogenic, they’ll click through because on some subconscious level, they feel they know you now that they’ve seen you.

Once you’ve built or updated your website, you can let Google know it’s there. This is especially important if no other websites link to it yet, otherwise Google has no way to know you’re out there, because Google finds websites by investigating links from other websites, crawling the entire Internet every two weeks or so, link by link. However, you can expedite the process through “Fetch as Google” a simple, free and easy-to-use part of Google Webmaster Tools.

If all goes well, you can have a hundred visitors within 24 hours of building a new website.

Valuable Content

Once you’ve got at least a handful of visitors coming to your site, you can do some more things to make sure it works.

If you can provide some useful content or positive eccentricity, then people will tell people who will tell people. Your site can go viral. Take a look at hamsterdance.com. Especially take a look at the “Hamster Classics” and then “Interactive Dance.” This one dance page is similar to how the whole site originally looked.

It seems a computer science student made a one-page website as a thesis project. All it did was show lines of cartooney dancing hamsters with some background music. That was in the late 1990s, when it didn’t take much of a website to excite people. There was something about the cuteness of hamsterdance.com that caused everyone to email everyone else, and it went viral almost instantly. Millions of visitors came. The creator saw the potential, and quickly added more pages and advertising to the site.

It will take more than dancing hamsters to impress people these days, but if you can do something sufficiently amusing, or informative, you win the game!

Another example is Crayola.com. There, you’ll find quite a few interesting and interactive things for children. People come to the site because there’s something useful there.

Yet another example is a website where you can buy an antenna for specialized electronics. The site has many charts with exactly the information that radio designers need, so of course this site is where the radio people go to when it is time to order antennae.

Your author has made several such sites. One of the more interesting sites is www.worlds-worst-website.com. Its sole purpose is to cause people to tell people, who will tell people, and so on. If I recall correctly, I have never done any SEO with the Worlds Worst Website. This site has functionality and eccentricity.

Once you’ve got a site that gets visitors, you want to direct their time there. It would be a shame to build a large visitor count, then have all your visitors become confused and leave the site without satisfaction. Or more to the point, you want them to do something that satisfies you, also, like buy your product or service. Think of your webpage, or your website, as a funnel. The top is wide. Lots of people spill into your site. The funnel narrows, directing people downward. Or more specifically, it holds their interest. Someone told me the average web page visitor stays one and a half seconds, unless something catches their interest in that time. The funnel eventually directs them all through the spout. The spout is the action step. What do you want people to do? Click the “Buy Now” button? Give you a phone call? Come to your store? Set up the page to have this effect.

You should have a compelling title, or short bit of text in the upper left corner, since that is where most people look first. The purpose of this top left item is not to sell something, but merely to cause them to feel that your site is worth focusing on. To have them become invested in your site enough to stay on the page and read more, perhaps click through to other pages on your site. Finally, at the bottom of every place they might go within your site, you have your action step – the button to click, the phone number to call – whatever you want them to do. During this process, you may also want to convince them that your site is so excellent they should tell all their friends.

One thing you almost never want is links away from your site. In this book, I can tell you about crayola.com, because you already bought the book. I don’t need to sell you anything. But if I did, I would not risk losing you to Crayola. Besides, I think I’ve got your interest by now. Hopefully, I have you well on your way to starting or improving your own business!



Social Networking

There’s a super-effective trick with the social networking sites that can bring you hundreds or thousands of new customers, but which is oddly left out of most discussions of social networking. I’ll tell you about it after a brief introduction and ‘how-to’ in case you are new to the whole phenomenon.

The Big Three

The big three social networking sites are Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. There’s also a lot to be said for Pinterest and LinkedIn, as well as some other social venues. There are hundreds of others. And then, there are sites that you may not think of social networking sites, but have interactive features and can be used for social networking. These include YouTube, Vimeo, and even Ebay.

For this discussion, we’ll just focus on the big three. There’d be little sense in putting much effort into ‘lesser’ sites when the same effort on one or more of the big three will yield ten times the results.

Twitter

Let’s start with Twitter. The main concept is that anyone can enter messages at any time of up to 140 characters in length. You can also attach pictures, links and videos. But the core of Twitter is these little messages, called tweets. What in much of the Internet world might be considered spam is perfectly fine on Twitter. In other words, stating tiny little trivia about whatever interests you, as often as you like, is perfectly fine.

Amateurs use Twitter to tell you they hate today’s homework, Jane wore the wrong dress, the boss said something insane, Frank just took a picture of his basset hound – you get the idea.

Most communication of this type happens among people who have decided to follow each other. For insance, if you start following Barack Obama, you’ll get his tweets about the things that interest him – health care politics, international relations, and so on. When he writes a tweet, only those who have chosen to follow him see his messages. In his case, millions of people are following. But unless you are the President of the United States, not that many people will follow you.

Here comes a big trick with Twitter: You can incorporate hashtags into your tweets. A hashtag is a word or phrase that starts with a number sign. Phrases consisting of more than one word are compounded, like this: #MileyCirus. When you put a hashtag in your tweet, anyone who has elected to see all messages about that subject will see your message. Now, rather than the three people who are following you, suddenly thousands may see your message.

If you pick something too common, no one will be following because the number of tweets are simply overwhelming. For instance, if you do add a #MileyCyrus hashtag, chances are few people will react because there may be thousands of tweets about her every day. On the other hand if you pick something too specialized, there’ll be no one who cares. Something like #RichardBransonHighSchoolDeploma – just isn’t going to bring results. But if you use a hashtag that some people are going to be following, magic can happen.

First, they’ll get your message, and perhaps go to your website to learn more about what you’re doing. Then, if your tweet is compelling, they may start following you, so you can speak to them even in ways in which you can’t incorporate effective hashtags. Finally, they may tell their friends, mentioning you or your website, or at least your tweets, in their own tweets to their friends (called retweeting).

Facebook

Can you do the same thing in Facebook? You bet. Hashtags work almost the exact same way. You can even link Twitter and FaceBook together (and even several other social networking sites), so that when you post a tweet on Twitter, it also shows up in your Facebook activity.

Facebook has a concept called Groups. There are thousands of groups. These are just what you’d think: People with a similar interest ‘subscribe’ to a group, where the photos, messages, videos, and links are all about the topic of the group. For instance, there are more than 4,000 in a group about juggling. There, you’ll find posts about jugglers who have appeared on television, pictures of people juggling three, four, five and more objects, how-to information, and more.

The magic of Facebook groups is that you can subscribe to a group and post messages that will be seen by everyone in the group. Unlike Twitter, you don’t have to depend on people searching for hashtag terms, and you don’t have to already have made friends with thousands of people. Just post in an appropriate group, and you can have hundreds, even thousands of targeted visitors to your website within hours.

Just like the rest of the world, you don’t want to spam groups. You can’t subscribe to a group about orchids, and post about inexpensive Rolex watches. Well, actually you can, but you’ll probably be banned from the group. Besides, it is just plain not nice. Spam weakens a group. Have you ever seen a group that has lost the spam war? It’s disappointing. You might want to read about a vegetarian diet, but every post is about weight-loss products. As a group is dying, you see nine out of ten spam posts, and have to sort through them to find a little bit of good stuff.

But you can post on-topic material, and leverage your presence in the group. You might find a group about Manchester United. There, you can say whatever you want about the other soccer teams. The Manchester fans in the group will love you for it. Then, at the bottom of your post, you can have a signature line, complete with a link to your website. In fact, you don’t even need a signature line. You can add links to posts – as long as they aren’t wildly off-topic. You don’t even have to do that. Many people will wonder who you are, check your profile, the links you have posted there, and so on.

It is better to stay nearly on-topic, even with your signature and links, if you can. If your product or service is about fishing, you can find many boating and outdoor sports groups in which you can participate in a valid way, and receive targeted visitors to your linked websites. For instance, if you post in a bicycle racing group, you’ll get bicycle enthusiasts coming to your bicycling website. Many of them will because they are interested in everything ‘bicycles.’ If you post a link about bicycling in a mountaineering website, even if your text is a valid on-topic post, few people will actually click the link.

Let’s say you’ve found the paydirt. Perhaps your buiness is buying and selling used violins. You find a violinists’ group, an orchestral musicians group, and a classical strings group. You can’t just post over and over again that you’re buying and selling violins. What you do instead is offer violin trivia, post technical information, state that you particularly like Rossini’s William Tell Overature, and so on. You can answer questions that you’re qualified to answer. You can ask questions if you’re not an expert. You can ask controversial questions which will sometimes keep an active discussion going for weeks. With all this stuff on your wall, you can become something of an authority on the subject. By simply participating in a natural and appropriate way, you’ll bring many visitors to your website and end up trading many violins!

Instagram

Finally, we have Instagram. Anyone can sign up. You may be already signed up and not know it. Facebook owns Instagram has taken the initiative to link all their divisions together.

Instagram has hashtags. Some experts are predicting that Instagram is a fad, that five years from now, it will be a ‘thing of the past.’ Instagram has one big disadvantage, and that is that you cannot embed a link in your text. On Facebook and Twitter, you merely have to mention a website, along with it’s extension, such as MicrobizMentor.com and it’s is linked. With Instagram, you can’t do that. So, you have to rely on a link in your profile description. However, you can mention websites in your post text, and people are able to copy and paste your website into their browsers.

Let me give you a concrete example:

I wanted to publicize an idea about bike safety. I found a group for bicycling. After reading a few messages, I figured out that the group is about bicycling in the San Francisco Bay Area, a place I have lived. There is a popular bicycling road that goes out to the rural edge of west Marin County called Sir Francis Drake Boulevard. It is dangerous because it has no shoulders, blind curves, and trees casting mottled sun and shade, making visibility difficult at times, especially since it heads due west into the sunset in the evenings. So I said so. I created a brief post stating that Sir Francis Drake was dangerous, and exactly why. At the bottom was a link to my bicycle safety website. You’ve gotta remember, I just told a bunch of bicycle lovers that the place they like to ride is dangerous. That was very controversial, just as I thought it might be, and so I was able to keep the discussion alive for a week. On the first day, 400 people came to my website. By the time the discussion died out, 1,000 visitors clicked through. And, these were exceedingly targeted customers – the very bicycle advocates I wanted to come to my site. My site was actually of international interest, but I happened across a Bay Area group, and remembered the problem on Sir Francis Drake, and so was able to make my little splash.

Letting Ebay Spread Your Message

I’ve listed some things for sale on Ebay, and noticed that hundreds of tire-kickers may come by before anyone actually buys a thing. How can you leverage this? You can post things that are not designed to sell. If they do sell, that’s just frosting on the cake. The reason for posting is to get a couple hundred viewers, who will then click through to your website.

Now, Ebay frowns on sellling things outside of Ebay through an Ebay listing. So you can’t do that. But you can mention a non-competing website in your listing, and you can direct people to your ‘about me’ pages on Ebay.

YouTube

YouTube is another great website that you can use in a social networking sort of way. People love videos, especially ones that explain something or eccentricities. Right in your video, you can include links to any site you want. YouTube even gives you ways to monetize your videos directly. Let’s say you have done something weird enough that it goes viral, like this one:

Steve Moore
Crazy Drummer

For those of you who are reading this on a device that can display web pages, you can click the picture to see the video. Otherwise, you can go to this link to see it on another device: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ItZyaOlrb7E

The drummer is Steve Moore, known as The Crazy Drummer. When this was first uploaded to YouTube, it sat around for two years and got only a few hits. Then the name was changed to “This Drummer Is At The Wrong Gig.” Suddenly, it went viral. As of today, it has been viewed more than 23 million times.

If that were your video, you could have YouTube supply advertising within and around the video. Their advertising is linked to Google AdSense, which is no surprise, since Google ownes YouTube. AdSense places context-sensitive ads automatically. Ads will be displayed that are related to the subject matter, (probably “drummer” and “gig”), and also to what the viewers have shown an interest in. For instance, Google must be hip to the fact that I have been interested in Dremel and Foredom tools lately, because these are among the ads I see. Or, you could embed your own links.

Interestingly, the quality of a video is not nearly as important as the content, or the subject it addresses. Many successful YouTube videos were shot with cellphones, and not edited very much, if at all. But what all the successful ones have in common is that they do something people want to see. They are informative or eccentric.

And there are the other websites. You can post photos or artwork on DeviantArt.com, Pintarest.com, PhotoBucket.com, you can make interactive blogs on Tumblr.com or Blogger.com.

Memes

In these websites, or any social networking or similar websites, memes can be effective.

A meme (pronounced ‘meem’) is a unit of information that carries an idea from person to person almost in the way that genes carry physical traits from generation to generation. Shortened from the Greek mimeme, which means “imitated thing,” the term was coined by Richard Dawkins, an evolutionary biologist, in 1976. Modern memes can be a written phrase, an image, an animation or sound clip.

Bumper stickers might be typical memes. Remember the one that had a picture of a golfer and said, “Don’t drink and drive. Use a 7-iron.” Hopefully, this meme made driving a little more safe.

It’s easier to create memes these days. You can just upload a little something to Tumblr, Twitter, Google+, you name it. And if your meme is successful, everyone will share it with their friends and associates, and soon, your meme will be seen by millions. A typical image meme would have a photo or drawing, and a bit of text. There are no standards – yet. Your meme can be any size, any of the standard Internet formats – .jpg, .bmp, .gif, or .png), and of course it can contain anything you want. All you do is make your meme, including a link to your website or whatever you want to convey, upload it somewhere, set back, and watch the business roll in. At least that’s the idea.

It would be pretty hard to make a text-only meme. The closest I came is this: “If all the toilet paper used in America was on one giant roll, we’d be unrolling it at 7,600 miles per hour, roughly ten times the speed of sound.” This could be uploaded to some trivia websites, or into various groups on Facebook, along with a link to whatever I’d want to link.

The problem is that text memes will tend to get separated from their links when people spread them around. So, the answer is imbed the text and link in a picture, so it is the picture that gets passed around, not just a line of text. Besides, the picture may enhance the concept of the text.

You can also make video memes, with or without sound. They have the advantage that they more completely involve the viewers. The downsides are that they take a bit more effort to produce, they don’t run consistently in all environments, and people have to sit and watch them before they get the entire message. In this information-rich society, the attention span is said to be one-and-a-half seconds. If your animated meme doesn’t catch people in that amount of time, it isn’t going to be an effective meme.



Craigslist

I wanted to tell you about a couple of Craigslist tricks that are important to many kinds of businesses.

If you have a service business such as teaching or repairing, I have a tip for you farther along in this chapter, but let’s start with merchandise business ideas on Craigslist.

If you buy and sell things, great opportunities exist in the space between Craigslist and Ebay. You can often buy things for less on Ebay than they can go for on Craigslist. That’s because people often will not trust things they can’t personally see and hold before buying. This is especially true of musical instruments, since people want to play them, to hear them, before they commit. Then, you can sell these same things at a profit locally on Craigslist to people who you will let see and hold them. These people are also more likely to buy locally because they can have their items right away. Many folks don’t want to wait a week or more for their purchases to arrive. Others don’t really understand and trust Ebay, and would rather pay cash to an actual person.

On the other side, people who are moving out of town, don’t want to pack and ship things, and who want immediate cash will sell things for much less then they would be worth online. They can’t get the full value for these things, because the market is limited to the local community. So of course you can come along, swoop these things up, and list them for a profit to all the national or international buyers on Ebay.

First, let’s talk about a couple of tricks for selling things on Craigslist.

When you list an item for sale on Craigslist, it scrolls down the list as other people add the things they have for sale. In a busy community in a busy category, such as Computers in Seattle, your ad can scroll out of sight within a few hours.

So, here’s what you do: Every couple of hours, add a different item. Let’s say you are selling used clothing. You can put up an ad for a sweater at 1pm. Then at 3pm, you can put up an ad for a pair of pants. Then at 5pm, a jacket, and so on. Each one of these ads carries a link to your website, saying something like, “much more clothing available at mywebsite.com.” You might even have thumbnails for your other clothes at the bottom of each ad. This is not spamming, because every ad is for something different.

As you may know, with craigslist, you are welcome to ‘renew’ an ad every 48 hours. This means that your ad will reappear at the top of the list. So, after you’ve built up a sufficient number of ads, you can start renewing them, one at a time, every couple of hours, so you always have something near the top of the list.

The other trick, which I already alluded to above, is that you can have a website that has a larger list of your inventory. Every one of your Craigslist ads can link to your website. It seems to work well to have a vertical table on your website, with thumbnail images of each item on the left, descriptions to the right, and prices to the far right. I used to do this with bicycles, although you could do it with clothing, musical instruments, computers, furniture, or whatever you want. I kept an inventory of about 18 used bicycles and each was pictured on my website until sold.

I have to admit I didn’t stay up to date with posting on Craigslist. I usually only managed between one and three ads per day, and skipped some days altogether. This was because my bottleneck in the bicycle business was getting bikes, not selling them. Unlike most many other product lines, all except high-end bicycles are too big to buy profitably on Ebay – due to the shipping cost, so I had to depend on a local market. And there too, I have to admit, I could have done things to purchase more bikes locally, but had other business interests at the time. Still, I sold 20 bikes per week with an average profit of $75 to $100. So this could work the same way for your business. After doing it for three months, I moved on to other pursuits, but during that time, strictly from craigslist exposure, my bike inventory website had received over 20,000 unique visitors.

When an item sells, it is appropriate to delete it from Craigslist as soon as you can, but I think it is better to leave the listing on your website for a day or two, marked “Sold,” leaving the price visible. When people see that your business is active, an unconscious impulse causes them to want to buy something ‘before it’s too late.’ It also keeps browsers coming back. They want to watch the activity, and eventually when they need an item, or have a friend that does, where do you suppose they’ll look?

One of the best ways I could have increased my purchasing of bicycles at the time would have been to keep an ad active in the “Items Wanted” section telling people that I buy used and broken bicycles. This would have the added advantage that my wanted posting would also link to my website, so people who see that I want bikes, will also see I have bikes, in case they are upgrading, or looking for a bike for any reason.

The impact of such listings grows with time. Several months later when Fred, who doesn’t need a guitar, hears that Jenessa wants a guitar, he’ll remember the ‘guitars wanted’ ad on Craigslist, and direct Jenessa to the linked guitars-for-sale website.

And of course, on your website with your list of items for sale, you can mention that you are also a buyer.

One of the best ways to let people you’re buying things on Craigslist is to let them know you’re selling things. Whereas you could post multiple similar ads such as “Cash paid for sweaters,” “I buy name brand bluejeans,” and “I want your quality used clothing,” this verges on spam, in fact it pretty much is spam, in the “Items Wanted” category. Not only does spamming make a mess out of a good category, and is unethical, and will probably get you a bad name, but Craigslist users will probably get in the habit of flagging and deleting all your ads.

A much better approach is to sell things in the proper “For Sale” category. In each ad, you also happen to mention that you buy things. Of course, you can have a single ad announcing that you’re buying in the “Items Wanted” category at the same time. You might be able to expand in the items wanted category if you are careful. You could run an ad that you are buying upholstered furniture on Monday, an ad that you are buying wooden furniture on Tuesday, and an ad that you are buying office chairs on Wednesday.

If you are in a service business, such as repair, entertainment or lessons, there are a couple of problems. First, you can list only in the “Services Offered” category, which fewer people see. Oh, they may be better targeted, but still, few people browse that category. The other problem is that it is difficult to post multiple ads in the Services category.

The only way you can post multiple services without spamming is to break your services down to specifics and advertise each one. For instance, if you tune and repair pianos, and give lessons, that’s three ads, isn’t it? Lessons, Repair, Tuning.

But that’s awfully close to spamming, and probably not enough exposure. So here’s the plan:

Now that you’ve read this book, you have a good idea about how to buy and sell things at a profit. I’m going to suggest you dabble a bit in used items, even if that is not your primary business. If you are into pianos, buy a couple of investment pianos and put them in your garage or whatever. Or, as you teach lessons, perhaps the very pianos you teach on are always for sale (as long as you keep a spare piano, ready to use). Now, you can put ads in the Musical Instruments section of Craigslist for your pianos, doing the tricks stated above. But your objective isn’t to sell pianos, although that could be a good income on the side. Your ads are there mostly to present the links to your website where you sell the lessons and repair services that you offer. If you don’t really want to mess around with buying and selling (but who wouldn’t?), you can keep your prices too high. The point is that people looking for used items are often the same people who want lessons or repairs. This is where they’ll be, in Items for Sale, not Services Offered.

Finally, on Craigslist, you’ll notice that there are forums at the left side of the home page. You can participate in those forums. You can teach what you know. You can answer questions. You can ask questions about what you don’t know. But at the bottom of every posting, you can have a low-key link to your website. Keep in mind that some of the forums are national, so you’ll want to notice that before you post a link for local service or large items for sale.



More About A Free Exchange

Perhaps your church or group has sponsored an occasional clothing exchange. I’m not talking about a rummage sale where you donate your unwanted clothes and they sell them to support the organization. I’m talking about an event where everyone brings their unwanted clothes, perhaps on a Saturday morning, and everyone can carry away other members’ unwanted clothes. So, you can get rid of that funky sweater someone ‘gifted’ you with and pick up a great pair of pants, or whatever.

What if this happened on a grander scale and was about whatever you’re interested in, not necessarily clothing? Imagine a regular location where this free exchange went on every weekend, or even every day? Do you see where the profit is in this? Since you could be the one who organizes and maintains it, it is only fair that you get first pick on everything that comes in. If you let everyone know right up front that that’s exactly what you’re doing, they’ll all be OK with it. I can assure you of that, because I set up a business that grew nearly overnight into a large, ongoing free general exchange in Marin County, California, and that’s what actually happened.

More specifically, I rented a 2,500 square-foot store, primed it with stuff I bought for next to nothing at garage sales, and opened to the public. In my exchange, I allowed exchange of anything of reasonable size (no refridgerators or mattresses, please!) There were many books, garden tools, car parts, sports equipment, you name it. But I could have specialized in appliances, bicycles or car parts and accessories, clothing, computer gear, or pretty much any type of thing. A couple of years later, I set up a quite successful specialty exchange, dealing just with books, CDs and DVDs.

Never once did anyone complain that I had first pick. Quite the contrary, I received complements all day long for the nature of the business.

Another thing that might surprise you is that I received much more stuff than I gave away. There was so much stuff coming into my exchanges, that much had to be discarded.

When people decide to clean out the attic, basement or garage, they tend to bring multiple boxes full of stuff. There were hundreds of wealthy people who brought things to the exchange just so other less wealthy people could get them. All these donors knew full-well that I was supporting the business by picking the cream off the top.

I’m sure you can imagine what I did with the one percent or so that I picked. Right, I sold them on Amazon and Ebay.

I only ran my exchanges as experiments for four months each.

During my first four months, in the general exchange, a volunteer ran some math and worked out that I gave away $44,000 per month worth of stuff. This was just wonderful for all the people who came from the poorer areas east of Marin and were able to get good things for their children and themselves. Even though the store was in a rather fancy suburban neighborhood, and many of the ‘shoppers’ came in junky cars and looked kind of scary to the locals, I was often told how much it was a great community service by the well-off locals.

I have been more of an experimenter than a do-the-same-profitable-thing-year-after-year person – probably to my detriment, but my exchanges could have been huge successes. Instead of moving on to the next experiment, I suppose they could have branched out, and I’d be very successful in the exchange business. But, being an experimenter and a writer, I’ll leave starting the next exchange up to you.

Imagine the potential. If you specialize in musical instruments, you’ll get instruments into the hands of children and adults who couldn’t otherwise afford them. If someone has had their instrument stolen or broken, you can provide them with another. You can provide sheet music. It wouldn’t be surprising if your free sheet music collection could become larger than what any store in town carries. You could have walls filled with free CDs. Interestingly, your place can become a destination for musicians. Many will volunteer to help your efforts. Everyone will just love hanging out, offering advice, repairing instruments, talking shop, jamming – well, you get the idea. What a place it can become!

If you specialize in clothing, you’d be offering a great service indeed, as people who can barely afford to clothe themselves and their children will get what they need. Their hard-earned money will go to better quality food, paying back bills, and so on instead of clothing, and they can dress proudly, not shabbily.

Of course much of the stuff that comes in will be in sad shape. You’ll get brass instruments that are quite dented. You’ll get torn clothing. You’ll get books that are 30 years old. You’ll get unidentifiable car parts. You’ll get wobbly furniture. But not all of it will be junk!

When it’s free, you’d be surprised how delighted someone can be with “70’s Pop Tunes.” When it’s free, people will figure out a way to fix that chair with the missing leg, or the vase with the crack in the side. Or if they can’t fix it, they’ll have fun trying. You may not be too happy about selling the good things that come in, even though that could be quite profitable. But if a stamp album comes in that you can sell on Ebay for $4,000, that money will go along way to support the exchange, wouldn’t it? That way, you can get a lot more servicable goods into a lot more hands.

Perhaps the bulk of the money will be from selling pieces of broken things. As far as I went with pieces is that I experimented with two student-model flutes. I took them apart and listed the pieces on Ebay. They each brought just over $100, after all expenses, selling most of the bits and pieces for $10 each. I once took in a guitar that was cracked on all sides, and missing a couple of tuners. It was not a production model. It appeared handmade, having no brand name and no model, but it had excellent inlay around the sound hole. I put it as-is on Ebay, expecting maybe I’d get lucky, with a winning bid of around $20. It sold for $203.

The reason I created two exchanges was that I wasn’t quite happy with the first one.

My first version started out quite large, and I had a rag-tag assortment of about 20 volunteers. Not being a great manager, I quickly lost a degree of control over these people. Some came in drunk, some complained about everything in sight, some treated the clientele crudely. So, if you’re going to do this, you’ll either want quality employees rather than volunteers, or you’ll want to screen your volunteers better, or you’ll want to have a more alpha personality. Or, perhaps the best solution, is keep it small and manageable, perhaps in a 700 – 1,000 square foot space in a smaller community, or hidden away in a neighborhood.

That’s what I did with my second exchange. I wanted something smaller and more manageable. It was 1,000 square feet, about a third the size of a typical 7-11 store, in a town of just under 20,000 residents. Initially I did everything myself, no volunteers. I decided to specialize in books, CDs and DVD movies, because I figured I’d have a quieter, more focused clientele. I was exactly right. The second exchange was just as profitable, yet much less hectic, and therefore more fun for me.

Speaking of profit, I spent about $10,000 setting up the second exchange. I could have done it with less, but in my case, I didn’t need to. By the end of the second month, I was making $5,000 per month profit. At the end of the four-month experiment, I sold it quickly for $32,000. (If I had wanted to, I could have held on for a year, and sold it for much more!)

A bit of a problem with the first, general exchange was waste. Since I was taking everything, not just books and disks, I had to rent larger and larger dumpsters to accommodate the things that weren’t worth even giving away. At the end of the fourth month, I was paying $250 per month for dumpster rental.

To avoid discouraging people from bringing things, I decided never to decline any reasonable donations. I stand by this, and believe it’s better to spend a bit on garbage pickup than losing donations from people who start to figure you may not accept what they bring. Interestingly, things they assume you don’t want may be wonderful donations. I received a sousaphone that’s bell was crushed all out of shape. It was awful in appearance, but still played, so I gave it away.

If an item needs repair, you may be surprised how many volunteers are available to fix it. They may prefer to fix it in the exchange – if you have the space for a repair area. This is so they can become part of the social scene. Or, they may want to take things home to repair them. But what if the volunteers are unreliable? What if someone brings a sweater home to reknit a blown seam, and never brings it back? If you were going to give it away anyway, no loss!

In the case of an item beyond repair, you can sell what parts are good. There’s good money in a sousaphone mouthpiece or valve if someone needs that exact part on Ebay. I have studied the bicycle parts sections of Ebay from time to time, and am amazed how many ordinary everyday parts are being sold there. I once took apart a Roomba vacuum cleaner, and sold all the parts for well over $100.

I had a sign on the front window of my general exchange that told people not to leave donations after hours. But they did. Most mornings I’d find a enough bags of worn-out clothing, broken lawnmowers, sofas without cushions, and so on to fill a pick-up truck. These were the things that people just wanted to dispose of, didn’t want to pay landfill fees, and would be too embarrassed to try donating to the store during the day. Of course this wouldn’t be so much of a problem with a specialized exchange. In fact, the nighttime donations might surprise you. Someone once left two banker’s boxes full of old records. I called my friend Ken, who paid $100 per box for the collection. He took about six albums per box, and donated the rest back to the exchange.

In my media exchange, I learned to solicit nighttime donations. I had a drop box with a slot outside. Hundreds of books per months came in through that slot. I used a slot rather than an open container, because I didn’t want other people coming by and rummaging through the books before I had a chance to pick through them. I also put a free shelf outside, so visitors could get books, and occasionally music CDs, any time of the day or night.

Taking the concept one step further, you might be able to design an exchange that doesn’t need your presence at all. One way is to staff it with volunteers. Another is to have drop boxes around town, much like some clothing companies do, in which you ask people to drop of things they’re not using. On the drop boxes, you’d have signs indicating what you’re doing – donating most of the stuff to children overseas – or locally, for that matter.

I believe you should also state that you’re making a profit in the process. If you’re up front, not only will no one complain, but many will just love what you’re doing. If you try to hide it, people will undoubtedly get the wrong idea. Unfortunately, some of those companies that put out clothing donation boxes a few years ago developed a bad reputation for not actually fulfilling the promise of making good use of the donated clothing.

A little aside here: As I understand it, a fellow in Boston advertised on Craigslist that he would pick up unwanted books. He didn’t mention what he was going to do with them. He didn’t promise anything. Yet, many people gave him thousands of books, which he sold on Amazon.com.

Taking it even a step further, I can imagine that you might have a charitable arm. But that’s up to you. It is quite possible that a year or two after you start an exchange it becomes so profitable that you would have money left over with which to do good work.

To round out the picture, it would also be possible to have specialty exchanges that are simply shelves in public locations. The idea is people can drop off CDs, DVDs, books, toys, or whatever they don’t care about any more, and pick up ones they like – all for free, of course. Your job, besides keeping the shelves organized and clean, is to go through the stuff that comes in, gleaning what will sell online. Quick oil change places, laundromats, and restaurants would all love to have such a shelf.

You can tighten up the efficiency of free exchange shelves a bit by having a box with a slot on the shelves. Signs tell people to drop donated music into the slot, and take whatever they want. The point is you don’t want people carrying away the obscure and possibly valuable items. You want to be able to sort everything that has been donated before it gets away.

Don’t forget to have contact info so if someone has boxes and boxes of stuff, they know how to contact you for a free pickup.

If have not tried this exact business model myself. I did, however, put book shelves in eight laundromats. These weren’t exchanges. I purchased the books by the boxful at garage sales, paying on average five or ten cents per book. I then put them in the laundromats with signs saying, “Put $3 in the slot per book.” I split the money 50/50 with the laundromat owners or managers. Sure, some books were stolen from my shelves, but I never noticed, and it didn’t significantly impact the bottom line. These shelves were quite profitable for the small amount of time involved.

Music CDs ought to work especially well. Millions of people are looking for music they haven’t heard to put on their iPods or smartphones, and then discarding the CDs once they’ve finished uploading. It’s recycling at its best, isn’t it?

Getting back to the idea of a full-size exchange, when you pick a location, it is important to have good parking. This can be even more important than for an ordinary retail store, because many people are going to be bringing large loads of stuff. If they have to carry it a hundred yards (100 meters), they’ll be less inclined to bring stuff next time. Fortunately, the parking was very close to my first exchange. Even still, I provided hand carts for people to get things from their cars into the exchange. You don’t want anything to come between people and their desire to bring things to your exchange.

And yet, parking was a problem. My store became rather popular within a very short time. (Advertising and publicity is absolutely not necessary in a business that exists to give things away.) The problem was the parking lot became congested. And that, ultimately, was the downfall of my experiment. When traffic started clogging the little strip mall I was occupying, the neighboring businesses started to complain. The property manager suggested I leave. Oh, I could have worked things out, but since I was ready to move on, I just pulled the plug.

So, you can learn from my experiments. One thing I’d recommend if you want to start your own exchange is to start very, very small. You don’t need to rent a store. Depending on where and how you live, you might want to start it out of your garage. Or you can rent a space in a flea market. Or set up something cooperatively with someone who has commercial space available. For instance, you might find a quick-change oil change place who would gladly donate some lobby space in trade for hundreds more people getting their oil changed there.

I’m not the first one who set up a store to give things away. The precedent was set in 1968 at the Digger Store in the Haight-Ashbury neighborhood of San Francisco. The Diggers were a loosely assembled group of entertainers (one of whom was Peter Coyote) who started making free soup, beans, and bread for the hippies that came to the Haight during the Summer of Love. In time, they rented a storefront where they accepted donations of clothing and general merchandise, and gave everything away. I did a bit of research and never found out how they paid the rent. My guess is that they came up with the first month’s rent, then just coasted until they were evicted. That store, too was a short-lived experiment. Digger Archives



Your Own Retail Store

The prestige and freedom that comes from having your own retail store can put a long-lasting smile on your face. It’s your place, so you can have wonderful conversations with your customers. You can decide to host jams, groups, or parties after hours. The local celebrities may drop in from time to time. You’ll probably eventually end up making more than any hourly wage, and you can hand the whole works over to your children forty years later.

Being primarily a writer, I lost interest in the stores I started, so I did what you can do with your stores too – if you are impatient as I am: You can build your store up, then sell the business for what will seem like a remarkable amount of money. The longer you keep your store, the more it is worth. The downside is that you’ll be making so much after a few years, you may not want to sell it.

I have found that the idea of starting a store from scratch scares many people. That’s why so many will pay so much for an established store. However, as one who has done it several times, I can tell you starting a store from scratch is really quite easy.

It is also easy to lose money, so I’ll offer a few pointers in this chapter to help you start successfully and stay successful.

Consider this, the first rule of business: You’ve got to make more than you spend.

A good second rule might be: Don’t invest more than you can afford to lose.

Given those two rules, you may have to start something on a shoestring, and let it pay for its own growth. That’s very possible, and what this chapter is about.

But you may not yet have even a shoestring. If you don’t yet have the money for a retail store, you can put this book away and give up. Wait a minute! Of course, I don’t recommend that. There is another way.

you might like to start small – very small. You can usually find a way to start with a very few of whatever you’d like to sell, or something similar, put them in the trunk of your car, sell them to friends and aquaintences, list them on Craigslist if it serves your area, and possibly sell at flea markets or in consignment stores. As your mini-business grows, and as you are gaining experience with your product line, you can start building a pile of inventory and a pile of money, until you have enough to easily and safely start a retail store. I know a fellow who did it with camping gear. He started with second-hand things he bought at flea markets and garage sales. It’s been several years since he started. He now owns two full-fledged and full-service retail camping goods stores. His stores don’t compete with K-Mart. He mostly sells high-end used and new camping gear to expert hikers, climbers, hunters and others. It turns out there are plenty of those expert enthusiasts to keep his two stores plenty busy.

The biggest expense for most people starting a retail business is space. A typical store is around 1,000 square feet. Rent in a ‘good’ neighborhood is $1 to $2 per square foot (10 – 15 Euros per square meter), or more. So, right away, you’re looking at $12,000 to $24,000 per year.

Then you might want to consider heat or air conditioning, electrical usage for lighting and so on, liability insurance, telephone, credit card processing, and city or county licensing. All these typically add up to another $10,000 per year.

Then there’s advertising costs. And there could be the rather huge expense of employees.

These are the expenses for someone starting a typical retail store.

If you want to start a business in the usual way, you must be able to afford to lose a lot of money, at least until your business is up and running. And many businesses take from two to five years to become profitable.

Worse, many, make that ‘most,’ businesses never do become profitable. The statistics are staggering, and interesting. Did you know that one out of every four women fail in business? Ah, but what about the men? How well do they do? Four out of every five men fail in business!

Of course there are stories of people who failed two or even three times before becoming successful. Can you afford that? Would you want to go through that kind of stress?

But there is the other way – starting small – in which you can avoid most all the stress, most of the expense, and the risk of failure. Starting small has been covered in other chapters.

You can shortcut this process. You can do it your way. But I don’t recommend it. What I’m going to tell you is a rather safe and sure way to get into the retail business once you have some experience and money built up. Starting from absolute scratch has as much chance of growing into something big, maybe even huge, as those who start with $500,000 cash.

You want to choose a business that will work in our modern world. Urban blight, WalMart, a troubled economy, and inexpensive machine-made products are part of our world these days.

So, let’s rule out some things: If you have a hand-made product that’s the same as, or no better than what anyone con buy in a variety store such as K-Mart, then you probably aren’t going to be able to sell it. If it costs you $10 to make each of your ‘things,’ then the big companies can have the same ‘thing’ made in an Asian factory for perhaps $2.

If you want something that can be purchased wholesale, and you can buy them in lots of 100, you’ll pay more per item, and more for shipping, than the big chain store companies who can buy in lots of 100,000. They make all sorts of back-room deals with the manufacturers with which you can’t compete. UnlessÖ (more about that in a minute.)

You’ll find service is easier to sell. Yes, the big chain stores offer computer repair, eyeglasses, they have a big photography department, some offer tayloring, you can have window screens replaced, paint mixed, keys made. However, everyone knows this is boiler-plate service. The service is generally done by minimum-wage employees with relatively little training.

If you offer service by an expert, in a field that needs quality attention, you’ve got something you can sell. Then, if you can offer that, you can pump up your sales with hard goods – the very things I said you can’t buy at competitive prices. As you’re writing up service tickets, you can suggest this replacement part or that accessory. The customers who come into your store start to become familiar with what’s on your shelves, and will start coming for the specialty items they can’t find at the department stores. And, even though you have to pay more for items purchased from wholesalers in lots of one or a dozen (instead of 100,000), you’ll be able to sell them for more.

A small bicycle shop fits the mom-and-pop retail paradigm nicely. Wal-Mart does not offer high-end bicycles. They do not have special cycloscross tires, or Zefal pumps or Kool-Stop brake pads. They do not have employees that know how to custom fit your bike to you, or even sell you the right size. They do not offer any after-sale service other than a complete refund. They don’t know how to get you the same model, but in lime green. What else? They don’t know about accessorizing the bike: fenders, lock, lighting, luggage and so on. They cannot tell you from their own experience how it is to bicycle tour in Bulgaria, how to train for a double-century, how to strategize a BMX race, or maybe even how to fix a flat tire.

The same is true for a fabric store, a pet shop, or a musical instrument store. The department store employee doesn’t quite know what pinking shears are used for, why someone might like 12-inch hacksaw blades instead of 10-inch, or what a red-eared slider eats.

I think you’re beginning to see why a specialty shop would be successful, even with a huge chain store right next door. Maybe even more so, since all the chain-store buyers will see your sign and drop into your shop when they want something that the chain store can’t offer.

What other kind of store might work? Musical instruments. Tool supply. Certain kinds of appliances, many kinds of specialty sports or hobbies, as long as there are enough participants in the sport or hobby in your community. Ethnic foods. Organic natural foods are particularly good if your community is one that is aware of good eating, and doesn’t already have too many such stores. Automotive accessories. Antiques. Used merchandise can be a great choice, especially second-hand clothing and furniture.

Do you see the common factor in these? They offer products that can’t be found in the department stores, or something that requires more knowledge or service than those stores can offer.

It is probably important to pick something that you know quite a bit about. Whereas a person can just decide to start a guitar store without even knowing how to play music, it is harder that way. On the other hand, the owner will probably enjoy learning to play guitar, how to determine the value of guitars, and so on – but it can be an expensive process as mistakes are made, and customers are left without the advice they need.

So what do you know and enjoy? Second-hand building materials? Home crafts? Spanish cuisine? Sound systems? Digital photography? Soccer? Laptop computers? Organic gardening? You don’t have to start out as the world’s leading authority in your field. But it helps to know enough to advise your customers properly, and know what kind of inventory they will want to buy. And if you’ve been through this process and that, you’ve read the books, you know you’d want to buy certain brands and models, then you have the knowledge you’ll need.

What people notice first about a piano store is the pianos. A successful piano store doesn’t sell the kind of keyboards you find in the department stores. They start at mid-level, and go up in price from there. That’s because they can’t compete with low-end keyboards. You can purchase an entry-level Yamaha keyboard from a typical wholesaler for $119. You can buy the same thing at Radio Shack for $79. But when it comes to keyboards for $400 and up, with a USB port and weighted keys, they simply aren’t available at Radio Shack. On the other hand, customers shopping in that price range are rather specific about what they want. So, you need to carry a variety, be well tuned into what people want, or expect sales of new keyboards few and far between. Then, assuming there are other high-end music stores in your area, you’ll have to keep your prices competitive, making only a rather small mark up.

So, eventually, you’ll want to carry new keyboards and pianos because they bring customers in who buy sheet music, amplifiers, microphones, and all that. They come to look at your keyboards, as if it were a museum, but they don’t leave without buying a patch cord, a speaker cabinet, a sheet music book, or some other accessory.

However, if you were to start your music store with new keyboards and pianos, you’d be in debt on your first day – or maybe you would have blown your inheritance foolishly.

So now let’s talk about this shoestring concept. That’s how I started. I took it to the extreme, by necessity. You see, I was 16 years old at the time, with just about no money at all – maybe $10. So doing what a 16-year-old sometimes would do: I started fixing bikes for kids in the neighborhood, trading used bike parts, and just having a good time puttering around. Every now and then, I’d make $20 or $30 on a repair or a trade. Then people started paying more regularly for repairs. The trading inventory became so attractive that people bought my second-hand things more and more often. It wasn’t long before I outgrew my one-car garage, and my parents’ patience. But by then I had a couple of thousand dollars. That’s when I made the leap to a retail store. I found a place of about 700 square feet for rent in the ‘bad’ part of town. It was a place I could afford. And I moved my eight used bikes, handful of used parts and tools into the store. I painted my own sign and kept the heat very low all winter. I was willing to do whatever it took. I remember one time regluing a bunch of wooden dining room furniture because I had a customer who was willing to pay for that. But I also taught some bicycle repair courses in the shop. By spring, I had made it through the winter without going in debt. In fact, I had more than when I started. Actually, it was right before Christmas that I was able to make my first-ever wholesale purchase. I bought $200 worth of lights, pants guards, reflectors, patch kits, tires, seats, and things I thought might sell as Christmas gifts, or be good general inventory. I had found a wholesaler who was willing to sell in quantities of one or two, not dozens of anything. Some of the stuff sold, and I bought more. By Spring, I was able to place my first order for honest-to-goodness NEW bikes. It was only 6 bikes, but oh, I was so proud!

Let’s fast forward four and a half years. My shop had turned into a ‘pro’ shop. In a city of 400,000 people there were 10 other bike shops. Too many, really. But I did well anyway, because I treated each and every customer as if they were important – because they were. I studied, practiced, and listened, and became a bike expert. I was able to offer advice. I’d steer someone away from a certain brand of patch kit because I knew the glue would always dry up after the first use. People like this kind of personalized service, and went out of their way to buy things at my shop. They told me all the time that they drove past this bike shop or that, to come to mine. I taught more bike repair lessons. I learned how to build custom frames, and taught frame-building lessons. I hired people to help. At the peak of the summer season, I had eight employees and had expanded into other units in the building. I was then operating out of a couple thousand square feet. To fill the extra space, I went crazy and bought 125 new bikes in one batch and sold them all within a month.

Actually, new bikes wasn’t the focus. The part of the profit pie that came from new bikes was actually rather small. The piece that came from the accessory sales, repairs and customizations those new bikes brought was larger.

The two biggest parts of the pie were the general repair trade and used bikes. It turns out that all my customers told their friends and family that my shop was good, honest, fast, and all the other right things when it comes to repair. So during the summer, I had enough work to keep four mechanics going full time.

Used bikes turned out to be much more profitable than I had figured. They were more profitable than new bikes. You see, I learned early on to ask anyone who was considering buying a new or used bike whether they’d like to trade anything in. I could buy bikes all the time for $25, put perhaps $25 worth of labor and parts in, and sell them for $125.

And that’s my advice for someone who wants to start on a shoestring. You may not have to start as small as I did, or maybe that’s just right. Can you work out of your back yard? Your basement? A tiny rented space? I have seen bike shops set up in 10 x 20 foot flea market stalls. What about partnership? If you don’t have everything you need, perhaps you can find a partner who has the missing knowledge, money, time, space, whatever you lack. Check out the Partnerships chapter.

As your business slowly outgrows your space, you’re gaining experience in your product line, and in dealing with your customers. By the time you have the money to move into a bigger space, you also have the expertise to make sure your profit is more than enough to pay for it.

What happened after 4-1/2 years? I sold the business for quite a bit of money. I bought a motorhome and traveled around the USA for several years on the profit. In retrospect, that may have been foolish, but I was still young. If I had kept the shop, it would probably have been a chain of bicycle shops by now. I may have had my own manufacturing plant. On the other hand, by traveling, I gained more and varied experience, and at any time I could have started another bike shop. In fact I did, twice. And I created some other businesses. Then I sold them. I can always start another. But of course today, I’m having too much fun writing about businesses.

Here is some more detailed advice:

1. Remember the first rule? Don’t spend more than you take in. If you take that quite literally in your first months, you’ll stay safe. Furthermore, you’ll learn all sorts of shoestring tricks, ideas and work-arounds that will serve you well, even once you’re making millions of dollars. Then, you can have your managers show your employees some of the same things you once did to save money, so each of your employees is also profitable to you.

2. And the second rule? Don’t invest more than you can afford to lose. Once business is gaining momentum, you may be tempted to speed things along a bit by investing too much, too soon. I remember a camera store that had one Hasselblad, a very expensive camera. After a while, it sold. So, they bought five more. It took years to sell all five, and in the meantime, those five high-end cameras tied up a lot of inventory money that could have been used for everyday things that sell more quickly.

When you first start, it is completely acceptable to focus mostly on service, if your product line has a profitable service component. If you can fix the things you deal with, you have an immediate income in the repair business, without having to put much, or any money into inventory. As your repair business grows, you’ll know which parts and accessories to stock that will sell frequently.

It was quite common in past decades to find many stores in a town that were really almost entirely repair shops. You’d walk in, and see almost no retail displays. It felt like walking into a, well, repair shop. Right up to the front door was equipment in all stages of repair, tools everywhere, the ‘salesman’ who probably owned the place greeted you in dirty overalls. You may still see this from time to time. Shoe repair stores come to mind. TV repair stores often were like that. TV repair, however, has gone bye-bye, since solid-state electronics are more reliable and the cost of new TVs is so low in comparison to repair costs. But for many businesses, starting out as a ‘repair shop’ can be just as successful today as it was back then.

If your product doesn’t really have a service aspect, look into what else you can do. Can you teach in the back room? I know a health suppliment store that teaches classes on many aspects of nutrition and healthy living in their back room. They make more money out of the back room than the front room, with all its cans and bottles. Can you buy, sell, consign or broker used items? Can you set up profitable local events of some sort based around your product line?

Listen to your customers. Talk to everyone. Find out what they want, and do your best to provide it.

Be on the look-out for pride. What if I told the dining room furniture person, “No, this is a bicycle shop, I refuse to stoop so low as to fix your chairs!” Well, I’d have to borrow money for groceries that week! Plus, it turns out, the furniture guy bought bikes for both of his teenage sons that spring, and another bike when one was stolen, and spent perhaps $400 that year in parts and service.

Finding the right retail building can make a world of difference. If you can find a location where many people drive by, and where it is easy to park, you’ll be much more successful. Even better, if you can rent a spot in a mall, tourist location, or where there are plenty of people walking by, people who are there to shop, you may never need to do any advertising or publicity at all. Just put up your sign, and you’re in business! Really check out your location before signing a lease. If it is in the ‘bad’ part of town, there may be people who are afraid to come to your store. You may also have to deal with shoplifting. On the other hand, depending on your product line, you may find many grateful people in the ‘bad’ part of town who no longer have to commute a long distance to get what they want.

Parking meters are the death of a retail business. Many customers would rather drive across town to their competitor than be worried about whether 25 cents was enough the whole time they are shopping in your store.

Exposure is the thing. I’m sure you’ve heard the expression, “Location. Location. Location.” Getting the wrong place can ruin a business before it gets started. Getting the right place, even if it is small, or the cost per square foot is high, can mean that you start making money from your very first month.

Most small retail businesses start with rented stores. Unless you are prepared for an entirely different kind of investment, commercial real estate, you’ll be better off renting. Commercial leases are pretty much like residential leases. They are usually one-year or five-years in length.

In upscale settings, there is something called “Triple Net” abbreviated as NNN. This is a monthly fee added to the rent for maintenance, such as mowing the lawn, cleaning of the common areas, and upkeep of parking lot. The ‘triple’ in triple-net means nothing. The amount is anything the landlord decides. Typical triple-net for a 1,000 square-foot (100 square-meter) retail store is from $35 to $100 per month.

once you’ve found the right place, you may want to have the one thing that’s missing from most leases written in: An escape clause. What if a dry cleaner next door fills the neighborhood with perchlorethylene fumes? What if a family situation requires you to move to Philadelphia? What if the dog next door just won’t quit barking? You laugh, but these things really happen. What if your business grew faster than you thought, and you need to expand into a larger building? You don’t want to be stuck with a one-year or five-year lease. So, the escape clause is something that both you and the owner of the building can live with. For instance, you might suggest that if you want to move before the end of the lease, you’ll pay three months rent up front.

Finally, before you sign that lease, you need to work out a business plan. Oh, I don’t mean a fancy plan to show a banker for a loan. I do not advocate starting with a loan. If you don’t yet have enough money saved up, and the ability to risk that money, there’s no hurry. You can just keep selling your stuff on craigslist, out of the trunk of your car, the flea market, or whatever, until you do have enough money. This is a better plan, because you’ll be proving to yourself that your business is profitable, while you learn the ropes.

A business plan just for yourself can be as simple as scratching some numbers on the side of a grocery bag. What you want to see is whether you’re biting off more than you can chew. Figure that you’ll need to pay first and last rent, then pay the rent for a few months until your business is running and established. You’ll need to cover the electric bill and other overheads. If you’re smart, you won’t figure in employees. They come later, after you’ve become successful. This is a business that you’ll run entirely by yourself at first. Finally, you need a starting inventory. Ideally, you already have plenty of items. If you don’t, go ahead and step back for a year or so, continuing to do your business out of the flea market or whatever, until inventory surrounds you. Until it fills your garage, living room, bathroom, and takes up all the space under the kitchen table.

Moving forward, let’s say you have figured out the finances, and rented a store. Now what? There’s just a little bit of paperwork, and it is easier than you thought.

Through your chamber of commerce, find your local business license office. There, you can get a DBA – Doing Business under Assumed name, also known as a business license. This costs a little bit. Typically from $20 to $200 per year, depending on your community. You fill out a one- or two-page form with the usual stuff – name, address, phone number, and they give you the license. No one is refused. Furthermore, you don’t have to know anything about it. The people in these offices know that you are not an expert in what they do. The typical person coming in wants to start a car repair shop or a beauty parlor, and knows all about car repair or cosmetology, but nothing about business. So, they are there to help you. They want you to succeed, so you can keep paying your annual license fee to the community.

You’ll probably want a business checking account, and in some cases, the local government wants to see your business checking account number before they’ll grant the DBA. No problem, any normal bank can do this for you in twenty minutes. Most banks offer business checking accounts for free.

Customers coming to retail stores often expect to pay with credit cards. In the past, this was somewhat expensive and difficult to set up. Now, you can go to PayPal.com, and get set up to take credit cards easily. In one of my stores, I was unable to take credit cards for the first couple of weeks after opening. I told people up front – so as to not suprise them once they approached the sales counter, and let them know there was an ATM a block away. So far as I can tell, I did not lose a single sale during that time.

Finally, you need to get set up to collect sales tax or VAT in most countries unless you are in a place without sales tax such as Alaska, Delaware, Montana, New Hampshire, or Oregon. This costs nothing, and also requires filling out a simple one- or two-page application. The certificate, often called a resale certificate or tax number is usually given to you right away. They also hand you a pamphlet explaining how sales tax works in your area. You’ll learn what percentage to charge, and which items and people are tax-exempt. For instance, in New York State, American Indians do not have to pay sales tax if they present the retailer with an exemption form. In some states, labor is taxable, and in some, it is not. To find the tax office in your community, simply ask at the business license office. They already know that’s where you’re going next, and will certainly have the address. Now-a-days, you can often set up your sales tax account entirely online or by mail.

Collecting sales tax can be thought of as a right, responsibility, or privilege. I won’t get into the philosophy here. The usual arrangement is that you set aside the tax money you collect, fill out a one-page form, and mail a check to your tax office every three months.

Once you’re in business, you do need to keep track of income and expenses. You’d want to do this anyway, so you can understand how things are going, and what to adjust from time to time to make sure you’re making a good profit.

The old-fashioned way still works: You can buy an ordinary ledger book, and enter your expenses and income by hand. Domes Monthly is a ledger you can buy in any stationery store in the USA. There are no doubt equivalents in every country. Keeping track isn’t rocket science, although it may seem so at first. The only thing you need to do is list everything you spend money on and enter the amount of money you take in every day. You can optionally break out the income into categories such as “new,” “used,” and “service.” You’ll want to break out the expenses into categories such as “inventory,” “rent,” and “utilities.” You may want to additionally list all legitimate business expenses such as “automotive,” and “advertising.”

It is much easier to use automated software. For under $100, you can buy any of a variety of business bookkeeping packages, such as Quicken. This software tells you what to do at every step. The people who make the software know that you’re a musician, beautician, or bike mechanic, not an accountant, so you’re not expected to know what to do. The software has a lot of built-in help.

If that still seems intimidating, you can hire a bookkeeper for a single session to set up your system, and tell you what to do. Only after your business becomes successful, unless you are already wealthy, do you want to hire a bookkeeper on a regular basis. Some bookkeepers are better at teaching than others. If your first bookkeeper is not good at explaining things, try another.

At the end of the year, you need to figure out your income tax. This too, is easier than it might seem. In the US, the basic addition to your taxes for business is a Schedule C. It is a single two-sided page. The categories are obvious. But it is easier to get the automated software that does it for you. At the HR Block website, you can do the whole thing on line, and then just pay $30 to $80 to file your taxes. With a business, it takes about twenty minutes longer than someone who is only filing an ordinary 1040.

What if you make a mistake? All the government officials are on your side. Really! They’d rather have you succeed, than harrass you. They know you’re not an MBA or accountant. They want you to succeed, so you can go on paying taxes year after year. If you make a mistake, they tell you what to do different. They may issue a reasonable fine – just part of the cost of doing business, and you get to move on. No one goes to jail. Well, OK, I knew one fellow who did. He was a professional ice skater who paid no income tax at all. Still, he wouldn’t have spent six months in jail if he didn’t stand up to the judge and the whole court and make a big presentation about why he shouldn’t pay income tax. Only rebels go to jail. In fact, even with all the small mistakes all of us make, almost no one gets audited. I’ve received perhaps five letters from the IRS and sales tax agencies in all my 35 years in 18 various businesses. In each of the three cases where I actually did something wrong, I had to pay a small fine. My fines ranged from $20 to $150. I knew one fellow who didn’t report his income tax at all for several years. This one was a professional juggler. He was probably making around $150,000 per year. He didn’t even keep any records, so no one, even he, knew how much he made. The IRS stated that he owed them approximately $20,000 in back taxes, which he gladly paid. Of course from that time on, he did have to keep records and pay the appropriate taxes. I know a lot of business people and these two are the worst case scenarios.

Something like a signage violation is so minor that some business people play with them. For instance, in a little store that had a maximum 3 x 2 foot (1 meter x 66 cm) sign requirement, I made a much larger sandwich sign and put it out on the sidewalk every day from the first day I opened. I knew this was in violation, and I knew someone would notice it. They did, after two months. The zoning office did not issue a fine. They only issued a ‘cease’ letter, telling me I had 30 days to comply with the law. So I kept my sign out for another month, then I threw it away. It had done its job. I’m not recommending that you play with your government regulations, unless you know what you are doing is morally correct and the repercussions are safe.

Once you are in business, you can get wholesale catalogs and the wholesalers’ secret price lists. In order to qualify for a wholesale account, all you normally need is to fax or mail a copy of your resale certificate or DBA. Some wholesalers do require a photograph of the front of your store. Some have protected dealerships. This means that if someone else is selling their brand within a certain distance, perhaps 5 miles (3km), you can’t also sell the same brand. That’s fine, find other brands that aren’t protected or aren’t yet represented in your neighborhood. You can find the wholesalers online. Often, they find you, sending representatives to your store, to let you know about their wares.

Whereas you might start your store with only second-hand or collectible items, you now have the opportunity to sell new merchandise. The biggest advantage is that you can buy multiples of things that sell well. I have always imagined how nifty it would be to have a store that sells nothing but 25-pound (10kg) bags of dog food. Only one brand, only one type. I’d sell them over and over, the same to everyone who comes in. This is of course an oversimplified dream, but you can imagine that in a typical store it would simplify things if you could sell 100 copies of the same thing.

You’ll find the markup is remarkable in the lower-priced items, if you’re not familiar with retail. Things over $100, in most specialty businesses are marked up 50 percent. So if you pay $100, you sell it for $150. If you can ‘turn’ your inventory six times a year, meaning sell six of those $150 items in a year, your profit will be $300, on what amounts to $100 invested. A 200 percent annual return on investment (ROI). Compare that to a money market account! But wait, it gets better. the mark up on things in the $5 range is 100 percent. So things that you sell for $10, you paid $5 for. And under $2? It can run as high as 800 percent. If your business sells a lot of left-hand-threaded ‘thingamajigs’ for $2 each, you may find that you can buy them for 25 cents each. But you do have to sell a lot of left-hand-threaded thingamajigs to make any real money.

Insurance presents an interesting quandary. You want to be covered for liability, especially if you’re selling anything like ladders, saws, bikes or automotive accessories. But at first, you may not be able to afford $500/year for general liability insurance. On the other hand, if you can’t afford that. then you have no money, and no lawyer will take the case against you, because there’s no money to be had. So, you can buy insurance when you can afford to. By then, you may have assets to protect.

The one hole in the theory is that you might want to help people who have somehow have had a loss due to something you may have done. Its like driving a car. You want insurance in case you bump into someone. You want them to have their fender fixed without paying for it out of their own pocket, or your pocket.

So, my advice regarding insurance is to keep it high on the priority list, and get it as soon as you can after you’ve decided you’re going to grow a business.

Most local insurance agents are a bit unfamiliar with general liability insurance for businesses, but they can talk to their parent companies or refer you to agents who know how to help. Shop around, because you’ll find the costs vary considerably.

Most general liability insurance comes packaged with some other things that you might enjoy having, such as loss of contents. If your building is flooded, and if you have the right insurance, you can be covered for your lost inventory, equipment, and even loss of income while you were repairing the damages.

Then there’s advertising. The huge mistake most new retailers make is to buy too much of the wrong kind of advertising.

Especially when you are starting out, try to do as much as you can with free publicity. If you’re offering something new or different, or even if only something about what you’re offering is new and different, the newspapers (press releases, editorials), TV and radio stations will want to tell the public about it. After a while, when your initial publicity wears off, maybe you can invent something else that’s new and different about your business, and get another round of publicity. See the Publicity chapter for some crazy ideas.

In absolutely every case I can think of, placing display ads in your main newspaper, your local ‘throw-away’ newspapers, merchant maps, or anything else like that, works remarkably poorly. In this country, literally billions of dollars have been spent on advertising that brings absolutely no new business.

The advertising salespeople always have the same story when your advertising doesn’t work: “You didn’t buy enough yet.” Don’t fall for that!

Coupons work better, but don’t pay very much for any sort of coupon ad campaign. In fact, I’d suggest staying away from that altogether, unless you can make the coupons yourself and place them with restauranteurs, on bulletin boards, and so on. The nice thing about coupons is that you have a way to gauge the effectiveness of your advertising.

A reasonably small yellow pages ad, in the main phone company phone book (not any sort of third-party phone book) can be useful. But today’s customer mostly looks online, trying to find your phone number on your website.

So, of course you’ll want to build a website. Even if it’s just a home-made blog with a couple of pictures of you at work, your storefront if you have one, etc. All you need to do is display your phone number, hours, directions and a description of your products or services. In most cases, the website won’t initiate new customers. They need to have heard of you elsewhere, then they’ll use the website to see if you carry X-brand, or if you’re open on Sundays. So, don’t spend any significant money on a website.

In some cases however, SEO – Search Engine Optimization can work wonders. The basic idea is that you put product or service and the name of your community in the right places on your website, and the search engines such as Google, will display your website high on the page of search results if others in the same product line, in the same community haven’t already optimized their pages in the same way. You can read much more about website and business in the Website chapter.

Craigslist can be useful if it serves your area, and it is free! See the Craigslist chapter for techniques for maximizing Craigslist.

Once your business grows, you’ll want employees. There are four ways to handle this:

1. Only when your business is very small, you can pay a part-time person in cash to help you out. This is truly illegal but seldom enforced. So, you’ll want to seriously consider the following alternatives:

2. Contract worker: This is not an employee at all, but a person who technically has their own business and is designated to provide a specific service. This may be delivery, repair, cleaning, or commission sales. It is important to understand the distinction between a contract worker and an employee. Generally, the contract worker sets his or her own hours, often works off-premises, has his or her own tools, and does a specific task. If you can tell this worker to clean the bathroom, then this person is not a contract worker, but an employee. You can pay this person like any supplier – just pay cash or write a check weekly, monthly, whenever, in trade for an invoice. Contract workers are entirely legal – assuming they’re not illegal aliens or anything else that violates other labor laws. Be careful about having contract workers rolling around in vehicles. You’ll want to make sure you have the right insurance coverage if anything happens.

3. Temporary: You can contact a temporary agency (or “head hunters”) to get workers. This involves almost no paperwork on your part. All you do is pay the temp agency every month. They take care of all the employee insurance, the taxes, everything. But they also charge you 30 to 40 percent more than the employee would cost you directly. ‘Temporary’ is just a term. If you and your ‘temp’ like the arrangement, it can last as long as you both wish.

4. Employee(s): To do this legally, you need to provide workers’ compensation insurance and collect and submit payroll taxes. New software packages make this easy, but it gets even eaiser when you use an agency that exists for the sole purpose of helping you with employee paperwork. ADP is an example. You tell them the name, social security number and amount of pay for any new employee. At the end of every pay period (week, or two weeks), you tell them how many hours the employee worked. They do all the magic, filing federal forms, state forms, collecting from you any taxes that are required, sending those taxes to the government, and provide you with whatever accounting you may want. Occasionally they forward a form to be signed. For all this service, they charge around $50 per payroll period per employee. Another version is a bookkeeper who comes to your place every week for an hour or two, files all all your paperwork, pays your bills, fills out any tax or official forms, has you sign a document or two, offers suggestions to organize your business better, and then comes back next week. This is great, and relatively low cost, so you can focus on what you do best, and don’t have to learn anything. Bookkeepers are not licensed or tracked in most communities, so be sure you get a good one – one who knows what he or she is doing. When shopping for a bookkeeper, ask about training and experience, and check references. With a bookkeeper, probably more than any other worker, you really want to check references. In addition to possible embezzlement, you could get into trouble with the government, or lose money, if your bookkeeper is confused or uninformed. With a great bookkeeper, you’ll learn about and implement utility discounts, better credit terms with suppliers, and other tricks that might more than conpensate for the bookkeeper’s cost.

When hiring a worker, make sure not to discriminate. You can read more about this, but basically, be fair. Hire people based on their skills (including being able to co-exist with others in your business), and on their references, not based on skin color, sex, religion, etc.

So you see, it’s all easy. Especially if you think about the process only one step at a time.

And, it’s reasonably safe and likely to succeed if you remember the two rules:

1. Don’t spend more than you take in.

2. Don’t invest money you can’t afford to lose.

You may be amazed at how much a small store can grow, and how it can grow from almost nothing. Especially if you let it be a natural process. Imagine that you happen to like Lowrey organs.




Typical Current Lowrey Organ

Click for YouTube Video

(On readers that support YouTube.)

Now, that may or may not be your favorite contraption, but they are expensive. So, if you happened to like them, you might eventually get yourself a used one on Ebay. Perhaps it’s an old one and costs you only $1,000. You play it, enjoy it, and in time get a newer but still used one for $4,000. You sell the first one on Craigslist, and to your surprise, it brings $1,800. So, you put your $4,000 organ up for sale at $6,500, just in case someone would actually pay that much. And sure enough, after a bit of wheeling and dealing, you agree to sell it for $6,000. But now, you have no organ! So you quickly order another on Ebay. Two in fact. And you end up selling them. Fast forward a year, and you have four Lowreys in your garage, and two in your living room, and you’re selling one every week or two. At some point, you realize you’re making $30,000 per year with your organs, and so you quit your job, devoting your full time to it. Now, you’re making $50,000 per year, and have $20,000 in a savings account. So, you rent a store, put the six Lowreys you currently have in the store, order four more, and things just keep growing.

As the years pass, you almost don’t notice the growth of your business, because you’re having such a good time. You spend your days playing your various organs, demonstrating them to customers, or just noodling around for your own amusement. You get to talk shop with lots of other people who love organs, including your sales people. Eventually you get a Lowrey dealership, and we won’t even talk about your income ten years later, because, well, wealthy people don’t talk about their money!



You may enjoy more books like and unlike this one by searching for Jeff Napier in the Kindle Store, and at jeffnapier.com


Posted on Leave a comment

How to Start a Bike Shop

How To Start a Bike Shop

Complete Details For Building a Successful Bicycle Store From Scratch
Even If You Have Little Money, Time, or Experience.

Table of Contents

Start Here

Why – The Benefits

Why Not – The Objections

About The Author – Is He Qualified?

The Evolutionary Approach

Partnerships

Some Ways to Start Small

Stepping Up to a Storefront

Licensing, Paperwork, Credit Cards

Inventory

Sales Techniques

Managing Employees

Advertising and Publicity

Websites That Work

Social Networking

Craigslist

Leveraging eBay

The Guy Who Did Everything Wrong

Summary

Start Here


Table of Contents

This book is for anyone who is considering starting a bicycle store, and may be surprisingly profitable for people who already own one. By reading this book, you can avoid the pitfalls many of us had to blindly fall into, and enjoy building a bike shop easily and profitably.

Have fun and prosper, – Jeff Napier, author


Why?


Table of Contents

I once read that owning a bicycle store is the number one entrepreneurial American dream, and probably of people throughout the world. So, why on earth would anyone want to start a bicycle shop? Perhaps because. . .

* You get to be your own boss. You set the rules. You make and benefit from your decisions.

* You can make more money than most company employees.

* You will have a business with unlimited growth potential.

* You represent a good product. Bicycles are certainly earth-friendly. A human being on a bicycle is the most energy efficient machine on earth in terms of energy spent for mass moved. A human on a bicycle is also the most efficient animal on earth. Bikes play a central part in childhood, giving kids their first opportunity to expand out into the world, learning to be accountable for their own actions, pride and responsibility of ownership, and even mechanical skills.

* As a retailer, you meet lots of people and have wonderful conversations.

* You gain the esteem of being a business owner.

* You get to play with inventory management. This is a bit like stamp collecting. You manage an ever-growing collection of bikes, parts and accessories, and get to profit from ‘trading’ them.

* If you wish, you can participate in the rewarding craft of bicycle repair.

* As the owner of a bike shop, you have the opportunity to branch out. You can manage a fleet of bicycles for package delivery or rental. You can build custom human-powered machines. You can teach bicycle repair. You can lead tours or sponsor races. Your bicycle shop can even become the stepping stone to philanthropic pursuits.

* Your shop can be your legacy. It can outlive you, being something that can be sold, or passed on to your children.

Why Not

Table of Contents

You may have been told that starting a retail store is a very risky undertaking. That it costs a lot to start, and you could lose it all. Or, that you can’t ever get enough cash or credit to start a bike shop. Or that it is too difficult to learn and manage. Or that you are lacking something you may need, such as time, or experience. You may have been told you’ll need to spend long hours just breaking even for the first several years.

You may have been told these things by well-meaning people. Unfortunately, they don’t know what I know, and what you’ll know by the time you finish reading this book. While starting a bicycle shop without knowing exactly what you are doing can be risky business, I’ll tell you exactly the things that you need to know to do it easily and safely.

About The Author
Is He Qualified?


Table of Contents

Jeff Napier, How to Start a Bike Shop

Jeff Napier, your author

You may be wondering who I am to write this book. Sometimes, I wonder, too! After, all, I’m not going to sell many copies of such a specialized book. So, evidently, I’m doing this for something besides profit. I simplay want to share this information. By supporting bike shops, I’m supporting bicycling, and we all know the benefits – exercise, enjoyment, kids gaining a ‘can-do’ attitude, reduction of urban noise, danger, and pollution – the list goes on. I made mistakes when I started out, and I’m still making mistakes. I’ve seen so many bike shop owners mess up in various ways. There is no need! Read a bit, and you can benefit from what I picked up along the way. What way?

It all started in 1974 when I opened my first bike shop with six used bikes, a handful of tools, a few boxes of used parts and $400. This was in a small city of 350,000 residents, and there were already ten other bike shops. In five years, it grew into the leading ‘pro’ shop in the city. In the winter I taught framebuilding, wheelbuilding, and general bicycle repair courses. A local newspaper reporter stated that my shop was the ‘fastest growing retail store in town.’ How he compiled that information, I do not know. Perhaps he just guessed. In any case, customers frequently commented on the remarkably rapid growth of the business.

Being young, and full of enthusiasm, after five years, I lost interest, so I sold my shop, and traveled around the country in a motorhome for several years. Along the way, I coached the owner of a floundering bike shop that had fallen $140,000 in debt. In six months time, we had his debt reduced to $60,000, the owner knew how to move forward, and had his confidence back. That was more than 30 years ago, and his shop still exists today.

I started two other bike shops, one a sole proprietorship, and one was a partnership with two others. I also had several related and unrelated businesses, such as a mobile welding operation, a bookstore and a fairly large eBay business. At one point, in order to support some relatives who had got themselves into a bad financial position, I rented a large house, and started a Craigslist-based used bike business that was as profitable as a typical glass-front retail store.

As time went on, computers started to amuse me more and more, and the Internet came into existence. So I wrote BikeWebSite.com. After it entertained the first 385,000 visitors, I sold it, and moved on to other pursuits. BikeWebSite has changed quite a bit over the years, but here’s the original author page. bikewebsite.com/author.htm.



BikeWebSite

Having been successful in a varied assortment of businesses, I was being asked more and more often to coach people in business, so I became a business coach. By 2004 I was noticing that while several of my clients were doing well, some were evidently coming up against blocks. They seemed incapable of managing even simple changes they so much needed in their businesses. Convinced that the problem was some sort of psychology, I took two years off, studying Neuro-linguistic Programming, which is the applied study of human nature, and eventually became a certified master NLP practitioner. Now, I can help business owners with blocks, family and employee relations, and so much more. For instance, in studying the subconscious ways we communicate, I have even learned many inner secrets of advertising and publicity, which I will share with you in this book.

I’ve done all my business in America, so you’ll find American prices, and our silly non-metric measurements in this book. If you are outside the USA, I’m sure you can make the necessary conversions. In some of the business details, I discuss the American ways. With a quick check on the Internet or a phone call or two, you will be able to determine any differences in your country.

The Evolutionary Approach

Table of Contents

It starts right here with this very simple bit of advice:

Start small, then let it grow.

Here is a typical example: I knew a member of the bicycle racing club in a small city. He found a wholesale source of high-end bicycle tires. He bought 100 at a time and sold them to his fellow racers and a few tourists. He also started re-wholesaling them to the local bike shops. Pretty soon, he added some Campagnolo components to the things he carried around in the trunk of his car. Then he started selling hand-built frames. And Chris King headsets. Pretty soon, he outgrew the trunk of his car, and his garage became filled with inventory. His tiny business was becoming quite profitable. Can you guess what he did next? Right, he started a bicycle shop.

Another example: A 16-year-old boy started fixing bikes for the other kids in his neighborhood. At first he did it for free, but when it started taking up a couple hours of his after-school evenings, he decided to charge a bit of money. Not much at first. Perhaps $10 for a tune-up, $2 to fix a flat tire. Then, he started charging more. At first, when he needed parts, he rode to the local bicycle store a mile away and bought whatever he needed. He sold the parts he bought there to his customers for what they cost him. Then, he discovered a department store that had some common items for lower prices. Inner tubes, tires, brake cables were being sold for around 2/3 of the price of the local bike store. So, he bought a half-dozen cables, a few inner tubes, a couple of other things, and sold them for a small mark-up.

This particular kid dropped out of high school at age 17. Dropping out is not recommended. High school is free, you might as well take as much as you can get! He dropped out because he rented a small storefront and no longer had time for school. He moved his stuff out of his parents’ garage (to their delight), and into to the new store, made a sign himself, and was ‘in business.’ The business grew and grew, and five years later he sold it for enough money to live on for years. By the way, that kid was your author.

That is exactly how I started my first bike shop, but not quite how I’ll tell you to do it in the following chapters. Thirty years, 15,000 bikes, and three shops, and several other businesses later, I have developed some refinements, so that it will be even easier and safer for you than it was for me.

Along about now, you might be wondering whether you can do this. You may not have any space to set up a little home bike shop. You may not have any money at all. Or maybe you don’t know much about repairing bikes. Or, maybe you already have a full-time job, a family, and so very little free time. What can you do? You can consider a partnership. You can bring in a partner who has the things you don’t have, and you can supply the partnership with what your partner does not have.

Partnerships

Table of Contents

Starting out with a partner who has the same strengths and weaknesses as you means something won’t be covered. That’s a recipe for disaster. So you’re specifically looking for someone who can supply what you don’t have. Generally, the three ingredients that a partnership (or an individual) needs are time, experience, and money. There’s a fourth ingredient – one that all partners need, and that’s enthusiasm. You absolutely don’t want to start something with someone who is not enthusiastic about the idea.

Before forming a partnership, assess carefully your partner’s personality. Will you be able to get along with this person? How about in cloudy weather? Is the person lazy? Does the person have shoddy ethics? Is the person obstinate? I once saw a bicycle shop almost destroy itself because one partner of the three who owned it suddenly decided that they needed new wall-to-wall carpeting just a few months after starting the store. It had a painted concrete floor that was just fine. Carpeting would have cost $10,000. I think any objective person would agree that carpeting was not a top priority in that store. But, he couldn’t be talked out of it, and the partners nearly came to blows. Finally, the two other partners bought this fellow out, at an inflated price that took them years to recover.

In another case, a partner got evicted and decided to live in a little room where the inventory was stored. This was entirely against his partner’s wishes, leaving little room for the business, and violating the local zoning ordinance. This fellow would do things like wake up and walk out among customers in the showroom at 11am, unshaven and shirtless. Nice partner, eh?

So, if you’re going to consider a partnership, think about all the things that might go wrong with your perspective partners. Do not mention the idea of a partnership to any of your prospects until you are absolutely certain. It is harder to burst their bubble after you’ve created it, than before they know a partnership is being considered.

Family members can be the best, or the worst! I think you know what I’m talking about. A grandfather-grandson (or grandmother-granddaughter) partnership can be wonderful with the right people. I have seen several successful multi-generational bicycle shops.

Let’s say you have a brother who has been in jail twice for drunk driving. He’s unemployed again because he came to work too hung-over. You might think that if you offer this brother of yours a partnership, it will help him. Wrong! You must, absolutely must, consider partners for their strengths, not their weaknesses, if you intend to succeed. And if you don’t succeed, it will not help your brother in the slightest. It will probably make his lack of self-esteem worse.

How many partners should you consider? The minimum number you can get away with. If all you need is someone with repair skill, or someone who can greet customers from 10 to 5, then one partner is sufficient. Additional partners means that the profit is split smaller. It also means it is harder to make decisions. Larry Page and Sergei Brin have been very successful with Google. When it came time to make decisions, they had a brief discussion, came to a consensus, and moved forward.

On the other hand, I knew of an organic restaurant that had 17 partners. One of their specialties was waffles. They had one waffle iron, and so customers had to wait up to 45 minutes for their orders in the morning. So, the 17 of them had a meeting to decide if they should buy a second $30 waffle iron. The meeting, argument really, ran until after midnight, and they couldn’t come to a consensus. In fact, it was weeks before they could all figure out that $30 was a reasonable price to pay to satisfy their breakfast customers!

Once you’ve sorted out who your partners are going to be, you need to state some things up front. Is one going to be a silent partner? If so, how silent? How will various kinds of decisions be made? For instance, the person working the sales floor probably shouldn’t have to place a phone call to another partner if a customer wants a $10 discount on a new bike. What happens as the business grows? Do you add more partners? Do you hire employees? How do the partners decide on new employees?

I know of one bicycle store with a rather unique partnership. It consists of four people. One partner, Susan, comes from a wealthy family. She put up the initial investment which was enough to start a complete retail bicycle store from scratch. Since most people do not have that kind of money available, I recommend starting something small and building it slowly into a full-fledged retail business. More about that later. Susan was married to Fred, a fellow who had retail management experience and loved bikes. Their friend Jacques also loved bikes and knew a lot about brands and accessories, so these two men ran the sales department. To break it down a bit further, Fred took care of the inventory and paperwork, and only appeared on the sales floor when Jacques was overwhelmed with customers. Susan didn’t work in the shop at all. She took care of her and Fred’s children. Finally, there was James, who was the repairman. He didn’t have the kind of personality you’d want on the sales floor. But he was a wizard with a wrench in his hand. In this particular store, the repair shop was in the basement, and James was perfectly happy to spend all his time down there. In fact, as I understand it, that was set up as a separate business. The three upstairs partners had a contract to supply James with all the repair work. They got a small percentage of the repair income for writing up the repair orders, handling the credit cards, and so on. They also paid James a flat rate to assemble and adjust new bikes.

In summary, all the terms of partnership need to be discussed. More than discussed. You want the major points in writing, and a contract signed by all partners.

The very most important clause in that contract will be an escape hatch for each partner. What happens if the business loses money? What happens if a partner becomes sick or dies? What happens if two partners can’t stand the sight of each other after a while? Escape clauses need to be fluid. For instance, if a partner wants to leave early on, his value in the business is worth far less than after five years. These escape clauses must be manageable, so that it is truly possible to make changes in a partnership as needed. For instance, a very bad escape clause would be that if a partner leaves, the others have to immediately pay her $500,000. If an escape clause is all spelled out in writing ahead of time, all will be well in these eventualities – or at least as well as it can be.

Another consideration in partnerships is your own personality. Take me, for example. I can’t stand having to share my decisions with anyone. I have always been a sole proprietor. I’d make a horrible partner unless I was allowed to run the show 100%.

So, on the opposite end of the partnership spectrum is sole proprietorship. The individual owner doesn’t have to defer to anyone before making major decisions. 100% of the profit goes to the individual. That’s huge, even with just two partners. Let’s say that the profit of a business is $60,000 per year. That means that an individual proprietor takes home $60,000. But two partners owning the same business would only get $30,000 each.

There’s also an ego component. I love being able to say, “I own this.” For me, it would be horrible to say, “I own a portion of this.”

Getting back to the original question, what if you don’t have the time, experience or money to start a bike shop on your own? And if you don’t want a partnership, there is a very simple answer. Start with something evolutionary. Start something small that you can manage, and let it build as you gain experience, money, whatever you’ve been needing.

Some Ways to Start Small

Table of Contents

We’ve already talked about the man who sold high-end tires out of his car. And, we covered me, the young fellow who started fixing bikes for kids in his neighborhood. What else could you do?

If you know nothing about bicycle repair, you’ll probably want to focus on buying and selling, or perhaps a bicycle service, such as being a bicycle messenger, or organizing a messenger service.




Bicycle Messenger

To be a bicycle messenger is as easy as falling off a log. All you need is a bike and a cell phone. You can make up some business cards and flyers. Your first task as a messenger is to deliver the flyers to bulletin boards all over town, and to deliver the cards into the hands of as many people as you can. Don’t forget about Craigslist – a great cost-free way to advertise a service in most towns. If you live in a large city, there may already be messenger services. But there’s always room for more. Especially if you do something unique. For instance, you might deliver meals between 9pm and midnight. Or you might specialize in transporting medical records – whatever you find a need for in your city. If you’re in a small town, even as small as 5,000 residents, you can set up a general messenger service and prosper nicely.

Buying and selling can take several forms. If you work with whole bikes, you may want to partner with, or hire a bicycle mechanic so you can be sure you’re selling properly-running, safe bikes. You can make more money buying broken bikes, having them fixed, and selling them in guaranteed good condition. It is entirely possible to make $1,200 per week just buying bikes at garage sales, fixing them or getting them fixed, and selling them through Craigslist.

Bikes at garage sales can be incredibly inexpensive. The people may be moving next week, and haven’t been able to sell their bikes for a reasonable price. The owner of the bike may be at college and the parents want to sell it to help pay for textbooks. A bike may be broken and quite undervalued by the owner. It is very common to pay $25 for a typical mountain bike, one that sold for $300 when it was new. You can put $20 worth of parts in it, perhaps $50 for labor if you don’t do it yourself, and then sell it for $150. For a few months, in a somewhat offbeat scheme to support some relatives, I did this with twenty bikes per week out of my one-car garage. I just went to as many garage sales as I could hit on Friday, Saturday and Sunday, rounding up the bikes with my pickup truck. If I didn’t have a pickup truck, I could have rented a U-Haul for $40 or so on Sunday evening, and gather up all the bikes I had purchased over the weekend.

It is great if you can display your bikes locked up outdoors, with prominent price signs where many people drive by, but most people don’t have a place to do this. You might consider a consignment arrangement with someone who does. You can place classified ads in the newspaper, and although expensive, this generally works well. In most communities, the best bet is Craigslist. You can place ads for as many bikes as you want, along with pictures, and it is all free. I’ll talk about ways to leverage Craigslist in a later chapter.

When I was doing this out of a home, I mostly dealt in medium-quality mountain bikes, a few road bikes, and one or two children’s bikes. In general, children’s and low-end adult bikes don’t sell for a sufficient profit to be worth your while. A twenty-year-old mountain bike that you price at $150 is the easiest thing to sell. I also had some relatively high-end bikes when I could find good enough deals. Typically, I’d pay $100 or $150 for a high-end bike at a garage sale, and sell it for $600.

As you develop your selling business, you’ll discover that you no longer need to get all your bikes at garage sales. People will start calling to find out whether you’ll buy their old bikes. You can enhance that by telling everyone you see that you’re always willing to buy broken or inexpensive adult bikes. (Remember, there just isn’t much money in low-end and children’s bikes.)

You’ll want to be careful about stolen bicycles. They don’t generally show up at garage sales because thieves don’t operate that way. They wouldn’t want the exposure. Still, you’ll want to be careful about anything in too good a condition at too good a price being sold by people between 12 and 25 years old unless their families are at the sale with them.

If you have doubts about the history of a bike, you can ask the seller for a receipt. Often they’ll have legitimate excuses – such as they didn’t save the receipt. But if they can produce a receipt, you’ll know for sure that the bike has not been stolen. Sometimes, you can ask whether anyone has taken a picture that includes the bike. If they show you an old picture on their smartphone, it’s a pretty good bet that the bike has a good history.

In many communities, the police have worked out some sort of system to register used bikes. If you start dealing with used bikes regularly, they’ll want you to let them know about bikes you purchase. This probably isn’t as important as when you get an actual store, but you’ll want to participate if you can to protect the community at large from bike theft. The police won’t charge you any money, but they’ll want you to provide the serial number, description and source of every bike you handle. They usually ask you to hold every bike for 72 hours so they can have a chance to follow up if something turns out to be stolen. The downside is that if a bike is stolen, you’ll have to give it up, and won’t be reimbursed for what you paid. The upside is that the owner from which it was stolen gets it back.

Imagine a twelve-year-old boy who saved all summer to buy his BMX bike, has it for two weeks, leaves it unlocked in a friend’s yard, as twelve-year-olds will do, and discovers it has been stolen. The poor thing will cry his eyes out. If you can help prevent that sort of scenario, you can be proud to do so. Wouldn’t it be a great gesture to clean and tune a bike that’s going to be reunited with it’s owner? I never got the chance. I registered hundreds of bikes with my local authorities, and no bike was ever reported as stolen. Part of the reason is that the majority of bikes I purchased were broken, not shiny, valuable bikes. I think another reason is that most homeowners fail to record the serial numbers of their bikes, laptop computers, cameras and such gear.

If the police recover bikes that have been stolen, but don’t have a serial number or some way to positively identify the bike and reunite it with its owner. they hold it a while, then sell it at a ‘police auction.’ You can sometimes buy some remarkably good bikes for very little money at these auctions. You’re bidding against the general public, most of whom are looking for bikes for themselves, and know very little about how valuable certain models are. Others will see a bent wheel, or a missing cable, and just assume the bike is beyond their ability to repair for a reasonable cost.

That’s not always the case. Sometimes, the police auctions are way too popular, and you’d be wasting your time to try to buy bikes there. For instance, at some auctions, you need to pay as soon as you win each bike, so you miss the opportunity to bid on the next several bikes that go across the block while you’re waiting in line at the cashier. Of course, in that case, bringing a friend to help is a good idea. Some of the best auctions happen in inclement weather. In late fall, the police will have their last auction of the year. These will be many good bikes that accumulated during the end of the summer. There’s less interest as soon as the weather cools, and if it rains, or snows, there won’t be many bidders. You win. Mostly. But there is an unexpected catch.

When you buy a bike at a police auction, guess what? It’s still a stolen bike! Normally, this means nothing, and having gone through the process, and paid money, it is morally and nominally yours. But if the original owner discovers you have his bike, you are still obligated to give it back.

Buying and selling can also be about parts and accessories. I believe a person could watch eBay like a hawk, and pick up things like Campagnolo components, and bullet headlights from bikes from the 1950s. You could turn right around and sell them for more on eBay. There is 14-speed internally geared hub made by a company called Rholoff that sells for $1000.



The Rholoff Speedhub – 14 Speeds

via: http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Marcela
c

If you could pick a used one up on eBay for $300, you could sell it for $600 – $700 easily. Interestingly, even a common three-speed hub sells regularly on eBay for $40. You might also mix and match with your local market, using Craigslist and garage sales. I think another good eBay business could be had by buying the lowest of the low bikes locally – you know, the department store $100 mountain bikes, disassembling them, and selling the pieces on eBay. Better yet, if you can score the older bikes, maybe something like a Peugeot PX-10 from 1970, you can disassemble them, and sell the parts for a rather remarkable sum. More about eBay.

As you develop your sales business, you may find opportunities to do simple repairs. In time, the repairs you are capable of performing will become more complex until finally you are qualified to do repair work professionally, if you want to do that sort of thing. That’s how it worked for me. I started with simple things for my neighborhood friends. I tried experiments with my own bikes and with bikes I eventually put up for sale, until finally I was building custom frames, making customized tall unicycles, specialty human powered machines, and bicycle trailers. You should have seen my first paint jobs. Horrible! But eventually, through trial and much error, I learned how to professionally paint a bike.

The one thing to always remember is to know your limitations – for two reasons. One, you don’t want to promise something you can’t deliver. I still remember the time I took apart a shifter to replace a cable while the customer waited, back in 1976. It was one of the first-ever index shifters. I didn’t realize there was a little spring in the thing, and it jumped out on the floor. I spent fifteen miserable minutes looking for that dang-blasted thing! The more important reason is safety. You want to make absolutely, completely sure you never compromise a bicycle’s safety. There are things you might want to learn about before offering professional repair, such as over-dishing a rear wheel, so that it suddenly collapses on a high-speed turn. There are many good books and websites that teach bicycle repair. You might enjoy BikeWebSite.com.

If you are good at, and enjoy repairing bikes, you have some fun opportunities. Of course one is to run a little underground repair shop out of your home. You might be in violation of your local zoning ordinances. If they reach out and bite you, it is not nasty. They just ask you to stop. People don’t go to jail or pay fines for that sort of thing, unless they persist after they have been told to stop. Almost always, a home-based bicycle repair business would have to grow rather large and noticeable before the neighbors start complaining. Basically, keep the noise down, try to let your customers know where to not to park, and be ready for your home-business to collapse at any time. The most likely scenario is that you’ll be ready to move into a proper storefront long before anyone reports you to the zoning authorities.

Another way to make money with bicycle repairing is to create what I call a Safety Tune-Up Station.

One out of eight bicycles has a safety problem. These problems are often hidden, such as a frayed brake cable that will fail at the worst time, during a hard-pulling panic stop. Seventy percent of bicycle accidents don’t involve cars. What do these statistics mean? They tell us that if these bikes could all be inspected and repaired, a number of people could be kept out of the hospitals. And not just kids. It turns out that more than 60 percent of the people injured in bicycle accidents are adult males.

So my proposal is that you could get paid to do safety tune-ups. One version might be to set up a bicycle repair stand and a toolbox near a public bike path or a place where people gather. You’d put up a sign saying that you’re doing safety tune-ups on the spot – in just a few minutes while people wait. You could charge money for each bike. Perhaps $8 or $10, or whatever the market will bear. But you could also do it other ways. One way would be to just ask for donations. In a way, it would be like a street performer, passing the hat, or with an open guitar case full of one- and five-dollar bills. To maximize your profit, you might point out that the average person pays $10 per bike. But to be fair to those who have little money – the very people who most need their bikes made safe, you may end up doing a lot of safety tune-ups for free.

You can get sponsorship. Wouldn’t it be great publicity for a local business to promote free bicycle safety tune-ups? They’d pay you $200 per day, or $8 per bike or whatever you agree upon, to fix bikes in their name, perhaps at their facility.

This would be a good fit for a corporate or public grant. If you are a grant writer, know a grant writer, or would like to take a crack at grant writing, it would be well worth applying, don’t you think?

You can also perform safety tune-ups in trade for old broken bikes – from those who can provide them. In other words, you’re mostly doing safety tune-ups on a free basis, but willing to accept donations of cash or bike items. You could then fix up the bikes, or strip them for parts, and sell them on Craigslist or eBay.

So what is a safety tune-up exactly? You’d make sure all the nuts and bolts are tight, make sure the brakes work properly, and that the wheels are not in danger of collapsing. You’d run the chain through a rag held in your fingertips feeling for defective links. You’d look the bike over for other safety concerns such as a bungee cord wrapped too loosely on a carrier, which could come loose and catch in the spokes. Beyond safety, anything else you might do would be optional. If you have time and interest, you might adjust index shifting so it clicks in properly. You might true a wheel so it doesn’t rub on the brakes. You might make sure the tire pressures are just right. And, you might just teach a bit of bicycle safety when appropriate. Wouldn’t it be nice to come up with some nice metaphorical bits you could drop, especially to the younger riders, so they’d be more inclined to ride more defensively in traffic?

Or, maybe put together a fun show, perhaps with some magic tricks, juggling, music, or comedy skits, to teach bicycle safety. You can get grants to present it in the schools, or street perform, passing the hat at the end of your entertaining safety shows.

Maybe you know some trick riding. There was once a motorcyclist who had mastered a little routine where he took 26 footsteps all over his motorcycle while balancing, not on the kickstand and not rolling. You could combine something like this, plus your BMX, circus bike, or even unicycle tricks into a bicycle safety show.

Getting back to the safety tune-up idea, you could also do house calls. Advertising on Craigslist, with business cards, and flyers, you could let people know you’ll come to their house and do safety tune-ups on all their bikes, for perhaps $18 per bike. Or maybe full regular tune-ups, where you check and adjust all the bearings, adjust spokes and true wheels, check tire pressures, make sure all the bolts are tight, do a bit of cleaning, adjust brakes and derailleurs, and advise the rider about proper seat position, riding style and so on.

Evolving from house calls for safety tune-ups, you could offer house calls for general bicycle repair – tune-ups, overhauls, parts replacements, wheel repair and so on. Maybe even offer emergency road service for punctures, broken wheels and so on. A full tune up is worth much more than a ‘safety tune-up.’ You can check with your local bike shops to see how much they are charging. You can charge just as much, or even more, since your customers wouldn’t have to bring their bikes to a store, wait days, then go back to the store to pick up their bikes.

If you can repair bikes, you can teach bicycle repair. For those who have not only repair skill, but people skills, teaching bicycle repair through the adult or community education schools can be a good gig. The basic idea is that you contact these schools, put a listing in their catalogs, and get paid per head when the students sign up. You’re not bothering these schools to ask. They want teachers to sign up. Dale Carnegie, the famous author of “How to Win Friends and Influence People” launched his career this way. He started teaching at his local YMCA with just a handful of students, and ended up teaching to stadiums filled with 20,000 people. I suppose teaching bicycle repair to 20,000 people at a time might be a bit problematic, but for the kind of money that would generate, you’d figure out a way, right?

Some community education schools expect you to work for very little money or for free. You can leverage this by inviting your students to something else that costs money or selling an additional product or service. For instance, you could teach in my town, where the school pays only $15 per hour. But during your classes, you tell your students that you are also teaching advanced bicycle repair and wheelbuilding out of your home – for quite a bit more money, of course. In every community, there are people who would love to attend a two-day weekend in which they learn about building and truing wheels. They’d pay well over $200 per person. So, if you get ten students, that’s $2,000 for a weekend’s enjoyable work.

Beyond bicycle repair, one can also teach bicycle racing and touring technique, bicycle safety, and even bicycle politics. One could start a school of bicycle technology.

Something else that might interest you is the idea of bicycle detailing. As you know, bicycles have a way of getting dirty, and it is not easy to clean the chain, in the spokes near the hubs, around the bottom bracket and so on. There are no doubt ways to build a nice business around a bicycle detailing service. You might be surprised how much some people are willing to pay for detailing. Many people who have plenty of money, but not much time or interest in work for which they are not experienced and for which they do not have adequate equipment – whatever that might be. (I’ll leave it to you to figure out efficient bike detailing equipment.) This segment of the population, would be delighted to pay you to detail their bikes. Perhaps you’d make house calls. Perhaps people would have to bring their bikes to your location. Maybe you’d set up on weekends in a park, assuming you can get a permit to do business in your local park.

Taking an evolutionary step toward a real bicycle shop, you can move up to a flea market, selling bikes or parts and accessories or service on weekends. Many flea markets are held at self-storage facilities, so you can have a low-rent place to store your ever-growing inventory. In some, you can have electricity, so you can set up lights and operate tools. And, in some, even though most of the business happens on weekends, you can work and entertain customers on weekdays as well. For most flea market items, weekday selling does not work very well, but for your flea market-based bicycle shop, as you gain a reputation, you can have a parade of customers throughout the week.

Stepping Up to a Storefront

Table of Contents

The evolutionary approach has been great so far, hasn’t it?

Now that you’ve got some money, time and experience, or a partner with what you need, you can safely start your retail store.

As you may have heard, one out of every four women fail in business. But what about the men? Four out of every five men fail in business! That’s what this portion of the book is about, how to start your bicycle shop without failure. Those who fail are those who haven’t learned what works and what doesn’t.

They don’t have the benefit of the ‘secrets’ you’re going to read in the next few paragraphs.

The first secret you already know: Start small, and build slowly and carefully.

Secret Number Two: You’ve got to take in more than you spend.

In my very early twenties, during the growth of my very first bike shop, I also rented and sold cross-country skis during the winter. I had many requests to do tune-ups on downhill skis, but I did not know anything about that skill. One who does has to know all about inspecting and adjusting bindings, filling scratches with plastic candles, and planing the bottoms good and smooth. I had a friend who was an unemployed ski mechanic. Both of us not knowing any better, I invited him to rent some bench space in my shop and start his own micro-business within mine. He would be our downhill ski expert. The bench rent was to be $80/month, which he could start paying after his first month.

We put up a paper sign in the window advertising ski repair, an in that very first month, he took in quite a bit of money. Feeling successful, he bought things. He didn’t like his old beat-up electric drill, so he bought a new top-of-the-line drill. He bought some great bluejeans, and some excellent cowboy boots so he could be the stylish guy at parties. You know what? When it came time to pay his $80 rent, he didn’t have it! After a couple more months of watching him struggle with lack of supplies (although well-dressed), and never, ever seeing my $80 rent payments, I had to throw him out. It seems to me this poor fellow is destined to be someone’s employee forever.

So, you’ve gotta take in more than you spend – from the first day. If you can always follow this rule, you will be successful.

Now, you’ve been buying, selling and repairing bikes. You have experience, and at least a little money. Maybe it’s time to look for a business place.

It would be nice to have 10,000 square feet right in the middle of the busiest mall in town. That’ll cost you $25,000 per month in most communities. OK, so maybe 700 to 1,000 square feet in a strip mall or a place where people can see your signs and park. That will cost between $700 and $1,400 per month. With first month’s rent, security deposit, deposits with the utility companies, and some other startup expenses, that’ll work out to $5,000. You might need to buy some furnishings. You might need to expand your inventory. You might not be able to cover the rent out of your gross sales for the first couple of months. We’re talking about perhaps $15,000 that you can afford to risk. If you don’t have that amount yet, no worries. Just go ahead and continue to run and expand your existing business.

An option is to draw up a business plan, show it to bankers, or wealthy family members, and borrow the money to start. I don’t recommend this approach. It shortcuts what is typically a necessary learning experience, and puts you in a high-stress situation that tends to last for years. It is also not necessary. Also, depending on the nature of the loan, you may feel like someone’s employee, who has to do things the way they want them done, and has to explain why the repayment isn’t happening as fast as they’d like.

Location

“Location, location, location.” You’ve heard it before, and it couldn’t be more relevant than when renting a place to conduct a bicycle business.

First, you need exposure. You need to rent a store where your signs can be seen by a lot of traffic. This will work far better than any other sort of advertising. A good location is at busy intersections where people have to wait for red lights to turn green. They’ll look around and see your bikes lined up out front. This has to be an intersection where everyone comes by from time to time, not an intersection in a neighborhood where it is only the same 500 commuters every day. Another location is inside a mall where there is a lot of foot traffic. And, not just any foot traffic. These people are there to spend money. Malls can be hard to get into, and expensive. If they’re not, there may be a reason. I have seen malls with many closed stores, and very little foot traffic. That’s not the mall for your store. If you can locate next to, or within eyesight of a Walmart, a busy movie theater complex, or even a RadioShack store, you’ll do well, assuming people can park.

If people find it hard to park, they may never bother to visit your store, so easy access is essential. Even though your business is bicycles, a majority of your clientele will arrive in automobiles. Look beyond easy parking. The parking lot should look inviting and have easy access. If people have to make a U-turn, negotiate speed bumps, and wait for an unloading truck to move, they’re going to shop elsewhere.

Parking meters are death to a retail business. If your customers have to put coins in the meters, they’ll be agitated, impatient shoppers. Rather than focusing on buying your stuff, they’re worrying the whole time they’re in your store that their meters will run out of money. Worse, they remember this feeling from other times they have shopped in stores where they had to park at a meter. They may have even forgotten or got tied up, letting their meters expire, and had to pay parking tickets. So, they may never come to your store in the first place. They’d rather drive another ten miles to another bike shop than park at a meter.

In many communities, there’s the ‘good side of the tracks’ and then there’s the other side. The other side is not always so terrible. If you are a good manager of people so that you can deal with the occasional unruly customer, you can save a lot of rent. You’ll be serving a grateful clientele, one that consumes bicycle products and services as much as, or even more than a suburban clientele.

Some of the most successful bike shops I have seen are in the worst parts of town. Once the bike shop develops a reputation, people from all sides of the tracks will shop there. On the other hand, the suburban bike shop will tend to service only a local clientele.

My first bike shop was in one of the ‘terrible’ areas. Most of my clients were amiable, good people that I enjoyed having in my store. A few were real weirdos. One fellow, although very nice, came in and browsed almost every day. He never said much. Oddly, he always wore brown pants and tan shirts. Not a uniform, just his colors, I suspect. But that’s not too weird.

Now, Larry was weird. He was an air-traffic controller who became over-stressed in the Vietnam war. He was also one of the highest-ranking chess players in the nation. Very thin – I suspect because he often forgot to notice he was hungry. Sometimes he’d come in during the summer dressed in seven layers of shirts and sweaters. Sometimes he’d wear a huge clunky necklace he’d made out of derailleurs, brake calipers, hubs, and other parts. He was quick and jerky in his movements and in his speech. He became a bike shop regular.

You’ll soon discover that every bike shop has its groupies. Most of them spend only a little money every month, but they are very worth supporting because they bring all their friends to your store. Larry, however, was an exceptional case. He’d do something like start a conversation with another customer. Then, out of nervousness, he’d take a bite out of the newspaper he was holding. Discovering that his mouth was full of newspaper, he felt he had no choice but to chew it up and swallow it. I don’t know whether Larry had any friends, but he was so quirky, I enjoyed having him around. That is, most of the time.

One slow winter day, he challenged me to a chess game. He had a three-minute limit. I had infinite time. He sat on a stool at the sales counter, facing away from the chess set, and blindfolded. Of course I was able to look at the chess set. As soon as I announced a move, he called out a response. Typical of Larry, his responses were lightning-quick, and way too loud. I pride myself in being fairly good at chess. Larry won in 20 moves. with two minutes and twenty seconds left on the clock – two seconds per move! Then, he had me reset all the pieces, and still blindfolded, he replayed the entire game from memory.

I used to keep the phone on the front counter, so I could answer it without having to move anywhere. One day, it rang as usual and I reached to pick it up. Larry snapped it up in a split-second, listened for perhaps five seconds, then yelled, “*%@@&!” into the phone and hung up. I threw him out of the store. The phone rang again. It was the sister of one of my mechanics wanting to arrange a lunch with her brother. For the next 45 minutes, Larry loitered across the street, trying to look casual while leaning on a vending machine. Finally, I let him back in the store.



The Counter where Larry grabbed the phone

I have had a few worse customers. Shoplifters. People who just can’t seem to stop yelling. People who are obscenely dressed. They are few and far between, but if you have a sensitive heart, you might prefer to set up in a ‘better’ part of town, or hire salespeople who have strong people skills.

Saving rent is essential, especially in the early stages. The difference between $1,000 per month rent and $1,200 is a lot of inventory. On the other hand, if you can get a location with good exposure and parking for $1,200, or a junky location for $1,000, you are way, way better off getting the place with exposure and parking. For the $200 per month you’d save, you could never buy enough advertising to make up the difference.

Did I say, “buy” advertising? I meant “get free publicity.” Just about any form of advertising that a small bicycle shop can buy will be entirely ineffective. Yellow pages ads are the worst. You end up paying a lot of money per month to the phone company, or a phonebook publisher, and get little effect. People don’t use phone books any more. They use the Internet. So you’ll want a website. It can be a simple one-page affair. All people want is your address, the hours you’re open, and phone number. You can do some search engine optimization tricks (SEO), which I’ll discuss later, to get people to your webpage. If you’re in a city with a dozen other bike shops, they’ll all have their own websites, and without SEO or some other tricks, you might be 13th on the list, on the second page, when people google your town name and “bicycle” or “bike” or something like that.

Licensing, Paperwork, Credit Cards

Table of Contents

I’ll bet you’ve been thinking that licensing and paperwork are difficult to deal with. Nothing could be further from the truth.

At first, when you’re just doing something small, like selling out of the trunk of your car, fixing neighborhood bikes, or selling at flea markets, you don’t really have to keep track of anything. Oh, yes, technically, you are supposed to have a business license and collect sales tax. But no one does. Think about it. If those things were truly enforced, everyone would have to file before having a garage sale, and pay sales tax after. Kids couldn’t have lemonade stands.

If you want to be entirely kosher, you can get a business license, or at least collect sales tax for later payment to the local government. And if you make any money at all, you ought keep track for when you pay income tax.

On the very rare occasions when people are caught running a tiny at-home business, they are given very tolerable treatment. Typically they pay approximately what they should have paid, plus perhaps a $20 penalty.

By the way, some businesses are very simple. If you buy and sell on eBay, all you need to do legally is keep track of your income and sales tax or VAT collection in most countries and all but the five US states where sales tax is not collected. You don’t usually need to comply with zoning restrictions if you don’t have customers coming to your home. In fact, piano teachers run more risk than eBay sellers.

But this book isn’t about how to do anything illegal. I suggest that you do try to comply with the law as soon as you possibly can. Certainly, by the time you start an official retail bicycle shop, you ought to have all your legal ducks in a row. These are the ducks:

1. You must rent space where the zoning is correct. The reason you don’t see auto body shops in residential neighborhoods is because they are typically noisy and stinky, and so the neighbors, through local government, have agreed that only homes can be established in those neighborhoods.

In the middle of the city, where there are stores, factories, offices all lined up, the zoning is much less restrictive. Pretty much anything goes, but before you sign any leases, you’ll want to actually google your community’s zoning office, then email, phone, or visit them with the address you’re proposing to rent to see whether it checks out.

Zoning also controls what kind of signage you can display. Be careful about that before renting. You wouldn’t want to be restricted to a 2-foot by 3-foot plaque as I once was at a business location in Marin County, California. If you violate signage zoning, they typically issue a notice to stop doing that – take down your offending sign – within 30 days. No fines, no court, no jail time.

In fact, in most business offenses, the various government agencies realize you are not trained in business law. They are very flexible and forgiving in accommodating your mistakes, unless you continue to misuse the system after knowing better.

2. Business checking account. Get a business checking account at your bank. It is free at most banks.

3. Business license, often called DBA, which stands for Doing Business under an Assumed Name (even if it is your own name). Each community handles this in their own way, but while you are chatting with the zoning people, you can ask who handles business licenses. Go to that office, and fill out the single page form. It takes five minutes. In most places, they want an annual fee. It will be in the range of $5 to $150. In order to prove that you’re in business, they may ask to see a business checking account number.

4. Sales tax collection is not required in Alaska, Delaware, Montana, New Hampshire, and Oregon. If you are in one of the other states, or in any country that depends on VAT or sales tax, then ask at the city offices who to visit to set up sales tax collection. They’ll know exactly where to send you, because that’s everyone’s next stop. That too, requires a simple one-page form and is free. You are obligated to collect sales tax on all appropriate transactions. In some places, labor or second-hand merchandise is exempt. In others, everything is taxed. In some places, Native Americans, members of the clergy, or others are exempt. They’ll hand you a pamphlet with all the details. In most cases, as you conduct your business, you periodically set aside the sales tax you have collected in a savings account. Once every three months, the tax people mail you another one-page form in which you state your gross (total) sales, the sales that are taxable, anything you’ve taken from inventory for your own use (taxable), and how much you owe. Throw a check in the envelope, and you’re all set for another three months.

5. Fire inspections. In some communities, the fire department comes along every year or two and inspects all businesses. They want to see that isles are clear so people could escape a fire. They worry about extension cords, and want to see fire extinguishers hung on the wall. Compliance is easy. After a typical inspection, you may have to move some equipment to eliminate an extension cord and buy a fire extinguisher.

6. Insurance. Sometimes, a landlord will want to know that you plan to carry liability insurance before they’ll grant a lease. But you may want to get insurance anyway, as soon as you can afford it. If you are wealthy and something should happen, you want to protect your assets. You don’t want to be sued, or if you are sued, you want the insurance company’s lawyers working for you, and you want them to cover any eventual settlement. If you have pretty much nothing, you are not likely to be sued, because the opposing lawyer will see there’s nothing to collect, and therefore no incentive take the case. Still, you may want insurance. This is to protect your customers. What if something did happen? In a bicycle shop, there are exposures. A customer may crash on a test ride. A customer may fall on the front step. Once, an eleven-year-old boy tried to ride his bicycle up a stair and into the narrow front door of my shop. He lost control and slammed into a plate glass window. Fortunately, the window didn’t break and the kid wasn’t hurt, but it could have been a different story.

Another time, I was trying out a new mechanic. She came highly recommended, but she was very shy and nervous about her trial day. If you’ve ever been nervous, you may remember how you somehow don’t see details as clearly as you would if you were calm. We had a chain strung up at waist height across an opening between the sales floor and the service area, with a sign that said, “Authorized Personnel Only.” Just before lunch, in front of two mechanics, three sales people, and several customers, she came walking through that opening at a fairly good clip, and somehow didn’t see the chain. She went head over teacup, or whatever the expression is, doing an almost 360 degree flip over that chain. She wasn’t hurt, but she was so embarrassed she ran out of the shop and didn’t return. I had to phone her at home and let her know no one was laughing – even though secretly we were.

You get the idea. If something serious happened to a customer, wouldn’t you want to know there’s a way to compensate them? For a regular size bicycle shop, general liability insurance costs around $500 to $800 per year. A fringe benefit to the general liability policy is that your own tools and inventory are covered in the case of a fire, major theft, or a similar eventuality.

Are you starting to worry that something could happen? In all my 15 years in the bicycle business, I have to admit I took some rather large risks, but I was never sued. I never even came close because I cared about my customers, so I was always conscious of making sure bikes were safe, and that the store itself was safe – no ice on the sidewalk and that sort of thing.

Another bicycle shop, about the size of mine, had three concurrent lawsuits. What was the difference? I was always polite, and more than polite. I was friendly, with my customers. I kind of wanted them all to be friends. They knew this, and loved it. If I had been like the owner of the other place, I would have been grouchy, and well, just the kind of person people would want to sue, given half a chance. He was also careless in his repair work. I think his motto was just get it done, charge the money, and get it out of the shop. The people he hired were the same way, or they became that way once they had been working there a while, and adopted the owner’s business mood.

You may have heard of Patch Adams. He is a doctor, a general practitioner, who practices for free, or for donations. He does not carry malpractice insurance, which is unheard of for medical doctors. One out of sixteen doctors is sued every year. But Dr. Adams is doing good work, really cares about his patients, and they know it. If something goes wrong, they know he did his best. Consequently, he hasn’t ever been sued, as of the last time I checked. But it isn’t quite as simple as that. He may be lucky, or probably has little personal wealth, so suing him might not be sufficiently profitable. However, the insurance companies do not take into account how likable or how well-meaning a person is. They just look to see if there are assets to be taken, and a legal way to take them. So, as you start to gain wealth in your bicycle business, you may be well-meaning, and you may have a well-meaning client who has been injured. The client would never sue you, but his insurance company will.

If you are in America, when it comes time to fill out your federal income tax, you’ll discover a thing called a Schedule C. This is also a single sheet of paper, and is easy to fill out. It will ask about the value of your inventory at the start of the year, the end of the year, and how much you spent on rent, utilities, office supplies, and things like that. As you work your way through the Schedule C, which takes maybe 15 minutes, you discover how much you actually made that year, and write that number into your 1040. These days, it is even easier. If you use TurboTax or HR Block Online, or any of those services, the software just asks questions, which you answer, and everything else is done for you.

In America, because you are self-employed, you end up paying 13.5 percent of your personal income in Social Security Tax, which seems like a lot compared to the 7.25 percent that is withheld if you have a job. But the truth is your employer pays the other 7.25 percent. Still, it is a lot of money, and the government doesn’t trust you to hold it. Therefore, you are supposed to fill out a 1040-ES four times a year, and pre-pay your taxes. For the average bike shop owner, the income tax situation may seem shocking at first. Instead of getting a big refund at the end of the year, you have to pay thousands of dollars four times a year. To reframe this more comfortably, remember that as a self-employed person, you have the potential to make far more money than most employees will ever get. Once you’re making enough, the taxes seem trivial. This is pretty much the same in most countries.

As far as filing your 1040-ES forms, Schedule C, and all that, the online software will guide you. Or, if you like doing things yourself, you can find out everything you need online, and you may discover it is all rather simple in the end. By the way, if you fail to pay the 1040-ES payments, life doesn’t end. You just pay it all in April, and a small ($20 – $50) fine for not pre-paying. If you can’t pay in April, the IRS will let you make payments, although they do charge a fairly hefty interest rate.



Photo credit: mediaphoto.org

Setting up to accept credit cards used to be complicated and expensive. In one of my businesses, I had to sign a three-year contract at $35 per month to get a credit card machine. Now, PayPal.com, an online money transaction company, makes it super-easy, and free! Sign up for a free PayPal account if you don’t already have one. Then look for “On Your Mobile Device” or something similar, since they change the layout of the website from time to time. When you click through, you are taken to a page that explains you can accept all common credit cards on any standard smartphone. PayPal even mails you a free attachment for swiping the cards. When you take a card payment, the money goes instantly to your PayPal account. From there, you can transfer it to your checking account, spend the money on eBay, have a check mailed, whatever you want. PayPal takes only a small percentage from each transaction, the same or less than any of the old-fashioned credit card companies used to charge.

That’s pretty much it. Nothing more, except inventory management, and that’s actually quite fun!

Inventory

Table of Contents

When you’re just starting out as a home business, you can buy things on eBay and mark them up a bit. But that’s not sufficient for a proper retail store. You want to buy from the wholesalers. They have catalogs and secret price lists. Once you have a business, these catalogs are very easy to get. The wholesalers want you to buy from them, and eventually they’ll seek you out. Initially, you need to seek them out. In order to prove you’re in business, so you can get the secret price lists, you need to show them a sheet of paper called a resale certificate. This is what your state’s sales tax office gives you when you sign up to collect sales tax. You mail or fax a copy to the wholesaler, and you’re in business. Sometimes all you need to do is tell them your sales tax number on the phone or in email. If you are in one of the five non-sales tax states, they’ll probably ask for a copy of your DBA. In other countries, I’m guessing the procedure is the same, just the names of the paperwork may be different. You’ll want contact your local government offices to become aware of any possible differences.

You can find wholesalers by simply googling “wholesale” and whatever you’re looking for. In some cases, “wholesale” won’t quite do it. Instead, you just google the brand name, come up with the manufacturer’s website, contact them, and ask whether they wholesale directly, or through general wholesalers. You’ll find variations in the way they do business. You might also want to sign up for the free newsletter at BicycleRetailer.com. You’ll find many leading wholesalers advertising on the site and in the newsletter.

On one end of the spectrum is West Coast Cycle, which is a general bicycle parts and accessories wholesaler in Carson, California. From them, you can buy Zefal pumps, spokes, headlights, brake pads, handlebar stems, whatever you need. They also supply the CyclePro line of bicycles. Anyone who has a bike shop can buy from West Coast Cycle.

Then there are specialized companies, such as “Specialized.” (Yes, that’s their actual name.) They sell only certain parts or bikes that carry their brand name. Companies like Specialized, Raleigh, KHS, Schwinn and others have what they call protected dealerships. If another bike shop within a certain distance of your store, typically five miles, is carrying the brand already, you can’t carry it.

Schwinn used to be on the far end of the spectrum. In the past, you had to be an exclusive Schwinn dealer. You couldn’t sell Peugeots along with your Schwinns. You had to have company-approved display equipment. Even the cash register had to be Schwinn-approved. There may still be some companies around with such severe restrictions, but they are few and far between.

In my first bike shop, for my first parts and accessories purchase, I had a total of $200. I wanted to have a few of the popular size inner tubes, a few patch kits, one headlight, one taillight, one bar lock, and so on. I had to show the widest possible range of inventory. I always thought dealers had to buy things in dozen-lots or even hundred-lots. It turns out most wholesalers will sell as few items as you want. From some, you can literally buy a single axle nut. The prices for such small quantities are only a fraction higher than in large quantities. For instance, you can buy a single patch kit for 50 cents. If you buy a hundred of them, they are 40 cents. I was also surprised by the size of the markup. I figured on a $20 saddle, I’d make perhaps $4 or $5. But no, the saddle that sells in the store for $20 costs only $10 or $12. Sometimes, the wholesalers will put that saddle on sale for $8.

Of course I’d advise that you, too, start out with small quantities and a large variety. Even if you have a lot of capital to start, you ought to start with small quantities, because you need to learn what sells and what doesn’t.

I heard about a camera store that started with a single Hasselblad – a top-of-the line camera at over $1000. When it sold, the proprietor bought five more. Turns out, he accidentally tied up $5,000 for quite a while, because Hasselblads only sell once every few months. If you play your initial inventory right, you can turn it four or five times a year. This means that the entire value of your inventory will be sold and replaced four or five times. Oh, not every item. Some things will get dusty on the shelves. But others will turn ten or twelve times a year.

In very short order, you’ll learn what to stock in larger quantities. You’ll find that you probably need to keep a hundred 26 x 1.75 inner tubes in stock. On the other hand, if you stock a couple of 26 x 1-3/8″ inner tubes, you may still have them four years later.

Should you use a computerized inventory control system? No. If you do, you’ll be a slave to it. Computerized inventory can be pricey and time consuming for the small bike shop. Later on, when your store is grossing $1 million or more, and when you have employees, computerized inventory makes sense. In the meantime, the best system is want lists. You, and everyone who works in the store should have little notepads available. As soon as anything appears to be in too low a quantity, it needs to be written onto the list. So, if a mechanic uses the only seven-speed trigger shifter, she writes it onto the list, and a replacement is put back in inventory. If the sales person notices that there are only six Kryptonite locks left, they go on a list. You place small orders from the want lists every couple days. Maybe every day at first until you have enough wealth in the store to support a larger, more redundant inventory.

As you order things from the want lists, you cross them out. If an order arrives but something on the order was out of stock, it is written back onto a want list.

You’ll want to have accounts with several wholesalers. You will find that one has a certain popular tire for $3 less than the others. So you buy those tires from that supplier. Another will be the only one who carries seatposts (OK, “seat pillars” if you’re obsessive in bicycle terminology.) in all the diameters you may need, and yet another has all the little Shimano parts that the others don’t carry.

You’d be surprised at how helpful the wholesale reps, and the salespeople in the wholesaler’s office can be, if you’ll ask them. Oh, they probably don’t know much about bike repair, but they can tell you that 26 x 1-3/8 tires don’t sell very often (so you shouldn’t stock very many), and 26 x 1.75 tires are the most common. You might already know this, but no doubt there are places where you can use their guidance. You can do things like tell them to send you $400 worth of the most common handlebar stems, letting them work out the details, so you don’t end up with the weird stuff, and you can fulfill most requests when someone needs a handlebar stem.

With careful management, your store can satisfy 90 percent of your customers’ requests. More important, more than 90 percent of the repairs will be completed in a single session. It is expensive to start a repair, wait for a part to arrive, then resume. Furthermore, the customers don’t like having to wait a few days for parts.

Interestingly, with a fairly small, well-managed inventory, you can fulfill ninety percent of requests. If your inventory is ten times larger, you can still fulfill only perhaps 92 percent of requests.

In time, you’ll find out which wholesalers are best for most of your inventory. Then, every couple of months, you can crack open a catalog or website you don’t usually deal with, and order a bunch of things your store doesn’t normally carry. You’ll be surprised by a few of the items. For instance, you may discover that a certain kind of mountain bike fenders are very popular. You’ll also end up with a lot of odds and ends to fill out your inventory. But, how nice it is when someone comes in for a Campagnolo bearing cone, or a pad for a Mafac brake, and you have it in stock!

Once your shop has a large inventory and plenty of money, you can make even more money by ordering as many sale items from wholesalers as possible. Almost all wholesale suppliers will have weekly, monthly, or holiday ‘specials,’ as well as other reasons to discount some items. Many of the discounted things will be oddball inventory that you can’t sell, but much of it will also be spot-on. You’re looking for sales on the ordinary everyday things that sell all the time, such as brake cables, inner tubes, helmets, and locks. You can constantly shop the sales, stocking up on large lots of anything good that’s on sale. So, if you normally pay $8.00 for 26 x 1.75 tires, and you can get a hundred of them on sale for $5 each, your profit is an additional $300.

My bicycle shop started smaller than what I recommend to others. I started in the autumn in a city that gets significant snowfall. I had six used bikes. After paying the rent and deposit, I had $120 left, which quickly went to utility deposits, paint and wood for signs, and so on. It wasn’t even a real bike shop. Because I had so little, I started it as a general fix-it shop, specializing in bikes. In time it evolved into the premier ‘pro’ shop in the city. But the first few months were tricky. From the beginning I planned to make it a bicycle shop, not a fix-it shop. By the end of November, I had $200 more than necessary to pay the rent and utilities. I placed my first wholesale order of parts and accessories. I sold most of the original $200 order, and got more. By Spring, I was ready to order my first new bicycles. I was so excited!

One of the wholesalers carried a full line of bikes, while most of the others carried only mid- to high-end bikes, so I placed my order with that company. I purchased four mid-level adult bikes in varying frame sizes. I purchased a low-end bike, which can purchased in department stores for less than the wholesale price. And, I purchased one child’s bike, also in competition with department store bikes. Guess what? The four mid-level bikes sold fairly soon. It took months to dump the child’s bike, and the low-end adult bike gathered dust in my store for more than a year, while I sold and reordered bikes all around it. In that first year, 125 new bikes sold.

Knowing what I do now, I would have ordered nothing but mid-level and semi-high-end bikes right from the start. I would never try to compete with department store bikes. In time, I sold very high-end bikes, but like Hasselblads, they sell slowly, and so are not a good investment for a shop just starting out.

I also learned about frame sizes. The most common sizes sell regularly. As you reach toward the limits of very large and very small bikes, they sell less and less often. You might fill your store with eighty percent normal-sized bikes, and only twenty percent, or even fewer, particularly short and tall ones.

One thing I didn’t know is that it is important to stay mainstream. It took me a couple of years to learn this. I put a number of really weird bikes in the store. I had a recumbent. I had a penny-farthing replica (an antique high-wheeler), a bike with very fat tires, and so on. They took forever to sell, and in the meantime, they took up valuable floor space. Later on, these odd ducks became valuable to my store in an unexpected way. The place became a bit like a museum. People brought in people who wanted to see the unusual machines. Then, when these new people needed an ordinary new bike, guess where they bought it? Right! In time, I displayed a 90-speed bike, a 9-foot tall unicycle, an ultimate wheel (a unicycle with no seat or frame), and a PPV (a People Powered Vehicle – pedal-powered car) just to attract attention. It was great free publicity.

Another upside to weird bikes, if you have the money to buy them and the space to display them, is that something unexpected may become popular. I made a frame with polished-steel tubing under clear paint. It was just an experiment, and was a weird-looking frame indeed. Guess what? Everyone wanted one!

One downside to weird bikes worth considering: You are responsible to keep them running. If your customers need a replacement part, you are expected to be able to get that part. So, ideally, buy only oddball bikes for which parts are available, and from manufacturers who you expect to stay in business.

I loved the weird stuff, and I’ll bet you do too. For instance, one day a wholesale rep gave me a prototype all-plastic freewheel that his company was considering carrying. This was in the days when freewheels screwed onto hubs. Every part of this was plastic except for six little gravity and centrifugally loaded steel pawls that engaged the plastic ratchet surface. I was excited, and asked the rep whether I could put it on a bike right away and test it. He was enthusiastic to see the result also, so I put it on a bike and took it for a little test ride. I do mean little. I went approximately six feet (two meters) before the pawls chewed through the plastic ratchet.

The second year I was in business, I sold 625 new bikes, with the help of the wholesalers. It turns out, they’ll offer credit to an established customer. When open credit was offered by one wholesaler, I put $7,000 worth of bikes on the sales floor that I didn’t have to pay for until 90 days later. I was quite worried about making the payment in time, but I did it with room to spare.

Bicycle shops handle test riding in various ways. At first, I would let anyone ride anything if they could leave a parent or a drivers’ license in the store while they were out riding. But one day, a guy left a license, and never came back. He had stolen my bike! After a couple of hours, I looked at the license, and discovered the picture wasn’t even of him. He had probably stolen a license, and used it to steal my bike.

That incident caused me to really think about the test ride policy. I considered everything from not allowing test rides at all, to making no policy change. In the end, I considered test rides important, but I didn’t offer test rides to people who didn’t seem trustworthy, and just held driver’s licenses from those who did. No more bikes were stolen in that way. I did lose three more bikes during the five years of my first bike shop. That’s a reasonable proportion compared to the number of bikes I dealt with. Two just disappeared off the sales floor one day. I think someone just walked out with them when there was no salesperson in the front room.

In another case, I learned about extending store credit. A fellow bought a new bike. I tried to sell him a lock, but he wasn’t interested. A few days later, he came to buy another bike. His first had been stolen. Still, he wouldn’t buy a lock. A month later, this happened again. In retrospect, I should have realized this guy had a screw loose. Anyway, over the course of a year, he bought a total of five bikes. When it came time for the sixth bike, he told me he was short of cash, and could I just give him the bike today, and he’d bring the money on Thursday. Since he was such a good customer. . . I never saw him again.

I don’t want you to think that a bike shop is all about selling new bicycles. In fact, I could have been just about as successful if I didn’t sell any new bikes at all. The bulk of the income came from repairs, accessories, and parts, in that order.

When you sell a spoke, it may cost you five cents, and you might sell it for 25 cents. A great markup, but a small profit due to the handling time involved. When you sell a $20 saddle, you make $10, for only a couple minutes work. When you sell repair labor, the markup is around 200 percent. In other words, your labor cost on a typical repair may be $20, but you sell it for $60.

In my first bike shop, I didn’t pay much attention to the used bike market. Too bad, because my shop could have been even more profitable. A typical used bike costs $30 as a trade-in. You put $40 worth of parts and labor into it, so the total cost is $70. Then you can sell it for $150. In my later bike shops, I bought and sold a large number of used bikes.

New bikes are horses of a different color. A typical new bike costs the store $350, plus $25 for shipping (if you buy a large enough quantity of bikes at once). Then you have to pay a mechanic to assemble and adjust it, unless your business is small enough that you do that yourself. Then, you have to take quite a bit of time in selling it. So, you might have $50 labor tied up in it. And, all you can get when you sell it is $495, so you make $70 for all that investment. Then, you may have to pay for more labor to make adjustments or warranty repairs after the sale. The manufacturer or wholesaler will cover parts, but labor is out of your pocket. So maybe you end up with $50.

New bike sales become profitable when you sell accessories to the new owner. And when, during the following years, the customer brings it in for repairs.

Oh, a bicycle store can be profitable by blasting out hundreds of new bikes. Many have done it that way. But if you are starting out with a small store, you may want to focus on repairs, parts, accessories, and used bikes.

For more profit when you sell a new bike – or a used bike – see what you can sell along with it. You are doing the customer a favor if you recommend a lock, helmet, and such accessories. You are not doing the customer a favor if you go too far with it. You can make the customer aware of accessories, but it is not right to insist or oversell. The same is also true of the bike’s price. Many salespeople push a higher-level bike than the customer really wants. In the long run, that will backfire. I think I surprised many customers when they came looking for a $600 bike, and I showed them $400 bikes, explaining why spending more was not necessary.

As I mentioned earlier, I started my first bike shop in a small city of about 350,000 residents, where the winters were harsh, and there were ten other bicycle stores. One would think the numbers were against me. But my store was immediately successful because, not knowing any better, I focused on bicycle repairs. Over time, my store became one of the larger ones in town, and was eventually considered a ‘pro’ shop, specializing in high-end equipment and customization for racers, tourists, and serious commuters.

To survive my first winter, I took in any kind of general fix-it work I could get. I put cords on lamps, got vacuum cleaners running again, and reglued dining room furniture. In later winters, as my place became a real bike shop, I still felt it was important to supplement my income. I enjoyed cross-country skiing, so I bought twenty pairs of cross-country skis, and started renting and selling them. I bought an initial inventory of twelve Victorinox Swiss Army knives. These took up space in a three foot long glass display case.



The display case with the Swiss army knives

The Swiss Army knives sold very well, especially right before Christmas. In time, I had hundreds in stock, and carried every model the company produced. In my last couple of winters in my first bike shop, I started teaching bicycle repair, wheelbuilding, and then framebuilding. These classes covered my expenses nicely. The framebuilding went especially well because the students not only bought the lessons, they bought the materials, and eventually most of them furnished the bikes with components purchased from my store.

Let’s talk a bit more about the cross-country ski rentals. I started with twenty pair. Figuring the big ski shops in town were too competitive, I didn’t try to sell them. I planned to rent them, hoping to get fifteen pairs out every winter weekend. I did manage to get ten or twelve pairs out most weekends, but to my surprise, people wanted to know whether they could buy the rental skis, poles, bindings and boots, figuring they’d get a better deal on used rental ski sets than on new ones. I charged almost as much as new ski sets would cost and people bought them. So, it turned out I was in the ski sales business. In time, I added and sold more ski inventory, sometimes just letting people think they were used, even though no one had actually rented them. This was in the era when most serious cross-country skiers used waxable skis. The various hardnesses of wax came in different colors, which made the wax kits attractive-looking gifts. I sold quite a few of those wax kits.

Bicycle stores will do other things to survive the winter. Many sell camping gear. That’s not a winter inventory per se, but tends to sell more year-round than bikes.

Neils, a brilliant fellow had a friend a few years ago who was a printer. The printer had a rush order one evening that was to be completed by morning. Unfortunately, he was too drunk to do it. He gave the print shop keys to Neils, Not knowing the first thing about offset presses, ink or anything like that, Neils looked around, put two and two together and by morning, he had the order ready to deliver. Within days after that success, he bought the business from his drunken friend.

Neils was fluent in English plus four Eastern European languages. In fact, his sons, ages five and six at the time, could speak three languages, and the six-year-old was reasonably proficient in writing in English, and Romanian.

Neils got what few orders there were in our city for printing in these other languages, but business wasn’t great. To supplement, he started selling camping gear out of his store. Still, he struggled in business. Not many people wanted to buy camping gear from a print shop, and not many printing customers trusted a camping goods store to do their jobs right. Besides, Neils’ inventory was out of balance. For instance, he had replacement mantles for lanterns that he didn’t stock. Neils was brilliant, but not a nice person. He started refusing all refunds. One time, as I was visiting in the back of his store, someone returned a raft they had rented. Neils went into the back room and stuck a screwdriver in the side of the raft. He then went back out and showed the hole to the customer. He said he couldn’t return their deposit, since they had somehow punctured it. He came back into the back room with a big smirk on his face, and that sickened me, so it was the last time I visited him. Shortly after, as I rode my bike past his shop one morning, I noticed it was totally empty. No more Neils.

Some bike shop owners just take it easy, or go on vacation all winter. I know of one owner who’d run his small store during the warm season, then go down to Florida and work as an employee of a large bicycle store in the winter.

Sales Techniques

Table of Contents

I mentioned that my first store started out with ten competing stores in a small city. How did I survive? There were a few factors, most of which I managed to figure out only because I was lucky:

1. My personal expenses were low. If you are planning to start a retail bike store, one of the things you can work on as you are building up to it is to lower your personal expenses. Can you move to a smaller apartment? Can you avoid car payments? Can you drop some channels off your cable bill? Do you really need a new computer right now?

2. I put myself out as a sincere individual. I listened to my customers. By doing so, they became my friends. They’d do just about anything for me, even recommend my store to all their friends. By listening to my customers, I was able to tailor my service and inventory to their needs. When a fellow came in and told me about a certain brand of bike he thought was special, I ordered two of them. They sold, and I bought more. That particular brand eventually became a staple of my business.

3. I learned some sales techniques. If you have someone who is pondering the purchase of an accessory or component, put one in his hand. Let him handle it. Once you do that, it is as good as sold. Taking it a step further, I bought a triple-beam balance and put it on the sales counter so anyone could weigh parts. They loved this, and often purchased a certain brake, hub, or derailleur because it was lighter than the others. Many of these are people who came in not expecting to buy anything.

Taking the tendency of customers to loiter around that scale one step further, I found a couple bar stools and planted them in front of the sales counter, like what you see at car parts stores. The shop regulars lived on those stools, not unlike the characters in Cheers, the old 1990s TV show. When all the salespeople were busy, they might start selling a bike for us. If someone was considering a certain bike, they’d endorse it, or endorse our service policies. They’d bring their friends in, many of which turned into regular customers. So letting the regulars tie up the space in front of the sales counter turned out to be quite profitable.

4. I picked up an old reel-to-reel tape recorder because it intrigued me. I set it up in the store, and experimented with recording background music. I noticed that if I placed an up-tempo song in the mix about every fifteen minutes, I’d have a rush at the sales counter right after that song played. Sales in general seemed to pick up once I put in full-time background music. I think people are more comfortable when there’s background music to muffle the sounds of life – coughing, shuffling of feet, and so on.

5. My store was laid out in such a way that customers could see the entire repair department from the sales floor. They felt they could trust the mechanics if they could see them at work. Taking this a step further, I filled the shop with important-looking tools, so the customers would be impressed. Actually, that’s not why I did it. I bought those tools because I loved collecting tools, but the tools did impress the customers.



scenes from the repair area

6. The customer was always right. I would never argue with someone about a problem. (Probably because I was too timid.) It was instant refund, always. The percent or two of gross sales this may have cost was well offset by the reputation this built.

7. I would make special deals, accommodate special needs, and talk to individuals as if they mattered – because they did. When someone brought in a bicycle for repair, I’d take a couple of minutes to look it over carefully. I might find a loose headset, or an untrue wheel. I’d recommend additions that made sense, but would not push them into buying more than they wanted. For instance, a customer might bring in a bike for a tune up, which was $29.95 back in those days. I’d notice that the back tire was quite worn, and sell a tire and installation, so now instead of a $30 sale, I had a $50 sale, and a happier customer, because I noticed a problem with the tire that could have caused trouble for him later on.

8. I found that in a competitive environment, people often shop around quite a bit before they’ll commit to buying. They’d come look at my Raleighs and then go to the Schwinn store, then maybe the store selling Fujis. Sometimes they’d come back. Sometimes not. In time, more and more came back. Why? Because my salespeople and I learned to talk with them. When they first came in and expressed interest in a bicycle, a salesperson would generally not lead them to a row of bikes right away. Instead, the salesperson would spend a little time finding out who they were. We would ask about hobbies, family, wherever they wanted to go, conversationally. Sure this took an extra ten minutes, but then when it was time to talk about bicycles, the salesperson was already their friend. We seldom put ourselves across as experts. Oh, we knew the specifications and the reasons you’d want this feature or that, but the salespeople would often wait for the customers to ask specifics, rather then just blurting out information like a waiter telling restaurant customers about the daily specials. If a buyer was misinformed, we didn’t argue. The salespeople didn’t lord over them in any way. If their misinformation was going to cause them trouble, we might find a way to work a correction into the conversation metaphorically, or in a way that would not offend them, or make them feel inexpert. For all we knew, every customer was a respected doctor, lawyer, celebrity, or child prodigy. So who were we to tell them what’s what?

9. I really tried to notice what people want. If there was a lot of interest in cable locks, I made sure to carry a wide variety of cable locks. If two or three people asked for a brand I didn’t carry, I’d try to get it.

10. As I started hiring salespeople, I tried to look for the same qualities in them. They had to do more than know brands and specifications. They had to be personable. Oh sure, some needed a bit of training. For instance, I had seen sales people closing a sale, and then keep on talking about features, as if the customer didn’t already agree to buy the bike. As soon as your customer says yes, start the paperwork. Then see if you can sell some appropriate accessories. I didn’t know this at first, but learned it from one of my first salespeople. I learned a lot from them.

11. With new bike sales, buyer’s remorse is common. When I encountered that, I told them that I completely understand, and hat they could keep the bike for a while, as long as it remains looking fairly new, until they made their final decision. And I let them know that if they didn’t want the bike in the end, I’d refund it entirely, without a problem. Most ended up keeping their bikes. The few that were refunded, I sold as ‘slightly used’ at a small discount, and still came out ahead.

12. I feel that with bicycles, test rides are important. Once the customer has ridden three bikes, s/he will have an opinion, and will know which one is right. I encouraged test rides – for those buyers who I thought were responsible and legitimate. From those customers, I would hold their car keys or driver’s license until they returned. Some stores do not allow test rides, preferring to keep all the bikes absolutely new until sold. I understand both points of view, so I leave that judgement up to you. By the way, if you do allow test rides, it is absolutely essential that all your bikes are properly tuned so the customers will be impressed. Between test rides, I make sure the derailleurs are set to a low gear, so the bike will seem effortless when starting out.

Managing Employees

Table of Contents

In most bike shops, the employees are paid an hourly rate near minimum wage. The sad truth is there are many people who would like to work in bike shops, so they don’t have to be paid much. But, as Armand Hammer pointed out, “When you pay peanuts, you get monkeys.” At first, as my shop grew and I started hiring people, the quality of their work wasn’t great. Even though almost everyone I hired had good references from other bike shops, they weren’t what I was hoping for. People came in late or not at all. Some took overly long lunches. Sometimes bits of inventory or tools disappeared. Some of my salespeople exaggerated or even lied to customers. Some just didn’t care about the customers. The repair people did less than ideal work. Well, not worse than average, but they just weren’t great.

Somehow I discovered a better way. One day, I made an offer to one of my mechanics. For a week, we would add up his labor charges. At the end of the week, if 1/3 of the amount of labor charged to the customers exceeded his hourly wage, he would get paid that amount instead. I don’t remember the exact numbers, but his hourly wage was something like $200 for that week. But, he had done $900 worth of repairs, which magically, was quite a bit more than he would typically turn out in a week. (He usually generated about $500 worth of repair labor.) So I paid him $300!

The other mechanics liked this quite a bit, and as you can imagine, they begged me to do the same for them. So I did. All except for one fellow who ranted and raved that being paid piecework was “un-American” among other choice words. So I fired him.

Guess what happened next? We never missed that guy. The remaining three mechanics easily did the work of four. They each took home more money. Because of a clause I added, their work was of higher quality than ever before. The clause was this: If a repair failed due to workmanship, that mechanic would do it again for free. And, if the customer was present, the mechanic might have to do it while the customer sat on a stool and watched – if the customer was so inclined.

I figured that what was good for the goose was good for the gander, so shortly thereafter, I put all the sales people on commission. They got five percent of new bike sales, and ten percent of all other sales. The ten percent commission included parts, accessories, labor, and used bikes. They, too, made more money, and sales increased. I had to be careful to monitor them at first. They did tend to oversell. In time, being paid more than bicycle personnel anywhere else in town, they took pride in their work, in their customer relations, and felt no need to oversell.

Especially when the next phase hit. It didn’t take long for all the experienced bicycle professionals in town to apply for a job at my place. Instead of the going wage of $8 to $10 per hour (at the time, late 1970s) they could get $15 to $18 hour, if only they could work in my shop. Now, I had my pick of the very best! As my business grew, I could pick and choose the most experienced sales and repair people, some with a clientele that would follow them to the ends of the earth.

In the end, even though I paid my people twice as much, I made more profit from their work.

I didn’t quite know the best approach regarding employee taxes. I figured they were actually independent contractors and treated them as such. I didn’t collect income and Social Security taxes for these former employees who were now contractors.

At one point, one of the mechanics consulted the IRS about how to fill out his tax forms. They mailed me a questionnaire that kind of scared me. After all, no one wants to be in trouble with the IRS. They had about twenty questions. Among them were: Do I set the hours or do the employees get to pick their own hours? Do they own their own tools? Do I tell them what to do? Can they refuse to do a job?

I answered every question truthfully. I sent the letter back to the IRS and waited six worrisome months before they finally replied with one short sentence, “The IRS has decided in your favor.”

Knowing what I do now, I would have continued to withhold taxes and do the proper paperwork for these people anyway, considering them as employees instead of contractors. In fact, in later businesses, that’s exactly what I have done, and all has worked out perfectly.

You may be wondering what’s involved when you get your first employee – or ‘contractor.’ Turns out, it is fairly simple. Contact your insurance agency and let them know you’re going to have employees. They’ll set you up with Workers’ Compensation insurance. You legally need to carry that, probably even with contractors if they work in your store, but it is not very expensive.

You need to do some paperwork to handle withholding taxes. Or not. There are companies that do all the heavy lifting for you, such as ADP (www.adp.com). For around $50 per employee per pay period, they’ll take care of all your employees’ paperwork needs. They’ll keep you informed of what and where to pay, and forward to you the occasional paper that needs a signature. And that’s all there is to having employees!

Many small business owners start by hiring friends and family members. While this can work out well, it is far better to surround yourself with people who know as much or more than you do about bicycles. Finding people to work in a bike shop is easy. You’ll get unsolicited applications every day. Most of the customers who ask whether you have a job opening have no useful experience. If they have worked in other bike shops, that is a good indication that you should record their name and number in case you ever do want to hire anyone. Even as you take their contact info, let them know that the chances are slim that they’ll get hired. People have this amazing optimism about jobs, so if you say something like, “I’ll put your name in the file,” what they hear is, “We’ll get back to you in a week or two, and you have the job almost for sure.”

When you have someone with previous bike shop experience that you might hire, you’ll probably want to conduct an interview. Ideally, everyone who has to work with this person will be present. This way, if there are going to be sparks between a partner or existing employee and the new person, you can know about that before you hire the person. You’ll want to be careful to avoid asking discriminatory questions and you can’t base hiring decisions on sex, religion, skin color, weight, and so on. That’s illegal, and immoral.

There are two things you’re trying to discover during the interview: Whether the person has sufficient technical knowledge, and whether the applicant’s personality is right for the job. You don’t want someone with a grouchy monosyllabic attitude in your sales department. You don’t want a mechanic who doesn’t know which end of a screwdriver to hold. So, you ask technical questions, and have a conversation in which you’re trying to discover something about the true nature of the individual. I once hired a salesperson who said the word “pray” at least six times during the interview. That should have been a clue. I had to let him go because he started trying to convert customers. It was more important to him to talk about religion than to sell bikes. It was more important to me that he sell bikes. We did discuss it, but he refused to change. You can’t discriminate based on someone’s religion, but you are not required to let an over-zealous person poison your business. So, you can’t refuse to hire someone, or fire someone because he’s Catholic and you’re Protestant, or whatever, but if the individual is not properly performing the duty for which he was hired, that’s another story.

Check their references. I can’t emphasize this enough. Remember that they’ll give you their best references. They aren’t going to volunteer names of people who fired them or have a grudge. When you call their former employers, remember that most will try to give glowing reports. If possible, you want to dig past that. Most people do enjoy talking, and employers are no exception. If you can have a friendly conversation with the former employers, you may find interesting surprises. More than once I found that a person who said they quit a job were let go due to performance issues. In one case, I spoke with a former employer who initially gave a glowing report. After ten minutes, I discovered that the person came in drunk after lunch more than once. The person was let go when in a messed-up state, he sexually harrassed a customer.

Before you hire anyone, make sure they understand that it is initially a trial. That they may get to work for a day or a week or two, then be let go if they aren’t a good match for your shop. I once went through twenty people who tried out for a job as a mechanic. Each had previous bike shop experience. None were really, truly gifted as mechanics – and that was what I wanted. This was before I started paying on commission. After that, I had a whole list of remarkably qualified applicants.

Finally, before you hire a new person, make sure they understand all the important details up front. They should know exactly what is expected of them, what hours they are expected to work, whether they can come in late occasionally, whether they need to dress a certain way, and the exact way they’ll be paid. You’ll find it helpful to write up a list of requirements in advance, and when a person is hired, have that person read and sign a copy of the list.

I prefer a flexible management style. If I have a problem with someone, I first try to understand their motivation for what they are doing. Sometimes I can accommodate whatever they are doing, once I understand that it makes sense. For instance, I had a mechanic that spent what I thought was a ridiculous amount of time cleaning bikes at the end of tune-ups. But, it seemed important to him. I wanted higher productivity, but I realized he was good, and since he was being paid on a commission basis, it didn’t really cost me anything. It also made the customers happier. If I do not want to accommodate a certain behavior, I try to address the behavior as well as the motivation in a calm, conversational way. Sometimes, rather than taking a drastic measure, such as firing the person, I see if there is a way to make things better. More than once I moved a person from a mechanic’s position to a sales position, and if qualified, visa-versa.

If you do need to let someone go, try to give them some warning, and a chance to correct their behavior. If it still doesn’t work out, then tell them the exact reason you’re letting them go. And just as you can’t hire someone based on their age, sex, color, religion, etc, you can’t fire them for discriminatory reasons.

With practice, and empathy, you can strike a balance between being the boss, and being one of the workforce. In a toxic workplace, there is a ‘us against them’ attitude. On the other hand, if you are one of the guys, friends with your employees, all sorts of magic happens. Your employees will work late without being asked when the shop is busy. They’ll go out of their way to treat your customers right. They’ll bring in their own tools to help support the shop. In our shop, we had developed a tradition of all riding our bikes to a pizza place on Friday evenings. In time, owners and employees from some of the other bike shops in town joined us on our Friday pizza outings. A great time was had by all.

On the other hand, I may have gone a bit far with the ‘just one of the guys’ attitude. It’s not entirely believable, since I did own the shop after all. There must have been some envy, so I tried to counteract it by being an especially ‘nice’ guy. In retrospect, I think it is best to maintain a bit of an ‘alpha’ personality, be the boss, so you get things done the way you want them done, while at the same time, being empathetic and friendly.

You could think of all the other bike shops in town as competitors. Or you could think of them as friends, maybe with a “we’re all in this together” attitude. Once again, magic can happen. On dozens of occasions, we’d need a part to complete a repair, call another shop, and borrow it. And they’d borrow parts from our inventory. We shared ideas. We sold and traded equipment back and forth. When I decided to sell my shop, guess who bought it? Right, one of my ‘competitors.’



Advertising and Publicity


Table of Contents

It is easy to buy advertising. There are many salespeople who would love to have you advertise in their newspaper, in their phonebook, their website, or on their radio or TV station. If it doesn’t bring the results you expected, they’ll just tell you that you didn’t buy enough advertising yet. They’ll tell you people need to hear the same message over and over. But you do need to buy some advertising, right?

Did I say, “buy” advertising? I meant “get free publicity.” Just about any form of advertising that a small bike shop can afford will be entirely ineffective. Yellow pages ads are the worst. You end up paying a lot of money per month to the phone company, or a phonebook publisher, and get little effect. People don’t use phone books any more. They use the Internet. So you’ll want a website. It can be a simple one-page affair. All people want is your contact information. You can do some search engine optimization (SEO) tricks, discussed in the next chapter, to get people to your webpage. If you’re in a city with a dozen other similar bicycle stores, they’ll all have their own websites, and without search engine optimization, you might be 13th on the list when people google your town name and “bicycles.”

So, when it comes to paid advertising, almost nothing works for a small business. Good free publicity, on the other hand, can change things overnight.

You may be thinking I’m talking about sending press releases to the local newspapers, radio, and TV stations announcing that you have a new business or have added something to your business. That can have a small effect. Much greater is to do something newsworthy, meaning, something positively eccentric.

I mentioned this to one bike shop owner, and he said, “Oh, like give away free water bottles printed with the store logo?” He didn’t get it. Better is to sponsor something unique. Sponsoring a compelling but unusual free entertainment event, or offering a free workshop is a start. Getting clients to wear your custom printed T-Shirts is a step in the right direction. Then, they will hopefully tell friends to do business with you. That will have a small effect, but it is not newsworthy, and it really isn’t free, because you have to pay for the T-shirts. I’m talking about something newsworthy. Let me give you an example.

Customers of an old bookstore in San Francisco used to complain from time to time because is was sort of dark in there, especially in the deeper shelves. That gave the owner an idea. He held a one-time special sale. All books were 1/2-off. But, the sale ran from midnight to one in the morning. And, he turned all the lights out. At the door, all the customers were handed flashlights. That not only made the news, but it is still talked about today, twenty years later. After reading the story, thousands of new customers visited the store, mostly because they were curious about how dark it really was, that people were complaining.

At another bookstore, some college students created an art project. Their idea was to rearrange all the books, not by subject and title, but by color. Shopping there during that time may have been tedious, but all sorts of people came by to see it, and no doubt many of them came away with books they would never have noticed normally. (After two weeks, the same college students put all the books back in subject and alphabetical order.)

So, what kind of positive eccentricity can you think of for your bike business?

Your author had a one-acre yard behind his second store that could be seen from the street. In time, old junk bikes started collecting there. They were for parts. As a last resort, if a new item wasn’t in stock, if a customer just couldn’t afford a new derailleur, or if we wanted to grab some material to build something, there was that pile of junk bikes. As you probably know, bike frames tend to accumulate. In time you sell the wheels, the shifters, the pedals, but the frames tend to be the last things to go. Soon, my pile of stripped frames had grown quite large. I was thinking I ought to build a fence around the pile, so I built it out of these old frames. It kind of looked like a sculpture. People driving by saw the fence, and immediately knew we had a bike shop there, even if they didn’t see the sign. So, the crazy fence was acting like free publicity. People used to start telling their friends, “. . . you know, the place with the bicycle fence.”

That fence played a bigger role that was unexpected. Upon noticing the fence as they drove by, people inevitably also noticed that there was a pile of old bikes behind the fence. They started stopping into the store and asking whether we wanted more old bikes. They were giving them away. I instructed my sales people to say, ‘yes’ – that we’ll recycle the bikes to the best of our ability. After a while, we had a quarter-acre covered five feet deep in old used bikes. Now, we never had to buy low-end and mid-range used bikes. We had plenty. All we needed to do was fix them up and sell them. Very profitable. And of course as people saw more and more used bikes accumulating around the store, more people came in looking for used bikes. Many bought used bikes, and many others bought new bikes from my store. And, we had a sideline – we had a parts junkyard. Many customers loved this. Imagine, someone would donate a bike for our pile. We’d sell a derailleur for $8, a rear wheel for $20, a fork for $15, a saddle for $10, and by gosh, it was very profitable indeed! The junkyard business could have supported the bike store by itself. And never once, did I advertise the availability of used parts.

As I mentioned, having at least a basic website is important for most businesses. Fortunately, a one-page site is sufficient for most, and easy to create. You can do positive eccentricity on a website as well. We’ll talk a lot more about websites in the next chapter.

A guy who’s business was repairing Apple computers uploaded a little video to YouTube and linked to his website, that showed him dropping a PC and a Mac computer off a six-story building. Both crashed to the sidewalk. The Windows computer was smashed to bits, but with the aid of trick photography, the Mac had only a couple of scratches. That was a fun video. I don’t think anyone has done a ‘drop video’ of bicycles yet.

In one of my bike shops, I had an area of wall above a double-wide door that I covered in broken bicycle parts. This included a horribly bent wheel with spokes sticking out every which way, a Zefal pump that had been run over by a car, some mangled derailleurs, and things of that nature. Many people talked about that wall. It was part of what made the bike shop what it was.

One day Sam, a fellow in a wheelchair and his hired helper came in to buy some more material from our junkyard, These guys had been in several times before. Sam had cerebral palsy or something like that, so his body was really quite twisted. He could stand up for brief periods of time, but his stance was odd and he was wobbly. Sam’s hobby was building human-powered machines. The helper would do the actual construction work, while Sam did the inventing. His helper saw the badly bent wheel on the wall, pointed to it and said, “Sam, that wheel is as bent up as you are!” We all laughed.

Then there’s the old fashioned way to bring customers – business cards and flyers. Putting business cards in everyone’s hands who comes your way can build a business slowly, but surely. Of course, giving them something more interesting such as a keyring tape measure, or an interesting hologram, will be more effective. A computer store can give out business cards that have a chart of the common [Ctrl] (or [Command] on Mac) keyboard shortcuts.
You know:

[Ctrl] + [A] = Select All

[Ctrl] + [C] = Copy

[Ctrl] + [F] = Find

[Ctrl] + [V] = Paste

[Ctrl] + [X] = Cut

[Ctrl] + [Z] = Undo

So what kind of bicycling information could you put on the back of your business cards? (Hint: A gearing chart is too common, and not interesting enough.)

For a short while, I experimented with what I called micro-books. These were the size of business cards, but had a dozen pages. They contained a wealth of fun bicycle trivia. The front and back of the little books had my shop name, address, phone number and a map. I gave up the idea because it took too long to organize the pages and staple them together. Customers used to pull the books out of their pockets years after I gave them away, just to show me they had kept them all that time.

These days, it is a simple matter to print business cards on your own computer printer. You might look into using photo paper. It is almost as thick as card stock, but the glossy surface looks like a million bucks. Especially if you incorporate a nice graphic or photo. Avoid the tendency to put too many words on your cards.

You might also consider using cards as coupons. You can give out cards that are a dollar off on helmets, or 10% off tires, etc. Put an expiration date on them, so you don’t have to deal with discounts years after you’ve moved on to something else.

Putting flyers on all the local bulletin boards can surprise you. You’ll get more business with no cost. Bulletin boards at laundromats work well, because patrons have to spend idle time waiting for the wash. You might think that laundromats attract low-end clientele – those who can’t afford their own appliances. This is true, but they also attract a higher-end clientele. These would be customers who have to wash blankets bigger than their home washer can handle, or people who are waiting for their home machine to be repaired, or – I hate to say it – people who will wash greasy rags in a public machine because they don’t want to mess up their own machine. All these may be bicycle customers.

Bulletin boards at natural food stores work especially well. I’m not quite sure why. Bulletin boards at diners, quick-change oil places, and elsewhere can work well, too. The best kind of flyer is one that makes only a few quick points, because too much text is hard to read. The best flyers have little pull-off tabs at the bottom with your shop’s contact info, especially your phone number. You might want to have full-page and half-page flyers, since many bulletin boards are too full to accommodate full pages. When space is very limited, you can put several business cards fanned out under a thumb tack, indicating to people it is OK to take a card. For this use, the cards ought to have large text that’s easy to read at a distance. There’s a color called “Solar Yellow,” that’s very bright and sometimes used for cards and flyers. It is a bit loud for sure, but in a jumble of white flyers, it gets noticed.

You may find a big drawing of a bicycle is helpful. It will draw people in from thirty feet (10 meters) away if they’re interested in bikes at all.

Sometimes people will tear off a tab on each of the flyers they put up. This is to make the general public think there’s interest in what the flyer advertises. Chances are, for your bike shop, that won’t be necessary. Flyers work particularly well if you include a special offer. Like $10 off a tune-up when someone brings in a pull-off tab. Or a free safety inspection. Or 10% off accessories.

Going a step further, you might replace your flyers from time to time. One might advertise half-price headlights until the end of September. The October flyer might offer a “Fall Tune-up Special,” and November might be 10% percent off all cycling clothing. Each flyer should look different than the previous ones, so people recognize that something new is being offered.

You might think flyers on local bulletin boards are not professional enough to represent your shop. More likely, they will attract many new customers, and once people see your shop itself, they will have no doubt about your professionalism.

Are you concerned about the cost of printer ink? If you’re printing color cards or flyers in the hundreds or thousands, you’ll use up ink quickly. And we all know how much that costs! But you don’t have to pay $30 per cartridge. For most printers, you can buy replacement ink cartridges on eBay for remarkably low cost. I mean really low. For my Brother MFC-255CW printer, I get cartridges for under $4, postage included. Now that that’s taken care of, what about wear and tear on your printer? My Brother printer is years old, and it has spit out 20,000 pages, yet it is still working like new. I think most printers are like that these days. The one thing many printers can’t stand is not being used. If you ignore your printer too long, the ink dries up in it.



Websites That Work


Table of Contents

Just about any bicycle store will benefit from a website. In fact, some businesses can be entirely websites. I won’t go into much detail about deriving profit directly from the Internet, because this is supposed to be a book about “bike shops.” However, it is possible for your bike shop to derive a nice additional income from online activities, such as selling on eBay. In any case, your store will be more successful if you do a few simple Internet things.

You don’t have to be an HTML master programmer to create effective websites. In fact, you don’t have to know anything at all about HTML, Javascript, or any of that.

There are now several places where you can create your own website by simply cutting and pasting or entering text, dropping in a picture or two, and click an OK button. Blogger.com and Tumblr.com come to mind. However, if you want to take advantage of all the ideas in this book, you might want to learn some basic HTML, or just hire someone to help you with the optimization parts.

Whenever you hire someone to help you with a website, make sure to maintain all access. You don’t want the site on some guy’s server. You want it on a big national company’s server such as Godaddy.com. Because, what if your webmaster goes broke, leaves town, or has an argument with his wife and shuts down his server?

It is very important to get all passwords associated with the site. You don’t want to have to hire the same webmaster over and over again for each little change that you could eventually make yourself, or pay someone else to make for you. What if your webmaster disappears and you don’t have a password? I can’t tell you how many times, I, as a business coach, have had to tell business owners (kindly), “I told you not to trust that webmaster.”

The most important thing websites need is visitors. There are three main ways to get visitors.

1. Buy advertising. That mostly doesn’t work. Or more specifically, with enough money you can buy visitors, but that would be fewer visitors than you would need just to pay for the advertising. I think it was Pets.com that was famous for that. Right before the big tech crash of 2000, this company had a popular website. It turned out that the company had spent millions of investors’ dollars on advertising, and their revenue was far below the expenditures.

There is one form of advertising that can work nicely for bike shops. That’s Google AdWords. You can sign up for an AdWords account for free. Once there, you bid on keywords. They should actually be called “key phrases” because most keywords are more than one word. Let’s say your keyword is “bicycle shops Cincinnati.” You may find that your closest competitor has bid $2.17 per click on that same keyword. You can bid $2.18. Then, your ad will show up at more websites, and closer to the top of the paid side of Google search results than your competitors. So, your ad is then shown on random websites. Well, not random. Targeted. This means that if someone has a website that has something to do with bicycles in Cincinnati, your ad – and your competitors’ ads – will show up on that site. Or if no one has a site about bicycles in Cincinnati, then you’ll show up on websites about bicycles, and other sites about Cincinnati, Ohio. When someone clicks your ad to go to your website, Google takes $2.18 from your account. You can adjust maximums, and all sorts of other settings so that if it runs wild, you won’t go broke. You can do things like change your keyword to “Bicycles Cincinnati Ohio” (adding “Ohio”), which may not cost anywhere near $2.18 per click. Fewer people enter “Bicycles Cincinnati Ohio” than “Bicycles Cincinnati” when they are looking for a bike shop in Cincinnati, but those who do will see your ad right at the top.

AdWords works particularly well because it is well-targeted. Google’s automated software does a good job of making sure your ad shows up on only the most relevant sites, and with only the most relevant search results.

Think about the results: How much does your average customer spend per year? You’ll find each regular customer is worth hundreds or maybe thousands of dollars, right? So what’s $2.18 compared to that? Not everyone who clicks through to your website will actually turn into a regular customer, but the ads are well-targeted, so a good many will. Especially if your website is well-designed, which we’ll talk about in a minute.

2. SEO – Search Engine Optimization. You can do some simple things to make sure your website shows up near the top of search results in Google, Yahoo, Bing, and other search engines. We’ll talk mostly about Google, because it is the elephant in the room. My guess is that at least seventy percent of all searches are done through Google, with the remaining thirty percent handled by Bing, Yahoo and a hundred lesser search engines. Then too, if you make a website that works well with Google, it will work pretty much the same with the other search engines.

Google ‘ranks’ pages based on how closely parts of the page match the keyword people are searching for, and on how many other websites link to a page. The first aspect, matching elements of the page to the keyword is easy. The second is more work and takes longer to achieve, but that’s OK, since it is probably less important.

By the way, don’t let anyone tell you they have a magic formula to get top ranking. There are hundreds of companies out there willing to take your money for search engine optimization that is all smoke and mirrors. What you are going to read in the next few paragraphs is the heart and soul of search engine optimization. Oh, there are some complicated schemes that might bring a marginal increase in results, but these companies that promise the sky do not deliver. That’s guaranteed.

Because your business is a bicycle shop that serves a local clientele, and because the term “bicycle” is so common on the Internet, you’ll want to target your website to your local community. What are the chances that someone googling some aspect of bicycling is in your area? It’s one in a million. On the other hand, what are the chances that someone who is in your area is googling something about bicycles? That happens all the time.

So, to attract people who are searching for “bicycle shops Cincinnati,” for instance, all you need to do is put that phrase in the page title – between the title tags, and in the meta
name=”description” tags, in the head section of HTML of your web page, in a H1 tag near the top of the page, and in the body of the text in a couple of places.

It can be helpful to have a page filename that also matches the keyword, such as www.mywebsite.com/bicycleshopscincinnati.htm. Google says that as of October 2012, having an exact match page name is no longer significant. However, I have noticed that if you have an exact match domain name, such as www.bicyclescincinnati.com, Google seems to index your page – include it in their search engine listings – within a day or two, rather than within two to three weeks.

So how many people are looking for “bicycle shops Cincinnati?” It would be important to know that, wouldn’t it?

As of now, 140 people per month are entering that keyword. How do I know? I used the Google AdWords Keyword Planner. It’s free when you sign up at adwords.google.com. Signing up for AdWords is also free. It only costs money if you place a bid on a keyword. You can enter any potential keyword, and it will show you how many people are searching for that. It will also tell you how much AdWords bidders are paying for the keyword and some other interesting information. It will then offer a list of related keywords, in case you find there are already too many websites optimized for your keyword.

Once you are on the AdWords home page, select the “Tools and Analysis” tab, and then “Keyword Planner.” Once that’s in front of you, select “Search for new keyword and ad group ideas.” Enter a keyword in the “Enter Your Product or Service” field, the scroll down and click the “Get Ideas” button.

You’ll see an interesting list, but that’s not the list you’re looking for. Click the “Keyword Ideas” tab. Now you see information for your specific keyword – data about the people who have entered exactly your keyword into Google, and below that, you’ll see a long list of suggested keywords based on what you entered.

So, the next step is to see how many people have already optimized websites for your keyword. Good news, well fairly good: Not many people have optimized sites for “Bicycle Shops Cincinnati.” When you simply enter that keyword in the Google search engine, several sites come up, some which have the term in their titles, descriptions or

tags, but none seem to be doing it in all four.

As you may know, you can see the source code of any web page by right clicking (or [Ctrl] and click on a Mac) and selecting “View Page Source” in FireFox, or from within a context-sensitive menu on other browsers.

So if your bike shop is in Cincinnati, you could be the top page in Google search results, and most of 140 people a month who are actually looking for bicycles would click through to your website. Gosh, that could bring you 40 or 50 new customers every month! If you treat those customers well, they’ll spend on average perhaps $400 per year in your shop, raising your gross sales by $16,000 per year each and every month! In real life it may not be as efficient as that, but it will certainly be significant.

If many websites have already used your keyword, there are still some things you can do. You can change the keyword a little bit, checking the Google AdWords Keyword Tool and actual search results, until you get something that has enough people looking, and isn’t highly optimized. Maybe “Bicycle Shops Covington” (a small city just a few miles away), or “Bicycle Repair Cincinnati,” or “Bicycling Cincinnati.”

You can optimize for more than one keyword. Or, you can make a whole bunch of similar web pages each focused on one area, or put several area names in your tags. For instance, “Bicycle Shops Cincinnati, Covington, Florence, Ohio.”

Next on the list is backlinks. This thickens the plot a bit. If a thousand websites have added links to your page, Google puts you higher in search results than someone who may actually have better on-page SEO, but fewer backlinks.

This is another place the charlatans go crazy. They tell you they have all sorts of ways to get instant, automatic backlinks, for only $39.95 per month. . .

Don’t fall for any of that snake oil. Much of what they do, when they do anything at all, is pure spam, and in the end, may weaken your position with Google. You don’t need to pay money for backlinks, and you don’t need to do spammy things to get them. Google’s automated software has little tolerance for spam, and tends to penalize websites that have been linked with any disreputable practices.

The charlatans also tell you that backlinks are essential. However, with a well-selected keyword you can usually ignore backlinks and still end up with lots of hits. Nevertheless, we’ll talk about the best ways to get backlinks in the next chapter.

Many SEO experts are saying that you want to make sure your website stays natural. If you weave too many keywords into the text of your website, so you no longer have sensible English sentences, your site will be less effective in two ways. First, the search engines will not rank you as high as when all your on-page SEO is reasonable and your backlinks are organic – meaning derived from actual people deciding to link your site from their blogs, websites, and forum posts. And then if your customers can’t make sense of your website, or if it seems too spammy, they are less likely to actually visit your store.

Besides asking webmasters to add a link – many will, without cost, just because you asked, you can trade links, as long as you don’t mind adding a reciprocal links list to your site. Better yet, you can post in newsgroups, forums and discussions, especially on social networking sites. You can answer questions, or ask questions. At the end of every single post, you are allowed a tag line in almost all forums. Your tag line can contain a few words about what your site is, plus an actual link to your site.

Not only will these be noticed by Google as backlinks, but some real people will actually click through, bringing up your visitor count organically. The trick to not spamming is simple: Contribute legitimately to the discussions in which you participate. You can answer questions, postulate theories, bring up analogies. If you don’t know much about a subject, it is completely OK to ask questions, as long as you are not selling ‘expert service’ on your site on the very subject of which you’re asking questions.

What’s wrong with spam? Besides the fact that you’re interrupting people, and diluting the value of bonafide discussions, Google and the other search engines have become quite smart about spam.

Another little trick that can be helpful when you’re not at the top of the Google search results is to become a verified author through Google+. You need to join Google+, a social network, but it is free. Then using Google itself, you can look up “verified author Google+” where you will find the details. Basically, you have to certify that you are the author or owner of the content on your website, then add a little bit of Javascript code to the page. When Google sees this, they put your picture next to the brief description in the search results. Google also ads some other data for you. But displaying your picture is the main thing. People are more likely to click through when they see who you are. Even if you are not particularly photogenic, they’ll click through because on some subconscious level, they feel they know you now that they’ve seen you. Some people will show their place of business rather than a picture of themselves as the proprietors. It turns out showing your actual face is more valuable in causing people to click through.

Once you’ve built or updated your website, you can let Google know it’s there. This is especially important if no other websites link to it yet. Without any backlinks, Google has no way to know you’re out there, because Google finds websites by investigating links from other websites, crawling the entire Internet every two weeks or so, link by link. However, you can expedite the process through “Fetch as Google” a simple, free and easy-to-use part of Google Webmaster Tools.

If all goes well, you can have a dozen visitors within 24 hours of building a new website.

Valuable Content

Once you’ve got at least a handful of visitors coming to your site, you can do some more things to make sure it works.

If you can provide some useful content or positive eccentricity, then people will tell people who will tell people. Your site can go viral. Take a look at hamsterdance.com. Especially take a look at the “Hamster Classics” and then “Interactive Dance.” This one dance page is similar to how the whole site originally looked.

It seems a computer science student made a one-page website as a thesis project. All it did was show lines of cartooney dancing hamsters with some background music. That was in the late 1990s, when it didn’t take much of a website to excite people. There was something about the cuteness of hamsterdance.com that caused everyone to email everyone else, and it went viral almost instantly. Millions of visitors came. The creator saw the potential, and quickly added more pages and advertising to the site.

It will take more than dancing hamsters to impress people these days, but if you can do something sufficiently amusing, or informative, you win the game!

Another example is Crayola.com. There, you’ll find quite a few interesting and interactive things for children. People come to the site because there’s something useful there.

Yet another example is a website where you can buy an antenna for specialized electronics. The site has many charts with just the information that radio designers need, so of course this site is where the radio people go to when it is time to order antennae.

Your author has made several such sites. One of the more interesting sites is www.worlds-worst-website.com. Its sole purpose is to cause people to tell people, who will tell people, and so on. If I recall correctly, I have never done any SEO with the Worlds Worst Website. This is because the site has functionality and eccentricity.

Then of course we have BikeWebSite.com. Built by your author, with only a total of eight hours spent posting in forums, it received over 385,000 visitors before I sold it six months later.

Once you’ve got a site that gets visitors, you want to direct their time there. It would be a shame to build a large visitor count, then have all your visitors become confused and leave the site without satisfaction. Or more to the point, you want them to do something that satisfies you, also, like come to your bike shop. Think of your webpage, or your website, as a funnel. The top is wide. Lots of people spill into your site. The funnel narrows, directing people downward. Or more specifically, it holds their interest. Someone told me the average web page visitor stays one and a half seconds, unless something catches their interest in that time. The funnel eventually directs them all through the spout. The spout is the action step. What do you want people to do? Click the “Buy Now” button? Give you a phone call? Come to your store? Set up the page to have this effect.

You should have a compelling title, or short bit of text in the upper left corner, since that is where most people look first. The purpose of this top left item is not to sell something, but merely to cause them to feel that your site is worth focusing on. To have them become invested in your site enough to stay on the page and read more, perhaps click through to other pages on your site. Finally, at the bottom of every place they might go within your site, you have your action step – the button to click, the phone number to call, a map showing how to get to your store – whatever you want them to do. During this process, you may also want to convince them that your site is so excellent they should tell all their friends.

One thing you almost never want is links away from your site. In this book, I can tell you about crayola.com, because you already bought the book. I don’t need to sell you anything. But if I did, I would not risk losing you to Crayola. Besides, I think I’ve got your interest by now. Hopefully, I have you well on your way to starting your own bicycle store!



Social Networking


Table of Contents

There’s a super-effective trick with the social networking sites that can bring you hundreds of new customers, but which is oddly left out of most social networking discussions. I’ll tell you about it after a brief introduction and ‘how-to’ in case you are new to the whole phenomenon.

The Big Three

The big three social networking sites are Facebook, Twitter and Google+. Some may argue that MySpace is one of the big ones also, but I think it was more than it is now. There are hundreds of others. And then, there are sites that you may not think of social networking sites, but have interactive features and can be used for social networking. These include Pinterest, Tumblr, YouTube, and even eBay.

For this discussion, we’ll just focus on the big three. There’d be little sense in putting much effort into ‘lesser’ sites when the same effort on one or more of the big three will yield ten times the results.

Twitter

Let’s start with Twitter. The main concept is that anyone can enter messages at any time of up to 140 characters in length. You can also attach pictures, links and videos. But the core of Twitter is these little messages, called tweets. What in much of the Internet world might be considered spam is perfectly fine on Twitter. In other words, sharing trivia about whatever interests you, as often as you like, is perfectly fine.

Amateurs use Twitter to tell you they hate today’s homework, Jane wore the wrong dress, the boss said something insane, Frank just took a picture of his malamute – you get the idea.

Most communication of this type happens among people who have decided to follow each other. For instance, if you start following Barack Obama, you’ll get his tweets about the things that interest him – health care, politics, international relations, and so on. When he posts a tweet, only those who have opted to follow him see his messages. In his case, millions of people are following. But unless you are the President of the United States, not that many people will follow you.

Here comes a big trick with Twitter: You can incorporate hashtags into your tweets. A hashtag is a word or phrase that starts with a number sign. Phrases consisting of more than one word are compounded, like this: #MileyCirus. When you put a hashtag in your tweet, anyone who has elected to see all messages about that subject will see your message. Now, rather than the three people who are following you, suddenly thousands may see your message.

If you pick something too common, no one will be following because the number of tweets are simply overwhelming. For instance, if you add a #bicycle hashtag, chances are few people will react because there may be thousands of tweets about bikes every day. On the other hand if you pick something too specialized, no one will care. Something like #BicyclingCovingtonKentucky – just isn’t going to bring results. But if you use a hashtag that some people are going to be following, such as #Cincinnati, magic can happen.

First, they’ll get your message, and perhaps go to your website to learn more about what you’re doing. Then, if your tweet is compelling, they may start following you, so you can speak to them even in ways you can’t incorporate effective hashtags. Finally, they may tell their friends about you or your website, or at least your tweets, in their own tweets to their friends (called retweeting).

Facebook

Can you do the same thing in Facebook? You bet. Hashtags work almost the exact same way. You can even link Twitter and FaceBook together (and even several other social networking sites), so that when you post a tweet on Twitter, it also shows up in your Facebook activity.

Facebook has a concept called Groups. There are thousands of groups. These are just what you’d think: People with a similar interest ‘subscribe’ to a group, where the photos, messages, videos, and links are all about the topic of the group. For instance, there are more than 4,000 in a group about juggling. There, you’ll find posts about jugglers who have appeared on television, pictures of people juggling three, four, five and more objects, how-to information, and more.

You’ll find many general bicycling groups as well as specialized aspects of bicycling, such as classic bike collecting or road racing. You may even find groups about bicycling in your community.

The magic of Facebook groups is that you can subscribe to a group and post messages that will be seen by everyone in the group. Unlike Twitter, you don’t have to depend on people searching for hashtag terms, and you don’t have to already have made friends with hundreds of people. Just post in an appropriate group, and you can have dozens of targeted visitors to your website within hours.

Just like the rest of the world, you don’t want to spam groups. You can’t subscribe to a group about orchids, and post about inexpensive mountain bikes. Well, actually you can, but you’ll probably be banned from the group. Besides, it is just plain not nice. Spam weakens a group. Have you ever seen a group that has lost the spam war? It’s disappointing. You might want to read about a vegetarian diet, but every post pushing weight-loss products. As a group is dying, you see nine out of ten spam posts, and have to sort through them to find a tiny bit of good stuff.

But you can post on-topic material, and leverage your presence in the group. You might find a group about the Cincinnati Bengals. There, you can say whatever you want about other football teams. The Bengals fans in the group will love you for it. Then, at the bottom of your post, you can have a signature line, complete with a link to your website. In fact, you don’t even need a signature line. You can add links to posts – as long as they aren’t wildly off-topic. You don’t even have to do that. Many people will wonder who you are, check your profile, the links you have posted there, and so on.

It is better to stay nearly on-topic, even with your signature and links, if you can. You can post in running, kayaking, and other outdoor sports groups in which you can participate in a valid way, but it is better to stay closer to home, subject-wise. If you post in a bicycle racing group, you’ll get bicycle enthusiasts coming to your bicycling website. Many of them will visit because they are interested in everything ‘bicycles.’ If you post a bicycling link in a mountaineering website, even if your text is a valid on-topic post about mountaineering, few people will actually click the link.

Let’s say you’ve found the pay dirt. Perhaps you found a group that is specifically about bicycling in your city. You can’t just post over and over again that you’re selling bikes. What you do instead is offer interesting bicycle trivia, post technical information, state that your first bike was a Schwinn Continnental, and so on. You can answer questions that you’re qualified to answer. You can ask questions if you’re not an expert. You can ask controversial questions which will sometimes keep an active discussion going for weeks. With all this stuff on your wall, you can become somewhat of an authority on the subject. By simply participating in a natural and appropriate way, you’ll bring many visitors to your website who end up visiting your bicycle store.

As of 2010, Facebook added a concept called “Like.” You can paste “Like” or “Share” buttons onto your web pages. When people click a “Like,” a message appears on their Facebook wall with a link to your site. These can be valuable backlinks, especially if someone with a large following clicks your “Like” button. Many other social networking sites have a similar concept, but you’ll find that Facebook Like buttons are the most effective by far.

Google+

Finally, we have Google+ (www.plus.google.com). Anyone can sign up. You may be already signed up and not know it. Google has recently taken the initiative to link all their divisions together. If you are using Gmail, or YouTube, Google knows who you are, and you can just start using Google+.

Google+ has hashtags and groups. Their term for groups is “communities.” Communities work pretty much the same as Facebook groups, but are not yet as popular. For every Facebook group, a Google+ community will have perhaps a third as many people. The reason to pay attention to Google+ is that it is up-and-coming. Some experts are predicting that Facebook is a fad, that five years from now, it will be a ‘thing of the past.’ Google+ may suffer the same fate – that all social networking will evolve into something else. But your author’s opinion is that in the next few years, Google+ will grow considerably. They certainly have a powerful organization behind them.

Google Groups

Google also has something called “Groups” but it is not the same as Facebook groups. This is an extension of Usenet newsgroups.

In the early days of the Internet, before the WorldWide Web took off, there was another division called Usenet, also known as Usenet newsgroups. Usenet still exists, but most modern Internet users are unaware of it. There are more than 100,000 newsgroups, covering a huge variety of topics. A newsgroup is a list of messages by individuals. You can click titles to read messages, answer messages, and post new messages. It is a lot like email, except every message is addressed to the world at large – anyone who wants to subscribe to the groups. Just like email, messages could have files attached. Most of the time the files were pictures. In the past, you had to download special software, and put up with funky free access, or pay money for a subscription in a ‘newsreader’ service to gain access. Now, Google has made it much easier. Anyone with a Google account can go to groups.google.com and participate. The messages show up in your web browser – no special software required. There are two major differences: Google doesn’t support attached files. With Google, it’s just about text messages. And, there are even more groups, in addition to the Usenet groups.

So, if you want to publicize something, you find appropriate groups, post messages, and add a tag line at the bottom of every post. Or, in some groups, you can blatantly advertise. Of course the ones you can advertise in directly don’t have much valuable content. They are often called “spam traps,” I experimented with some, such as alt.test.test, and alt.announce, misc.forsale, and sure enough, there are a number of people just idling around there who will read pretty much anything interesting, and click through to see what you have.

Let me give you a concrete example of how you can use Google Groups. Actually, you can use this same technique in Facebook groups, on Twitter, and even on YouTube.

I wanted to publicize an idea about bike safety. I found a group called ba.bicycling. After reading a few messages, I figured out that the group is about bicycling in the San Francisco Bay Area, a place I have lived. There is a popular bicycling road that goes out to the rural edge of west Marin County called Sir Francis Drake Boulevard. It is dangerous because it has no shoulders, blind curves, and trees casting mottled sun and shade, making visibility difficult at times, especially since it heads due west into the sunset in the evenings. So I said so. I created a brief post stating that Sir Francis Drake was dangerous, and exactly why. At the bottom was a link to my bicycle safety website. You’ve gotta remember, I just told a bunch of bicycle lovers that the place they like to ride is dangerous. That was very controversial, just as I thought it might be, and so I was able to keep the discussion alive for a week. On the first day, 400 people came to my website. By the time the discussion died out, 1,000 visitors clicked through. And, these were exceedingly targeted customers – the very bicycle advocates I wanted to come to my site. My site was actually of international interest, but I happened across a Bay Area newsgroup, and remembered the problem on Sir Francis Drake, and so was able to make my little splash.

You may notice that I keep mentioning putting links to your website in your messages. Why not just the address and the phone number of your bike shop? The reason is that almost no one will drop what they are doing and go visit your bike shop. By the time they are out and around town, they will have forgotten all about the mention of your store in something they saw online. But if you link to your site, they may go there, spend enough time to be convinced they have to visit your store, and eventually they’ll show up. Furthermore, if they find something interesting or valuable about your site, they’ll bookmark your site, come back from time to time, and they may tell their friends and associates. As if that wasn’t enough reason, you may find that you can earn money directly from your website. Maybe people don’t need to come to your store for some things. You can do a mail order business from your site. Now, if you try to sell the same things everyone else is selling online, forget it – there’s too much competition. But what if you have invented a little something that bicyclists would like, and you are the only source? Right, you can sell it from your site. If your site is interesting enough, perhaps a virtual museum of some aspect of bicycling, perhaps it contains some interesting bicyclist biographies, or an interactive cyclists’ forum on a specific topic, you can add Google AdSense, or affiliate links to whatever products you like. You don’t even need a bike shop. Just earn a living from you website. But that’s way off-topic for this book, isn’t it?

But you can certainly augment the profit from your bike shop. In some cases, that can make the difference between success of a retail store and well, not success. For instance, I once had a bookstore in a time when bookstores were already flailing due to Amazon, Alibris, ABE and other online booksellers. Kindle and other ebooks were making inroads, and many people do seem to prefer videos and interactive computer activities to reading books. My bookstore started out like most little bookstores, selling books to people who came into the store. I learned to list some of my books on Amazon.com. In less than a year, my store did more business out of the back room selling books on Amazon, than it did out of the store itself.

For you, that may or may not be acceptable. Some people just love retail, and that’s all they’d want to do. Others are willing to make money any way it comes to them. Yet others love any opportunity to avoid the public, and would like to make money somehow involving bicycles online, without a bicycle store!

Letting eBay Spread Your Message

I’ve listed some things for sale on eBay, and noticed that hundreds of tire-kickers may come by before anyone actually buys a thing. How can you leverage this? You can post things that are not designed to sell. If they do sell, that’s just frosting on the cake. The reason for posting is to get a couple hundred viewers, who will then click through to your website and eventually visit your store.

Now, eBay frowns on sellling things outside of eBay through an eBay listing. So you can’t do that. But you can mention a non-competing website in your listing, and you can direct people to your ‘about me’ pages on eBay.

You may find this chapter interesting. It is all about buying and selling on eBay as it relates to the bicycle business.

YouTube

YouTube is another great website that you can use in a social networking sort of way. People love videos, especially ones that explain something or eccentric videos. Within your video, you can include links to any site you want. YouTube even gives you ways to monetize your videos directly. Let’s say you have done something weird enough that it goes viral, like this one:


Danny McCaskill

For those of you who are reading this on a device that can display web pages, you can click the picture to see the video. Otherwise, you can go to this link to see it on another device: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z19zFlPah-o

The bicyclist is Danny MacAskill. As of today, this video has been viewed more than 34 million times.

If that were your video, you could have YouTube supply advertising within and around the video. Their advertising is linked to Google AdSense, which is no surprise, since Google owns YouTube. AdSense places context-sensitive ads automatically. Ads will be displayed that are related to the subject matter, (probably “bicycle” and “BMX” and “Danny McAskill”), and also to what the viewers have shown an interest in. For instance, Google must be hip to the fact that I have been interested in Dremel and Foredom tools lately, because these are among the ads I see. Or, you could embed your own links into the video. So, if you own a bicycle store in Miami, then you might make an interesting and unique video about bicycling in Miami. People who search for “Miami” or “Bicycling” or “Bicycling in Florida” or something like that will want to take a look at your video. You’ll see the visitor count at your website build, and ultimately, welcome hundreds of new visitors to your bike shop.

Interestingly, the quality of a video is not nearly as important as the content, or the subject it addresses. Many successful YouTube videos were shot with cellphones, and barely edited, if at all. But what all the successful ones have in common is that they do something people want to see. They are informative or eccentric.

If your video is like most, and gets three visitors, one of which is your mother, you may need to do some adjusting, so it’s title and description contain keywords that people are actually looking for, or so it is sufficiently interesting or eccentric to go viral. For instance, this video of Steve Moore, known as “The Crazy Drummer,” shown below, had very few visitors. It just sat on YouTube for two years being generally ignored. Then the title was changed to “This Drummer Is At The Wrong Gig,” and suddenly, 23 million people had to see it.

Steve Moore
Crazy Drummer

And there are the other websites. You can post photos or artwork on DeviantArt.com, Pintarest.com, PhotoBucket.com, you can make interactive blogs on Tumblr.com or Blogger.com.

Memes

In these websites, or any social networking or similar websites, memes can be effective.

A meme (pronounced ‘meem’) is a unit of information that carries an idea from person to person almost in the way that genes carry physical traits from generation to generation. Shortened from the Greek mimeme, which means “imitated thing,” the term was coined by Richard Dawkins, an evolutionary biologist, in 1976. Modern memes can be a written phrase, an image, an animation or sound clip.

Bumper stickers might be typical memes. A common one from years ago had a picture of a golfer and said, “Don’t drink and drive. Use a 7-iron.” Hopefully, this meme made driving a little safer. Bumper stickers promoting your bicycle store can be somewhat effective. You’ll have customers who are almost like groupies. If you were to give them bumper stickers, they’d proudly put them on their cars, and on the toptubes of their bikes.

But, it’s easier to create memes these days. You can just upload a little something to Tumblr, Twitter, Google+, you name it. And if your meme is successful, everyone will share it with their friends and associates, and soon, your meme will be seen by millions. A typical image meme would have a photo or drawing, and a bit of text. There are no standards – yet. Your meme can be any size, any of the standard Internet formats – .jpg, .bmp, .gif, or .png), and of course it can contain anything you want. All you do is make your meme, including a link to your website, upload it somewhere, set back, and watch the business roll in. At least that’s the idea.



Your author’s attempt at a cycling meme

As with so much of this Internet-based publicity, it will be more effective to create memes of interest to your community, than to the world of bicycling in general. That’s because everyone in your community can come to your bike shop. But to the whole world of bicycling, very few live near enough to your store.

It would be pretty hard to make a text-only meme. The closest I came is this: “If all the toilet paper used in America was on one giant roll, we’d be unrolling it at 7,600 miles per hour, roughly ten times the speed of sound.” This could be uploaded to some trivia websites, or into various groups on Facebook, along with a link to whatever you’d want to link.

The problem is that text memes will tend to get separated from their links when people spread them around. So, a better solution is to embed the text and link in a picture, so it is the picture that gets passed around, not just a line of text. Besides, the picture may enhance the concept of the text.

You can also make video memes, with or without sound. They have the advantage that they more completely involve the viewers. The downsides are that they take a bit more effort to produce, they don’t run consistently in all environments, and people have to sit and watch them before they get the entire message. In this information-rich society, you’ve gotta remember that the attention span is said to be one-and-a-half seconds. If your animated meme doesn’t catch people in that amount of time, it isn’t going to be effective.


Craigslist


Table of Contents

I wanted to tell you about a couple of Craigslist tricks that can be important to your bicycle shop, especially if you buy and sell secondhand bikes. If you only sell new bikes, you’ll find the same ideas work nearly as well. You can also use this information to sell parts and accessories.

First, let’s talk about a couple of tricks for selling things on Craigslist.

When you list a bike for sale on Craigslist, it scrolls down the list as other people add the bikes and related items they have for sale. In a busy community in a busy category, such as Chicago or Seattle, your ad can scroll out of sight within a few hours.

So, here’s what you do: Every couple of hours, add a different bike. You can put up an ad for a BMX bike at 1pm. Then at 3pm, you can put up an ad for a tandem. Then at 5pm, a mountain bike, and so on. Each one of these ads carries a link to your website, saying something like, “many more bikes available at mywebsite.com.” You might even have thumbnails for some your other bikes at the bottom of each ad. This is not spamming, because every ad is for something different.

As you may know, with Craigslist, you are welcome to ‘renew’ an ad every 48 hours. This means that your ad will reappear at the top of the list. So, after you’ve built up a sufficient number of ads, you can start renewing them, one at a time, every couple of hours, so you always have something near the top of the list.

The other trick, which I already alluded to above, is that you can have a website that has a larger list of your inventory. Every one of your Craigslist ads can link to your website. It seems to work well to have a vertical table on your website, with thumbnail images of each bike on the left, descriptions to the right, and prices to the far right. I did this for a short while when I was building a business to help some relatives. We kept an inventory of about 18 used bicycles and each was pictured on our website until sold.

I have to admit we didn’t stay up to date with posting on Craigslist. I usually only managed between one and three ads per day, and skipped some days altogether. This was because our bottleneck in the used bicycle business was getting bikes, not selling them. Unlike many other product lines, all except high-end bicycles are too big to buy profitably on eBay – due to the shipping cost, and you can’t just buy used bikes from wholesalers, so we had to depend on a local market. And there too, I have to admit, we could have done things to purchase more bikes locally, but I had other business interests at the time and the idea was to start something simple that could be maintained after I moved on. Still, we sold twenty bikes per week with an average profit of $75 to $100. So this could work the same way for your business. After doing it for three months, I moved on to other pursuits, but during that time, strictly from Craigslist exposure, our bike inventory website had received over 20,000 unique visitors.

When an item sells, it is appropriate to delete it from Craigslist as soon as you can, but I think it is better to leave the listing on your website for a day or two, marked “Sold,” leaving the price visible. When people see that your business is active, an unconscious impulse causes them to want to buy something ‘before it’s too late.’ It also keeps tire-kickers coming back. They want to watch the activity, and eventually when they need an item, or have a friend that does, where do you suppose they’ll look?

You can use Craigslist to sell new merchandise also. The public is a bit more finicky about spamming, if you do something like list Raleigh after Raleigh after Raleigh on Craigslist. Better to list a saddle, a taillight, a lock, a tire, along with just an occasional bike, and each item links to your website. Even better, the items you list can be on sale. Like, “Today only, Genuine Kryptonite Lock, $32.95, regularly $42.95.” You’ll still make a little bit of money if you bought your locks well, but once the lock buyers come into your shop, they may buy other things at full markup. Furthermore, if you treat them well, they may become regular, dedicated customers, worth hundreds or even thousands of dollars per year.

The impact of such listings grows with time. Several months later when Fred, who doesn’t need a bike, hears that Jenessa wants a bike, he’ll remember the ‘bikes wanted’ ad on Craigslist, and direct Jenessa to your linked bikes-for-sale website.

And of course, on your website with your list of items for sale, you can mention that you are also a buyer.

One of the best ways I could have increased our purchasing of bicycles at the time would have been to keep an ad active in the “Items Wanted” section of Craigslist telling people that we buy used and broken bicycles. This would have the added advantage that our ‘wanted’ posting would also link to our website, so people who see that we want bikes, will also see we have bikes, in case they are upgrading, or looking for a bike for any reason.

Unfortunately, the only category on Craigslist for buying is “Items Wanted.”
Whereas you could post multiple similar ads such as “Cash paid for bicycles,” “I buy name brand bikes,” and “I want your quality used bikes,” in Items Wanted, this verges on spam, in fact it pretty much is spam, in the “Items Wanted” category. Not only does spamming make a mess out of a good category, and is unethical, and will probably get you a bad name, but Craigslist users will probably get in the habit of flagging and deleting all your ads. You might be able to expand in the items wanted category if you are careful. You could run an ad that you are buying mountain bikes on Monday, an ad that you are buying broken bikes on Tuesday, and an ad that you are buying road bikes on Wednesday, but I think you’ll find this is too risky.

If you’re offering a service such as teaching bike repair, detailing or repairing bikes, you’ll discover the same problem. There is only one category on Craigslist for “Services Offered.” Everyone is going to be posting there from rug cleaning services to computer repair. An ad there is seldom seen.

A better way to let people you’re buying things on Craigslist, or offering a service is to sell things.

Now that you’ve read this book, you have a good idea about how to buy and sell things at a profit. I’m going to suggest you dabble a bit in selling items, even if that is not your primary business. Now, you can put ads in the bicycling section of Craigslist for your bikes or parts and accessories, doing the tricks stated above. But your objective may not be to sell the things, although that could be a good income on the side. Your ads are there mostly to let people know that you’re buying, or present the links to your website where you sell the lessons and repair services that you offer. If you don’t really want to mess around with buying and selling (but who wouldn’t?), you can keep your prices too high. The point is that people looking for used items are often the same people who want to sell their junk, or want lessons or repairs. This is where they’ll be, in Items for Sale, not Items Wanted or Services Offered.

You might be surprised to discover that the for sale ads which happen to carry a message that you’re also a buyer or are offering a service are far more effective than the single ad you can legitimately run in the Services Offered or Items Wanted category.

How can you tell? You can go to a website such as Vendio.com which offers free hit counters. You can past a counter into the text of your ad and that way you’ll know how many people are looking. You can use a Hidden counter style, if you don’t want the general public to see how many hits you’re getting. Many items offered by Vendio are free including hit counters. Since Vendio specializes in ecommerce solutions on eBay, Amazon and other such sites, it takes a bit of looking to find the type of counters you can put on general web pages. Vendio calls this category “Web Counters,” and the place to create new counters is “Manage Web Counters.”

Finally, for building awareness through Craigslist, you’ll notice that there are forums at the left side of the home page. Yes, another social networking opportunity. You can participate in those forums. You can teach what you know. You can answer questions. You can ask questions about what you don’t know. But at the bottom of every posting, you can have a low-key link to your website. Keep in mind that some of the forums are national, so you’ll want to notice that before you post a link for local service or large items for sale.

You can also leverage Craigslist as a buyer. People who are moving out of town, don’t want to pack and ship things, and who want immediate cash will sell things for much less then they would otherwise be worth online, or if they had all the time in the world to attract the right buyers. They can’t get the full value for these things, because the market is limited to the local community. So of course you can come along, swoop these things up, and sell them for a profit. Sweetening the deal, many of these bikes offered on Craigslist are not in ideal condition. The sellers know this, but so do you. So, you might discover a mountain bike that you can sell for $500, once you replace the rear wheel. The seller is happy to get $75 for a bike that was once nice, but now has a broken wheel.


Leveraging eBay

Table of Contents

Imagine having a retail store with unlimited space, where you don’t have to actually greet customers, it’s open 24 hours a day even though you have no salespeople, has almost no overhead costs, and has not hundreds, but millions of customers!

That would be eBay. More than 150,000 people are earning their livings entirely on eBay, and you can be one of them. In fact, if you have a bicycle store, your opportunities to add eBay into your profit mix can be rather amazing. The most common way to use eBay is to sell things that might come through your store that would be difficult to sell to a local clientele. For instance, an old Simplex plastic derailleur is something that will not be asked for very often. Probably never. So if you put on in your inventory, it will gather dust for a very long time. If you’d rather sell it, put it on eBay, where it will be seen by an international clientele, not just the people in your local community. Someone out there collects plastic derailleurs. Maybe there are two or more such collectors, and they’ll get it a bidding war for your derailleur, driving the price up much higher than you might expect.

eBay is one of the easiest businesses to set up, and can start bringing you money within just days. It is possible to start an eBay account, list your first-ever item, and have it sell 10 minutes later.

Setting up an eBay account is as easy. You enter your name and contact info, make a couple of choices, and you’re all set. You’ll also want to set up a PayPal account, which is equally easy, and also free. PayPal is a division of eBay that takes care of collecting money, so you don’t have to deal with credit card numbers or anything like that.

You can start your eBay business with a single bicycle component. For an example, let’s say you have a Sturmey-Archer AW 3-speed hub.

You might first want to find out whether your hub is worth anything. On the top of most eBay pages is a search field. You can type in a description of your hub. Maybe something like “Sturmey-Archer AW” You will see a list of any such hubs currently being sold on eBay.

This list is interesting, but not very helpful. It shows only what’s currently being offered. Some items are being sold as fixed price, but you don’t know whether they will actually sell. Others are being sold through auction, and you don’t know what value they’ll rise to when finally sold. So, scroll down the column on the left where you can narrow down the search results. Click “More Refinements,” then “Show Only” and finally “Completed Listings.” That’s more like it. Now, you have a list of all items that closed during the past 30 days.

Items that didn’t sell have their prices shown in red. The sellers may have ended the item early, or let the time expire without a sale.

Items that have their prices in green did sell. So you can see how much people have actually paid for your hub. You can click any of the items, see the pictures and read the description so you can better understand competing conditions. For instance, you might find that four of the hubs sold for only $12, while two others sold for $50. Upon reading the descriptions, you see that the four $12 hubs were without axle nuts and indicator chains (the linkage to the shift cable). You might see one that sold for $250. What’s up with that? Click through, and you might discover that it was a rare version with an aluminum alloy hub shell. And look at that! You didn’t notice it before, but yours also has an aluminum shell!

Now it is time to take some pictures. eBay requires that you supply at least one picture, and allows for up to twelve pictures at no cost. You’ll want to take your pictures in such a way that they make your hub as appealing as possible. You might want to set the contrast up just a little tiny bit. Make sure the camera is held still, and the focus is good and sharp. Think about the background. It should be non-distracting, and of a contrasting color.

I have found that including your hand in pictures seems to slightly enhance sales. I don’t know if something that’s flesh colored automatically attracts people’s attention, or if it makes an item seem more real, or perhaps it makes people feel as if it is their hand holding the item.

Keep in mind that the first picture you upload will be used as a little thumbnail. You want your hub to be obviously a Sturmey-Archer three-speed hub at first glance in the thumbnail. Or sometimes, it is better to make it questionable. It is possible to create thumbnails that spark curiosity. People will want click in so they can figure out what they’re seeing.

Then you create the listing. First you select the right category. Most of the time, the right category is within the Sporting Goods | Cycling section. Other possibilities include the “Weird Stuff” section under “Everything Else.” This would only be if you do have a weird item for sale. People look in that category who don’t know they’re going to end up buying a bicycle item.

For the item title, describe your item in appealing terms, but don’t forget to use the keywords someone who wants this hub will actually be entering.

Click the various options as you create the listing to set it up the way you want. Be honest and straightforward throughout.

These options include:

Condition: New, used, etc.

Description: If it is collectible, state why. If it has special features such as signed by a celebrity, make sure to include that information, even if it is in the pictures.

If there are any flaws, you must mention them. You cannot omit something like a cracked spoke hole. If you try to sell it without mentioning such flaws, you will not be an eBay seller for long. On the other hand, honest mistakes can be made, and as long as you don’t do it excessively often, all will be OK.

Size: For some bicycling items, you can select a size. Whether or not you have a field in which to enter a size, put it in the description also. You don’t want buyers to forget that they have to take size into consideration. However, there are also many professional buyers. They don’t care so much about size, because they’re just going to sell it to whomever it fits.

Some items have other important specifications, such as number of spoke holes. For instance, 40-hole Sturmey-Archer hubs were very common, but 40-hole rims are not common. If your Sturmey-Archer hub has 36 holes, it will be far more desirable. On the other hand, if you fail to mention it is a 40-hole hub, your buyer may be disappointed, or may even want a refund.

Auction or Buy-It-Now: An auction listing can run for one, three, seven, or ten days. You get to pick an opening price. For instance, you may decide that there’s no way you’d accept less than $30 for your hub. So that’s your opening price. As the auction progresses, people will hopefully bid higher and higher. There is no limit. I once started an item at $50, figuring I’d be happy if at least one person would bid and give me $50. It sold a week later at $1,200. If you’re lucky, at least two people will want your hub, they’ll get into a bidding war, and the winner will pay way more than you think is sane!

You can also set a secret reserve price. You can start your hub at 99 cents, with a $30 reserve. This way, you can see what people are willing to pay. If no one pays $30, you get to keep it, yet you can see what they were willing to bid. Maybe the bidding stopped at $25, for example. Most savvy eBay sellers don’t use reserve pricing.

For ordinary non-collectible things, Buy-It-Now, also known as “Fixed Price,” is probably a better option. You set a price, and your hub remains available until someone is willing to pay your price. Many people don’t like the auction game. They come to eBay to get something, and they want it as soon as possible, and it would drive them crazy to have to wait until an auction closes to find out whether they won or not. Buy-It-Now generally closes a bit higher than auctions on non-collectibles. Buy-It-Now runs thirty days, and can be set to automatically renew every thirty days until the item is sold. It is not uncommon for a merchant to list an item for a fairly high price, and then wait eight months until it sells.

Return Policy: You can decide what happens if an item doesn’t work out. Will you accept a return? Will you pay return shipping cost? If so, you may find that ten or fifteen percent of what you sell comes back. On the other hand, the individual buyers are happy to pay much more when they know that they can return things if necessary. With bicycle clothing and buyers who want things for themselves (as opposed to professional buyers and sellers), ending up with the right size is essential. For them, a return policy can be very important.

Shipping: You get to decide whether you’ll ship an item for free, or whether the buyer has to pay a shipping charge to you. Many sellers offer free shipping, thinking that will make their items more attractive. Others charge the exact amount the shipping will cost them. I charge a bit more to cover the cost of packing materials (when I don’t use the free envelopes and boxes provided by the Post Office), and to cover my time in packing the item and applying postage. I feel that whereas free shipping is an attractive offer, my prices feel lower, because people don’t really think very much about the shipping cost when they’re considering an item.

You can ship by any carrier you like. You may prefer UPS, FedEx, US Mail (USPS), or another. I like US Mail because most of my items are fairly small and light, so the costs are smaller. Working with the US Postal Service seems a bit easier to me than the other services. Out of thousands of packages shipped, only a a handful have been lost in the mail. More specifically, I’ve probably shipped 20,000 items to customers in the US, and only around six of them were lost or damaged.

eBay has a fairly new service called Global Shipping. Before that, if you chose to sell to buyers outside the USA, you had to fill out customs paperwork on each item. You also had to pay for shipping insurance, or risk that some items would be lost in the mail. I used US Mail exclusively for my overseas shipments, and I’m going to guess that ten percent of the packages I shipped were lost or very delayed. Dealing with the insurance was tedious, so I generally didn’t bother.

With Global Shipping, I send the packages to a central processing location in Kentucky. They take care of the customs forms, and guarantee delivery. If a package is lost or delayed, I don’t hear about it. eBay takes care of it with the customer for me. There are only two small difficulties: eBay Global Shipping doesn’t service all countries. Occasionally someone will write from Russia or one of those countries asking if I’ll ship an item by other means. I always decline. It just isn’t worth the trouble for me or the customer. The other problem is that eBay Global Shipping determines the price the customer has to pay. I only charge an amount sufficient to send it to Kentucky, just as if I was shipping to any US customer. But, the shipping price the customer pays is more – enough to cover whatever it is eBay has to do to get the package to them. I don’t get to see what they pay, because I’m only seeing eBay from the US site. When I have asked customers about the shipping prices they are charged, they seem to vary greatly. Sometimes reasonable, sometimes remarkably high. One customer told me it was something like $22 for a two-ounce package.

When you list an item, there is a small listing fee. Depending on a few factors it can range from five to thirty cents. You can also add options such as subtitle, or larger pictures, so the listing fee will be over one dollar, but I don’t recommend any of these options. They make more money for eBay, but don’t generally help your item make more money.

When an item sells, there is also a closing fee. This too, is a variable amount, but it averages around eight percent. Finally, PayPal has a fee of around three percent. I like to ballpark my figuring by saying all the fees add up to twenty percent. It is a bit less, but this factors in mistakes and return expenses. So, if something sells for $100, you actually get about $80 after costs.

You’ll find shipping is easy, because eBay includes a free part of their website called Shipping Manager. You put your item in a box or envelope, click Shipping Manager, choose your carrier UPS, Fed Ex, or US Mail, enter the weight of your item, a couple of other choices, and print a shipping label with the address already filled out on an ordinary printer using ordinary paper. Later, you can get a fancy label printer, if you wish. The shipping cost is automatically deducted from your PayPal account. Shipping with eBay Shipping Manager is slightly less expensive than taking this to the Post Office and paying there.

eBay has a feedback system in which a buyer can rate the transaction. They can give you a positive, neutral, or negative vote. In almost all cases, they’ll give you a positive one. In order to get a neutral or negative rating, you have to misrepresent your item, ship it quite late, and communicate badly with your customer. If you have made a mistake, such as listing the size incorrectly, but communicate with your buyer and do your best to make things right (offer an exchange or refund), then you won’t get negative feedback. Oh, there is the occasional crackpot who is mad at the world and issues negative feedback for no good reason, but that is rare, and eBay has some mechanisms in place to keep that to a minimum.

You can sell things if you have no feedback. Many people will trust a brand new seller with low-value items. If you have something that is selling for a lot of money, lack of feedback can cause some people not to bid. However, most people understand that eBay offers so much buyer protection that even if you turned out to be a horrible seller, they’d be reimbursed by eBay.

As you start selling things on eBay, you will build more and more feedback, and that enhances your profit slightly. If you want to accelerate the feedback process, you can buy a number of inexpensive things on eBay, since feedback is offered on the buying side of transactions also. However, sophisticated buyers can tell the difference between feedback as a buyer, and feedback as a seller. You might rummage around and find a number of inexpensive things to sell on eBay to generate feedback quickly, before you start offering high-end items.

I have discovered that there is a market for many common bicycle parts on eBay. It might even be possible to buy a low-end bike at Walmart, take it apart, and sell all of its pieces for a profit, although I’m sure there are easier ways to make money.

One way is to advertise through your store or on Craigslist that you’ll buy broken bicycles. Many can be had for only a few dollars. The sale of a single derailleur or handlebar stem can bring more than the entire cost of the bike. If you can find collectible bikes from the 1970s or earlier, you’ll find the parts are quite valuable.

You’ll find wheels are problematic on eBay. Unless a wheel is quite valuable, the shipping cost is so high that you’re better off selling the hub, and perhaps the rim, spokes, and tire separately. You can send a rim through plain old US Mail by simply attaching a flat piece of cardboard to hold the mailing label. No packaging is required. That is, unless it is a particularly valuable rim. Then you might want to protect it in cardboard. As with any kind of shipping, you want to balance the cost of secure packaging against tho value of the items being shipped. There’d be little sense in putting a $10 rim in a custom-fitted box that costs you two dollars and adds a pound to the weight. The worst case scenario is that you’d have to refund the $10 if the rim is damaged in shipping. On the other hand, a rare wooden sew-up rim ought to be double-boxed, with an inch of padding all around.

You can sell entire bikes on eBay, but there is the added difficulty of packing them for shipping. If you have never done that, you’ll be amazed at how much time it takes. Since the cost of shipping bikes is high, you’ll be restricted to high-end bikes where the shipping is a smaller fraction of the entire cost.

eBay can also be a source. If you’re repairing a bike that requires a rare part your wholesalers do not carry, check eBay. Sometimes, you can find whole bikes that are a good deal, even with the shipping cost. Be careful to check the shipping terms with whole bikes. A large number of people list their bikes for sale with “Local Pickup Only.” This means that the seller will not assist in getting the bike to you. If you’re in Los Angeles, and you buy a bike with “Local Pickup Only” that’s also in Los Angeles, no problem. You just go pick it up. If you are in L.A. and buy a Local Pickup Only bike in Boston, you’ve got a problem.

If you can invent something that bicyclists would want, and no one else sells something similar, you can potentially sell hundreds of them per day on eBay.


The Guy Who Did Everything Wrong


Table of Contents

As you’ve read elsewhere, my first business coaching client owned a bicycle shop, back in
1979, before the days of the Internet. His business had put him $140,000 in debt. I won’t say he really did everything wrong, but he made many of the mistakes that people tend to make in the bicycle business. This is an entirely true story of what was needed to get him back on track. Of course every situation is different, but you may see some things here that you can apply to your own business.

Jason (not his real name) had seven employees. The business could run
well with four. If there is an alternative, it is always best to avoid
firing people, so after we talked, he called around and found positions for them
in other bike shops.

The employees who remained could have felt that they were being given
more work without more pay. So, they were switched from hourly pay to
commission. The salespeople were given ten percent of gross sales, and the
mechanics were given thirty-three percent of the labor charges. This was less of a
percentage than they were making before on the hourly basis. In other words,
mechanics had been costing fifty to sixty percent of the labor income, and sales
people had cost up to twenty percent of gross sales. Still, they ended up with
bigger paychecks at the end of each week. In fact, they became the
highest paid bicycle personnel in the city. Interestingly, with the
higher pay – that they truly earned themselves, they took more pride in
their positions, and in their work. There was only a bit of training
necessary to make sure they understood the consequences of working too
fast, or over-selling customers.

Part of the decision as to who was to be transferred to other bike
shops, and which employees stayed, was based on their reaction to
the change from hourly to commission. Those who understood and figured
they could make more money stayed, and those who only wanted hourly pay
left. (If you’ve ever read Atlas Shrugged or seen the movie, you might see a situation reminiscent of the Twentieth Century Motor Company here.) This change in structure really worked out to suit everyone.

Jason had an inventory that was quite out of balance. So, learning of
an upcoming bike swap 60 miles away, they rented a truck and shlepped all the misfit and
overstock items and a bunch of borrowed tables to the swap meet, and
sold it at or even below cost, bringing in $12,000. We took that
$12,000 and purchased inventory that was just right, the kind that
turns several times a year. Jason had to learn not to buy everything in
lots of a dozen or more just to save a small percentage. On items he
sold infrequently, he started purchasing ones and twos from wholesalers
that would sell on that basis. Before long, almost everyone who came to
the store to buy something got what they wanted. Repairs were no longer
put on hold waiting for parts.

All generic advertising was canceled except for the main phone book ad,
which was reduced in size. Carefully designed, smaller ads were placed
that carried specifics. For instance a tune-up special (with coupon)
for $19.95 (the typical price was $29.95 in that era). When a bike
came in for a tune up, the sales people learned to look for other
things that would pump up the sale. If the customer was agreeable,
accessories would be shown, new tires discussed, and so on. The
mechanics loved the tune-up special because they became routine and
only took about fifteen to twenty minutes each, complete with accessory
installations, which, of course, brought additional commissions.


The somewhat toxic atmosphere on the sales floor changed almost
overnight. Like many such stores, the sales people acted like the
customers were an inconvenience who didn’t know anything and really
ought to get their education elsewhere. Once the sales people were
switched to commission, they somehow became the sweetest people. It
didn’t take long for the reputation on the street to change so that
people dragged their friends and relatives to this bike shop, not
any of the others in town.

We found some other product lines that Jason liked so he’d have
something to sell in the winter months. These were board games,
Swiss army knives, new and used books about bicycling, and bicycle repair
classes (six people per class, six weeks, two hours per week, $120 tuition,
in 1979 money).

There were plenty of smaller changes also. Jason had to discover that
it is OK to guess at a price when a price tag was missing. Before the
change, I once saw a sales person approach him while the customer
waited to find out the price of a child’s bike. Fifteen minutes later Jason
came out of the office clutching an invoice and announcing that the
bike was $69. The customer had long since left. Now, he just takes a
guess. It might be $59, or maybe $79, but he wins the sale, saves his
valuable time for more important tasks, and enjoys his business more.

And that was in 1979. The bike shop still exists and it’s doing fine.


Summary


Table of Contents

There are many reasons for starting a bicycle shop, including a profit that can exceed what you can earn as an employee. Unless you are wealthy, it is best to start out small, very small, offering a bicycle-related product or service that you can do out of your car, home, or perhaps a little place like a flea market. Let your micro-business grow until it is flourishing, then slowly evolve it until you are in a good position to rent a store, and start a real, glass-front retail bicycle business. Partnerships make a lot of sense if you don’t have something you need such as time, experience or money. But partnerships can be tricky, so should be considered carefully. Never spend more than you take in. Free publicity is better than paying for advertising. Treat your customers well and listen to their needs.

Have fun and prosper! – Jeff

Posted on Leave a comment

25 Ways To Make Money With Photography

25 Ways To Make Money With Photography

25 Unique Ways To Make Money With Photography

Table of Contents

Start Here

1. Freelance Sports Photographer

2. Consignment Sales

3. Create Postcards

4. With a Special Prop

5. Tourists in Action

6. Photoshop – Freelance

7. Photoshop – On Request

8. Day in the Life

9. Website Photographer

10. Puzzle Pictures

11. Museum

12. Stock Photography

13. Portraiture

14. eBay

15. Buy and Sell Photo Equipment

16. Wedding Photography

17. Real Estate Photographer

18, News and Magazine Freelance

19. Nightclubs and Beaches

20. Arial Photography

21. Construction Site Photography

22. Resume Photography

23. Rolling Studio

24. Lecturer

25. Novelty Photos

26. Pre-Filled Digital Photo Frames

27. Smartphone Printing

28. Equipment Rental

29. Teach Photography

30. Living Testimonials

Expansion

The Final Bit

Start Here

Photography offers many excellent ways to make money. You get to be your own boss, your business can end up paying you more than an employee ever gets, and you can set up the business the way you want.

It has been documented that seventy percent of Americans – and, I imagine, many other’s across the globe – hate their work. Well, you don’t have to hate your job anymore. You can easily build your own business that’s truly enjoyable.

As the expression goes, ‘don’t quit your day job.’ Practice patience – it is your best ally. Let your simple little photography business build over time, and you’ll be absolutely amazed at where you can end up. These are not get-rich-quick schemes. They are get-rich-slow schemes.

This book will give you all the information you need to start any of a wide variety of photographic businesses safely and with little investment.


I inherited my interest from my father. When he was a high schooler in Ottumwa, Iowa, he had an expensive hobby. I’ll bet you know what it was: Photography. It was much more expensive then than now. Back in the days of large-format chemical photography, he had to buy film, darkroom chemicals and photographic paper. These days, all you need is a more ordinary kind of paper and printer ink. Taking pictures was more of a challenge then too. His camera was a Speed Graphic, a used, but top-of-the line camera. It is the kind Jimmy Olsen used in the old Superman series. It weighed around five pounds. In order to take a single picture, he had to determine the amount of light and the sensitivity of the film, focus carefully, set the shutter speed and diaphragm opening, cock the shutter, insert a film holder, pull out the dark slide, push the button to actually take the picture, reinsert the dark slide, and finally remove the film holder. The film holder held two sheets of film – one on each side, so it could be flipped over and reinserted for the next shot. Each film holder was the size of a slice of bread. In his carrying case, he had room for six film holders. That’s the way it was done in his day. Of course there were roll film cameras. There was even a roll film accessory for his camera. But serious photographers wanted the quality of large-format sheet film. Smaller formats that rendered good results were still years into the future. Even with roll film, one still had to focus, determine light, and all that, for each shot.

That’s not all. Once my dad took his pictures, he had to go into a darkroom, develop the film – the negatives, then expose sensitized paper with the negative images, and finally develop, rinse, and dry the paper prints. This required a dedicated room in his home with running water, where the temperature of his chemicals could be controlled within five degrees Fahrenheit. If he wanted to work with color photography, his chemicals had to be maintained within 1/2 degree of the right temperature. Most of the steps of the process were carefully timed. Get something wrong by a few seconds or a minute, and the resulting pictures would be blotchy, low-contrast, too dark, or too light.

Today, focus and exposure control is not only handled automatically, it is handled well. We no longer use chemical film. Instead of a darkroom, we have the option of using our computers or tablets to adjust photos in ways my father couldn’t even dream of. Our cameras are remarkably small and light, only being limited by the size of our fingers. The actual inner working part of the camera is often no bigger than a grain of un-popped popcorn. They have so much memory that you can take hundreds of photos without having to change memory cards.

So, the photographer today can focus on composition and purpose, rather than having to deal with all the technical issues, time, and expense that my father dealt with.

You’d think with the ease of use, and ready availability of cameras, there’d no longer be a use for professional photographers. As it turns out, most of the traditional markets for photography still exist, and new markets have opened, such as the Internet, which is hungry for millions of good new photos.

In this book, I’ll cover a wide variety of ways you can make money with photography. Some require almost no time, experience, or money. Chances are, you’ll find something that’s just right for you, or something that will give you some great food for thought that you can modify to suit your own desires.

Each section of this book covers a different photography business, but many are similar in that they use the same techniques to publicize, build and maintain the business, and some offer universal hints and tips for photographers. So, you may want to read everything in this short book to pick up these techniques, chapter by chapter. You’ll learn directly and by metaphor about exactly what you can do to enjoy making money with photography.

Enjoy and prosper! – Jeff Napier

Sports Photography

My father, perhaps like you, wanted to make money from his photography. He found a way that is as viable today as it was then.

He went to his local wrestling club and took pictures. A week later, he came back with small prints and gave them to the wrestlers. He told them that if they wanted full-size prints, he’d be happy to for $10 each. Most of wrestlers placed pre-paid orders. $10 was a lot of money back then, but hey, if you’re a wrestler, and if you can have a picture of yourself with another wrestler in a victorious hold, you’d buy it, right? It turned into a pretty nifty business for a high school kid. He went to the wrestling club every week, took new photos, gave away proofs (the small prints), and took orders.

My father went to the wrestling club, because that’s what was there. That was the big activity in his home town at that time.

What sports are in your area? Hockey? Football? Tennis? Skiing? Cycling? Pickleball? How could you adjust this business to fit modern times, and your local activities? No doubt you’re already cooking up answers. In addition to what you already know, you’ll find some great hints and tips scattered throughout the rest of this book.

You can also take pictures of sports activities for use by magazines, news agencies and websites, especially if the participants are celebrities. There is a book updated annually by Mary Burzlaff Bostic called Photographer’s Market, which is an absolute must-have to find markets for your work, whether you’re a sports photographer, or specialize in many other photographic fields. Not only does this publication provide thousands of listings of publishers who will buy your photos, but has a few chapters on exactly how to approach these publishers for best results. The current version is available through Amazon. You can save money on a used copy from a previous year, but this is probably a poor way to save money, since the market changes rapidly.

Consignment Sales

So my father, having been so interested in photography, thought I might like it too. When I was twelve years old, in a rather odd moment the way sometimes parents will do, he bought me a Speed Graphic. It was the 4 x 5 inch model, a rather huge piece of equipment, especially for a 12-year-old. The camera, flash gun with it’s four D cells, a pack of flashbulbs, six film holders, and a light meter filled my huge carrying case, which weighed at least 20 pounds.

With this, I started tromping around the city and in the local park, even carrying a tripod, and took a picture or two here and there. He also provided me with a makeshift darkroom in the basement of our house. I learned how to take pictures and develop pictures, which was not uncommon for a child of my age in those days.

At first, my photos were horrible. Some so dark or light you couldn’t make out the details. But the worst aspect was composition, or rather – lack of composition. I’d take a picture of a dog, and there he’d be, smack in the middle of the picture, with no emotional content whatsoever.

In time, my photos got better. I grabbed a shot of a garbageman lovingly cleaning the fender of his truck with a handkerchief. I got another dog picture. This poor old creature was chained up behind a fence on a cold wintery day. I got a shot of a couple of optimistic sunflowers which I tinted various colors (using transparent oil paint over the surface of the whole prints). I found a seedling growing at the base of a rotten old tree stump.

And, I had a problem. This photography hobby of mine was using up a lot of money. It took every penny that I had, and more than my father was willing to support. I had to think before every picture I took about the cost of the film. Many potentially good photos were never taken. I needed more money. The only way I could figure out to get money was to sell some prints.

Fortunately, I found a way to do that. I took six 8 x 10 inch prints, mounted on 11 x 14 inch black and white cardboard backgrounds to my school, and showed them to the school secretary who was also the receptionist in the school office. She seemed to like them – although in retrospect, she probably admired anything and everything the students showed her.

She offered to display them on the wall behind her desk. A couple of days later, it hit me! Why not put prices on them? She could sell them off the wall for $15 each, keep $5 for herself, and give me $10. I ran this past her, and my heart sank as she stated, “Well, we’ll need to take that up with the principal.” I knew him. He was like a brick wall. What were the chances he’d approve? But he did! And I was in business. Over the course of a month, she sold three or four pictures, and I was delighted!

I brought more photos to fill the spaces on the wall. I also offered the same thing at a few other places in town. I put a half-dozen pictures up in a restaurant, a dentist’s office, and in, of all things, a camera store.

Now, my photos were selling at the rate of 10 per week, which was a lot of money for a kid back then who’s only expense is his photography hobby.

I could have gone farther, but being a kid, I lost interest and moved onto other things. In how many places in your town could you hang pictures? What kinds of places? How about in places like 10-minute oil change places? Laundromats? Which restaurants might be interested?

And then there are galleries. Not only will they accept your work – if it is good, they want it! Their whole business is about getting art that they can resell. They typically keep 1/3 of the price a work brings. So, they can put your prints on their wall for perhaps $600 each, and every time one sells, you get $400. Hey, that’s enough to invest in frames, and make them look even better.

In this business, it is important to create pictures that have emotional content. People have to want your pictures. Can you take photos that reach out and cause people to think and feel?

Postcards

Postcards are remarkably easy to create right from your own printer. Or, for larger quantities, you can send your photo to any number of professional printing companies that will do it for you.

Thousands of tourist locations already have postcards. If you can provide more interesting postcards than the one’s out there, the gift shops will buy them from you.

Then there are the thousands of other tourist destinations that do not have postcards. If you can provide interesting postcards for these out of the way places, there are independent stores that would probably want to sell them to their tourists.

Going beyond postcards, in most such situations, there is also a market for posters, framed and unframed photos, and photographic novelty items, which you can make yourself, or have made by professional novelty advertising providers.

To sell your wholesale photography to a retail store at the level of a tourist shop – meaning almost always a small, independently owned store, all you need to do is phone, email or drop in to make an appointment with the owner. Then simply show what you have and close the deal. Typically, they’ll only buy a small quantity at first to see if what you have is a marketable product. It helps close the deal if you provide display equipment of some sort – racks for postcards, counter-top boxes, or wall mount displays. A good source of low-cost display things is ULine.com. If your photographic merchandise is on-target, most store owners will say ‘yes.’ After all, they want inventory that their customers will buy, and they know it takes money to make money. If the owner is reluctant, possibly because the owner is short of cash, you might consider a consignment deal. In consignment, you leave your merchandise, and the owner of the store pays only for what sells after it has sold. This is no risk for the owner. There is a risk that the owner will sell some of your stuff, and then not be able or willing to pay, but this risk is small with most retail business owners unless they are in very dire straits. Owners who does not have money for as much inventory as they’d like, particularly love consignment, because they get to have more inventory without paying for it unless and until it sells.

With a Special Prop

Let’s say there’s a county fair near you. And let’s say you happen to have, or can borrow a pony. So, you call the people at the fair, and let them know you’d like to show up with your pony, and take pictures of kids sitting on the pony. They’ll probably be delighted, and ask you to show up for free. They may want to charge you a small merchant fee. They may, possibly, even pay you to show up.

The idea is that you let children sit on the pony for a couple of minutes, take their pictures, and then offer to sell the pictures to the parents. One way to do it is to have a wall display showing photos of other kids on ponies. Let parents know that pictures are $18 – or whatever you want to charge, and will be mailed once you’ve printed them. Another way is to have a printer right there at the fair and deliver them right away. One fringe benefit of this business, besides the fun of working with kids and a pony, is that a parent with more than one child will want to buy photos of every child in the family. You can expand your business a bit by saying, “Hey mom, you can go ahead and climb on the pony.” Then take her picture.

You’ll want to set this up so the background is either non-distracting, or shows off the rest of the fair.

Where could you do this besides fairs? How about everyday on an empty lot near a busy intersection? How about at the local flea market? How about at arts and crafts fairs? How about in cooperation with a large pet store? The pet store will even publicize it for you. They might call it “Pony Day” and advertise a special Saturday when all the kids who come to the store get to ride on a pony. They’ll sell a lot of goldfish that day, while you sell a lot of pictures.

Does it have to be a pony? No, of course not. Could be an elephant, or a llama, or a large tortoise (I think, I’ve never tried it). But how about something more appealing to a different audience? How about a decked-out Harley? How about a gilded royal throne? If you’re in a big city, how about in a wooded scene? It could be next to a Rube Goldberg contraption of some sort, or in a spaceship. You might get a python or boa constrictor, see who is brave enough to wrap it around their neck, and take their picture. You get the idea.

Tourists In Action

If my child is sitting on Santa’s lap, I’d want a picture. If I was given a chance to drive a race car, or even just a bumper car, I’d want a picture of that, too. If my family and I were visiting the Louvre, or a California lighthouse, or standing next to the Liberty Bell. . . yup, I’d love to have a picture. So all you’ve gotta do is be in the right place, and let people know you are the professional photographer. In many cases, you’ll want to contact the state park office, or the owner of the attraction, and make arrangements to be the official photographer. All it takes is the boldness to contact them and present your plan. Well, it’s also helpful to rehearse in advance what you’re going to say. What you say should be mostly about how they, or their institution or business will benefit. Worst they can do is say no. If they do, then a slight change in plans will fix everything. Instead of taking photos at a canyon, you might end up taking photo at a waterfall or famous building.

Sure, anyone with a little digital camera can take pictures of each other. So, you might want to make sure they understand how paying a bit for a professional picture will be to their advantage. You might have a small standing display of pictures you’ve taken of other tourists, showing how happy they are, and how perfect your pictures are. You can dress the part, whatever that might be. For instance, you might dress all cowboy-like, or wear a tutu, tap shoes, and tiara, a crisp suit and tie – whatever the particular tourist attraction dictates, and with the permission of the people who run the attraction. It also helps to have way more equipment than absolutely necessary. We all know that a home user point and shoot style camera that’s the size of a couple of packs of gum is sufficient. But you might prefer to have lights, reflectors, some stools to sit on, and a big SLR camera with a huge lens shade so you look more professional.

Now we can combine the ideas of postcards, special prop, and tourist in action. You can take pictures of people at the tourist attraction, sitting on or in something appropriate, wearing a bit of costuming perhaps, and while you’re at it, you can have postcards, posters, and photographic novelty items for sale.

Photoshop – Freelance

You’ve already got some ideas of ways to sell pictures, and you’ll have more soon. But what to sell?

Soon after I got started in photography, I discovered I was more enamored with the darkroom side, than the actual taking of pictures. My art was the editing of photos. These days, I would have used a digital darkroom. As you know, that’s what we call image editing programs. Much easier, and much more powerful than an actual darkroom, you can use Adobe Photoshop or other software to completely change backgrounds, set moods, retouch and complete modify pictures.

The concept of image manipulation has become a household word: “Hey, that’s been photoshopped!”

Adobe Photoshop is near the top of the line, but you don’t need to spend hundreds of dollars to get started. There are good lower cost image editing programs, and even free ones, such as Gimp, that you can download from cnet.com and elsewhere.

What can you do? You can start with one or more photographs that you took yourself or anything from the public domain. You can combine them or modify them to create something new. Once you have your new photoshopped image, you can sell it any way you’d sell an ordinary photograph. For instance, you might have a little table, chair, backdrop and tripod in the tourist area of San Francisco, in which you take pictures of tourists, and then in a couple of minutes – with practice – you entirely change the background so that you have pictures of your tourists standing right in front of the Coit Tower, on the trolley, at the Fisherman’s Wharf merry-go-round, or on the World War II submarine in San Francisco. Or maybe photos of them with the mayor, the President of the United States, or any celebrity they want.

What else? You can make custom photoshopped pictures for industry, for websites, for theater, or for anyone who wants unreal images. More about selling to some of these customers later.

Photoshop – On Request

If you are pretty good at image editing, you might consider setting yourself up as a person who does that professionally. Many people know the basics of eliminating red eye, changing tint or brightness, or even replacing a background. They’ve tried once or twice, and their pictures either come out less than ideal, or take forever to complete. When they have a need for something special, they’ll be willing to pay you any reasonable fee to do it for them.

How might you start such a business? I’d start with a website showing off some of my work. I’d make the website like a funnel. First it has a wide mouth. It draws many people in. They may originally come just to see your amazing, humorous, or unbelievable pictures. Then the mouth narrows. It directs the people to discover that you can edit photos as a service for them. The neck of this funnel is the action step: They can email their photos to you, along with a description of what they want done, and click a PayPal button to send you an up-front payment. You do the work, then email back the completed image.

But a website, great funnel though it can be, will not draw people in by itself. You’ll need to do some things to seed it. Then, if your photos are intriguing enough, people will tell people who will tell other people, and your site will go viral. (Truly going viral is rare, but if that happens in a big way, you won’t have to photoshop anything. You can just collect money from people who’d like to advertise on your site.)

To get your first people, you can do a number of things. You can make business cards with your URL and what the site does for people, and distribute the cards any way possible. For instance, you may know an eBay seller who mails out 20 packages a day. You could pay this person to include one of your cards in each package. SEO, Search Engine Optimization, can be a better approach. Here’s a one-paragraph tutorial on SEO:

Research under-utilized keywords with the Google AdWords Keyword tool, which is free with an AdWords account, which is also free. You can look up “AdWords Keyword tool” on Google to learn how to use it. This will tell you how many people have looked up keywords in the past month. Keywords are actually key phrases in most cases. For instance, looking up “Kodak” will bring up thousands of websites, some of which have to do with photography, some with pharmaceuticals, some with business. But the keyword “Kodak Rochester New York” will limit the search to the actual company in Rochester. You want to find a commonly searched specific keyword in your area of expertise, then when googled, doesn’t bring up a flood of websites that use that specific phrase in their titles or beginning text. That way, if you put that keyword in the title tag and in an H1 tag early on your page, your website may be one of the top ones displayed by Google (and Yahoo, AOL, etc) when people search for that keyword. You can learn much more about SEO online and there are several print and Kindle books on the subject.

If you choose to work locally, you can have an office with a sign, advertise locally, and focus your SEO on a community name.

You can let everyone know that you are seeking more business. If you do a good job, in time, your reputation will bring you more business than all sorts of advertising.

You can buy Google AdWords. This is advertising that appears in search results and on cooperating websites. You pay Google a certain amount for each person who clicks on the ads and comes to your website. Adwords costs range from 10 cents per click to over $200 per click, depending on how prominently you want your ad placed (near the top above other ads, or not), and how many other people are bidding on the same keyword. AdWords works best if you target a very specific market. For instance “Professional Photo Editing” probably won’t bring much business. “Modified Fashion Portraits” will probably be at the top of the list for a very small cost, for anyone who types that phrase into Google. (I haven’t actually checked this phrase).

As your business builds, don’t be surprised if you get a single customer, perhaps a small, medium or even large business, that has so much work, you don’t have room for any but the one customer. You might even end up hiring other image editors to work for you for your major customer(s).

Since other people in the business may have had that success already, they could be very happy to have someone to offload their new customers onto. That can be you. All you need to do is contact the established photo editors and let them know you’re available.

There is no end in sight to the number of websites that will be developed. There is pretty much unlimited need for photo editors. All you have to do is be noticed by the potential customers. Another way is to email the website owners directly, being careful not to spam them, and let them know you’re available to help them with their specific needs. You might start your email with a compliment to their site. Find something about it you genuinely admire. Then let them know in what way you could improve their graphics, and how this will benefit them. Finally, let them know the cost up front.

I once read in a book that was more than 100 years old, a book written before movies, television, radio, or anything other than print advertising, that you should always state your prices up front. Otherwise, people will automatically assume you cost too much, and not look further into what you can offer. If you do show your prices, even if they are ‘too’ high, people will start to rationalize how they might pay for them. It’s almost as if they are assuming they’ll be using your services. “Hmm, maybe if I skip lunch all next week. . .” I think that advice is at least as good today as it was back then.

Day In the Life

Remember the pony? Along the same lines, you could put together a photo collection called something like “A Day in the Life. . .” What you’d do is follow a child around all day and take pictures. Then you put the best of these pictures into an attractive album, onto a DVD, or otherwise present the collection to the proud parents. They’d probably hire you every year, for every child in the family.

You could take it beyond parents and children. What about ‘A Day In the Life of an Executive?’ ‘A Day in the Life of a Musician?’ ‘A Day in the Life of a Carpenter?’ Can you imagine how many people would like such an album about themselves, or their loved ones? Might industries hire you to honor some of their employees? Might people give this kind of album as a gift?

How would you start such a business? Being a local business because you’d actually have to be on-site to take pictures, it could be started with business cards and flyers distributed locally, local advertising, and especially local publicity. Since it is a rather unique business, I don’t think there would be much trouble getting the local media to do a ‘Day in the Life’ of you doing a ‘Day in the Life’ of one of your clients. You might contact the TV stations and newspapers, and propose just that. Free publicity generally works much better than paid advertising, and this would be eccentric enough to interest the media.

Even with free publicity, it will be a business that’s inclined to start slowly. If you have the patience to stick it out, eventually, by reputation, you’ll have a huge clientele, and they’ll be willing to pay ever increasing prices.

This can also be publicized by a website in the usual ways. Even if your website is not your primary first contact, it is an almost necessary second contact. Local people who have heard of you will naturally go to your website to see samples of your work, find out how to contact you, and find out how your business works and how much you charge.

Website Photographer

Speaking of websites, I believe websites are going to be the biggest consumer of professional photography, if they aren’t already. I know for a fact that you can get paid to provide photos to some websites. These wouldn’t be the big sites like Facebook or Amazon. These would be little and medium up and coming websites that want to wear the best possible face. Years ago, I heard that there are one billion such websites. Surely there are even more by now.

For instance, you may come across a website about yoga, written and maintained by a yoga instructor. This person may have some fairly good photos of yoga classes, postures, clothing and accessories, and the site may (or may not) be making real money. Once the instructor discovers that you can provide better photos, she’ll want to pay you so she can bring up the quality of her site with your photographs. Within this example, she might not have good photos of her classes. How can she set up and take good pictures when she, herself, is teaching? But as she teaches, you could take the pictures she needs. She may have a line of yoga mats that she sells. Her specialty is yoga. So, she probably doesn’t have the experience to take the most appealing photographs of those yoga mats. But you do.

Of course you’d have a website offering your services to provide high-quality photos to other websites. This will probably not be particularly effective for first contact. In other words, it will not help people to discover your website. Oh, maybe a little bit, especially if you do the SEO as discussed earlier. Where it will be useful is in second contact. Someone has heard of you, so they’ll go to your site to see your work, and find out how to contact you. Again, publishing your rates is important, so they won’t automatically assume you cost too much.

You could use Google AdWords to bring people to your site, but my guess is that will not be cost-effective.

You have at least two other ways to bring new customers, besides local publicity and advertising. One is to write to people who have seemingly up-and-coming websites that need better photographs. You’ll want to set your email apart from the spam they get. One way is to take a moment to study their site, and find something specific that you can comment on – hopefully something you can compliment. Then you offer your services.

Another thing you can do is to start participating in all relevant online discussions. This might be anything from Usenet newsgroups to dedicated forums on websites. This is not about spamming. You participate in the discussions legitimately. Let’s assume you’re particularly interested in fly fishing. You find websites about fly fishing and post real information or ask real questions. At the end of each post, you have a link to your website, and a very brief description of what you do. Here’s an example from the top of my head:

jeffsflyfishingsite.com – Great photos for your own fly fishing website.

Chances are, anyone who is enthusiastic enough about fly fishing to create a blog or website about it, is going to follow some of the discussions. Such a person may read your post, and notice the little line at the bottom. This person may have never even thought about improved photos for his website, but now you’ve got him thinking, and he’ll pretty much have to click through to see about your photos.

Your site could contain photos for sale – probably watermarked or thumbnail size so people won’t just take them. And/or it could offer your services to create custom photos.

Puzzle Pictures

OK, you have a website. But your photos are just too good! You want everyone to see them. You don’t want to display just thumbnails, or to sell them to other websites. What can you do?

You can make your website a destination. Perhaps your big interest in life is taking pictures of vacuum cleaners. You can put together a website containing photos of vacuum cleaners. With the usual SEO and publicity, you can bring some people to your site. If it inspires enough interest, the first visitors will tell their friends who will then check out your site – bring their friends, and so on. In time, your vacuum cleaner site goes viral, at least among vacuum cleaner enthusiasts.

Then, you can make money in a variety of ways. You can use a service called Google AdSense, which is the opposite end of AdWords. Costing you nothing, you can sign up, copy some code to paste onto your web-pages, and it is all set up. Relevant ads will show up on your website, probably ads about vacuum cleaners. When visitors click on these ads, you make a little bit of money, paid monthly to you from Google.

You can advertise your services as a photographer. You can sell poster-size pictures of vacuum cleaners. Anything you want.

One way to make a site more interesting is to make it interactive. There are javascript applets you can ad that will make your pictures into puzzles, slide-shows, or other interactive things.

Museum Curator

Taking your vacuum cleaner site one step further, if you can photograph all sorts of unusual vacuums, then you can create a virtual museum. You might or might not like to write up extensive descriptions, add videos, sound bites, a blog, discussion area, and so on. You could have a membership area, where those who pay a small monthly fee get to see otherwise hidden pages. Some membership sites are free. Instead of charging money, you give a membership to anyone who is willing to give you their email address. Then, perhaps monthly, you can send them an e-letter with advertising for collectible vacuum cleaners or whatever. If there are serious vacuum collectors, you could buy and sell vacuums on your site, or link to your eBay listings. You could even charge money for people to post classified ads on your site.

Is there a way to go beyond a virtual museum? You bet! How about a ‘real’ museum? Perhaps your interest is railroads. You’ve traveled over the country taking pictures of steam engines, rail lines, signal trees, water towers, stations, engine repair shops, and so on. All you need is a small storefront. There, you build stand-alone ‘walls’ to display all your photos. No doubt you’ve collected some hardware, some of which may be antique. Perhaps some spikes, a coupling, a bell or sand dome, maybe even an entire small switch engine. You could build a replica station or engine shop. The interesting thing about many such small museums, is that they are mostly photographs. You do not need an extensive collection of tangibles to make it appealing. In your little storefront, you charge a per-head admission. You get to talk ‘railroad’ all day long with other interested parties. Ideally, it brings a sufficient income so that you can travel around the world taking more railroad photos.

For most privately owned museums to succeed, it is very helpful to be in just the right retail environment. Areas crowded with tourists are best. If you are in the right location, most of your business will be walk-in traffic. If not, you’ll need to provide brochures to the Chamber of Commerce, all the hotels, restaurants and other venues that attract tourists in your area.

I remember a motorcycle museum on the Oregon coast between towns. It had a large inviting parking lot, with signs that could be easily seen from Highway 101. That highway hosts two million cars a year. I doubt the museum had to do any advertising or publicity. Just being there was sufficient.

Stock Photography

There are many websites that maintain databases of what are called ‘stock’ photos. Someone who has to make an industrial PowerPoint presentation, someone who needs to illustrate a website, or someone designing teaching or advertising materials can go to these sites, browse the photos, and buy rights to use the ones that suit their needs.

Stock photo sites vary considerably in the way they work. A typical one is iphoto.com in which you can upload your own works, and are paid from 15 to 45 percent when someone purchases them.

Others, many of which aren’t stock photograph sites per se, such as deviantart.com will take a wide variety of uploads, and will sell copies or prints of your work, giving you a portion of the profit.

On etsy.com you can sell completed, individual works, such as prints with or without frames, as well as photographs made into novelty items.

Still others, such as cafepress.com will make your photos into T-shirts, coffee mugs, or other novelty items and have various ways of sharing the profit with you.

General stock photography is no longer profitable. If you just go along taking pictures of fire hydrants, doorknobs, people stepping into taxicabs, you’ll find that there is already too many photographs out there competing with what you can do. So, the chances of selling your photos are small, and the payments are tiny.

The way to succeed with stock photography is to provide something unique. When someone needs guitar photos, and you’re the only one that provides a variety of guitar pictures, it’s likely that they’ll pay almost any price to use them! This is especially true if you can provide unusual guitar photos. Perhaps you know that there is interest in finger-picking. A general photographer wouldn’t know that, so maybe no one has ever posted close-up shots of finger-picking to a stock photography website. You win.

`
You can create your own website to sell your stock photography. The downside is that you’ll probably have to put in long hours to bring visitors to your site. If you put your stock photos in one of the big sites, the work of getting visitors is already done.

Portraiture

People need passport photos, and are often disappointed by less than desirable pictures taken by friends and relatives with point-and-shoot cameras.

People like to have nice photos of friends and family for their albums and to hang on their walls.

People who are consultants, practitioners and performers need high-quality photos for their websites, album covers, portfolios, business cards, and so on.

Ever since photography was invented, there has been a market for portrait photographers.

If you enjoy working with people, this could be your gig. It helps to really know about the right lighting, how to elicit the right facial expressions, how to position people so they look natural, how to adjust clothing, and how to arrange backgrounds. In some cases, photoshopping in alternative backgrounds is a possibility.

In many cases, using some photo editing techniques to enhance the pictures is considered part of the business.

Having a variety of backgrounds, furniture, and especially costuming is a big plus.

A branch of portraiture is glamour photography. If done respectfully and tastefully, you can provide clients with photos that will delight them.

Another branch is pet photography. There are a surprising number of people who care so much about their pets that they want high-quality photographs and are willing to pay what it takes.

All of the techniques discussed earlier for a local business apply to portraiture. I have seen many studios set up in particularly busy retail neighborhoods. I believe this proves that one of the best way to get local business is to be visible to people walking by. . .”Location, location, location!”

eBay

eBay can be a photographer’s dream. Not only is it a great way to pick up equipment for reasonable prices, but it can be an outlet for your photography. However, it is not an easy market to crack.

If you are an eBay member, which is free and easy to set up, you can use their search tool to discover what sells and what doesn’t. You can go to the “Art and Collectibles” category, then “Art,” then “Direct from Artist,” then “Photographs.” From there, you scroll down a few inches on the left, and select “More Refinements” then “Show Only” and finally “Completed Listings.”

You will be given a page showing all the listings that have closed during the past 30 days. If a listing closed without a sale, an auction that got no bids, or perhaps because the seller deleted the listing, the price it was offered at will be shown in red. Items that actually sold will have the purchase price displayed in green.

Bad news – you’ll see that almost all the photographs listed did not sell and those that did brought little money. This doesn’t necessarily have to be discouraging. In fact, it can be good news. You can see right away what doesn’t sell well, and avoid any similar photographs. More to the point, you can see what does sell, and focus on that type of photography.

But overall, you have to admit, eBay may not be a good market for photography. Unless you can find a niche that excites people enough to pay reasonable prices for your photos. That’s the trick. For instance, there was an oil painter who specialized in photos of yellow bicycles. Why? Who knows? What’s interesting is that she sold a good number of these paintings for a profitable price.

As with freelance photography elsewhere, if you can bring out emotional responses from your viewers, it is more likely to be successful.

One of the nice things about eBay is the cost is very little, so you can experiment. You could take a wide variety of photographs and present them in a wide variety of ways. You might try sending your digital photo files by email. eBay’s policies can make this tricky, and seem to change from time to time on digital media, so check it out carefully. Selling actual prints is completely within policy. Selling framed prints may be more profitable, or not. Selling huge prints may be a good idea. Or maybe little tiny ones. Or maybe you can make the prints into business cards or postcards and sell them that way. Possibly customized, and in bulk. Reprints are completely acceptable, as are limited editions, as long as you let the buyers know what’s what. Since you’ve discovered what sells, you can sell the same picture over and over again. You may find that out of 100 different photos you list on eBay, only the same three or four sell over and over again.

If you have the patience to work this magic out, you can be successful with eBay as your only outlet.

eBay’s buyers depend on a feedback system. While eBay offers protections to buyers in case a seller doesn’t deliver as promised, most buyers will want to see some positive feedback before they’ll buy from you. Every time someone buys something from you, you get one point. If you are a seller who has built up hundreds of positive points, you’ll do better than someone with few points, or even a bunch of negative ones.

If you have no feedback, you can quickly fix it by selling a bunch of something really inexpensive, such as second-hand paperback books. Or better yet, some of your prints for a very low price. You can also get a feedback point for everything you buy on eBay, but smart buyers can tell the difference between feedback for buying, and feedback for selling.

The best way to make sure you get positive feedback is to communicate courteously and promptly with your buyers. Especially if someone has a problem. Sometimes an item can be lost or damaged in the mail. Sometimes, when the pictures arrive, the buyers are disappointed for one reason or an other. Perhaps it is smaller than they thought. Perhaps it just doesn’t excite them like it did when they bought it. This should be their problem, but unless you deal with it, it becomes yours and you could get a negative feedback point. I just give refunds to everyone who is not satisfied. Sure, it may cost some money here and there, but it’s just part of the cost of doing business.

The other way to avoid negative feedback is to be truthful in your descriptions. Always state the size of your prints, or the resolution of your electronically delivered media clearly, for instance: “575kb jpg file.” If it is imperfect in some way, state that. Let them know exactly what they are getting, such as: “8 x 10 inch, unframed print on 50 wt glossy paper, slightly curled edges.”

Buy and Sell Photo Equipment

How else can you use eBay? While not ‘making money with photography’ exactly, you may find you can be quite successful in buying and selling photographic equipment. The trick, as always with eBay, is finding a source of something that people want, and which other sellers are not falling all over each other to sell.

An area in which this can work is in antique cameras. Crown Graphics and Speed Graphics, the old tankers that I learned on, can be bought and sold at a profit. You can look for cameras that are just listed with the Buy It Now option for less than market value (don’t forget to include the shipping cost), or auctions about to end with a low price. Generally, if an auction is ending at a lower than market price, then something’s wrong. Ideally, what is wrong is that the seller listed it in the wrong category, or misspelled something in the title so other buyers didn’t see it. More likely, it is not really under market value. For instance, a bellows camera with worn bellows is worth far less than one with bellows in good shape. And, of course, if the lens is missing, it’s worth far less than one with a lens.

What if you can find one with worn bellows or a missing lens going for far less than market value? Check to see if individual parts for that camera have been selling on eBay. There may be an opportunity to sell the parts of it at a profit. Keep in mind that eBay and Paypal (their money-handling branch) end up with a percentage of your sale. A rule of thumb is that if the parts from a camera haven’t sold for more than three times its price during the past month, it is not a good enough buy.

You may find a market in tripods, lighting equipment, darkroom equipment, digital darkroom software, shutter releases, lenses, you name it. You may be able to find a wholesale supplier for new equipment, but I think you’ll find anything and everything that’s new, and that people will want to buy, is not available with a large enough markup to end up with a profit worth your time.

One way new equipment can work is to find something that’s unique, and not being sold on eBay. This would typically come from a small manufacturer who has had a unique idea. They might have a new little widget, that if you can photographic it and explain it on eBay in such a way that people understand how it will benefit them, you’ll sell lots of them. I recently saw a new kind of glue that fits this description. It was more of a putty really, but one that sticks to anything, can be had in various colors, and is obviously better for repairing many things than any other kind of glue. Unfortunately, it is already being sold on eBay, for what seems like remarkably small quantities at a high price.

Mixing and matching your eBay used equipment business with craigslist and other local venues can be quite profitable.

Sometimes you can buy something on craigslist for next to nothing because the seller needs money right away, is moving out of town, or simply doesn’t have the need to get the full value. This is something you can then sell on eBay for a good markup.

Sometimes you can buy things on eBay that will do very well on craigslist. When someone wants a light meter, they probably want it right away, today, rather than waiting for it to be shipped. You can often find interesting photo equipment at garage sales. You can consign equipment to camera stores. You can even set up a little store of your own in a flea market, or even a genuine small retail store. Because of department stores, eBay and so many other sources of brand-new equipment at remarkably low prices, you can’t compete in new merchandise. But there are few if any stores specializing in second-hand equipment. If you buy on eBay – or anywhere for that matter – check everything carefully. A piece of equipment will be dead in the water if it doesn’t function properly. Imagine the difference in what people will pay if you have to sell a camera with this caveat, “Sometimes you need to shake it a couple of times before it will focus.” You may also want to remember that last’s year’s technology is worth nothing. The world’s best 3.1 megapixel digital camera is probably worth about $20 these days.

Weddings

Every wedding needs a photographer. It is a specialized field. If you have little experience with wedding photography, you can learn a lot by looking at other wedding photographs.

There is no room for excuses in this business. The wedding photographer is paid well partly because s/he must, absolutely must show up on time, and the photos can’t be blurry, too dark, too light, poorly composed, and so on. Pretty much any other kind of photographer can be less reliable. The wedding photographer knows how to get those special moments, like when when the bride tosses the bouquet, and when the groom feeds his wife that first piece of wedding cake.

Keep your files, because you might get reorders even years after a wedding.

How do you get started as a wedding photographer? You might convince a family member or good friend that you can be their photographer, even if for little or no money. That’ll be one wedding in your portfolio, and with that, you are on the path to becoming a true professional. The usual approaches will work to build your business, such as handing business cards to everyone within reach, and building a website, but it may be slower starting than many other kinds of photo businesses, because ultimately, it is very much a reputation, word of mouth based business.

Since a wedding photography business is based on a local clientele, you can use SEO effectively with your website. The keywords would be “wedding” and all the communities you can serve. If you live in a big city, there will be many other wedding photographers who also have optimized websites. But they may miss the trick in which you name all the suburbs. So, if you live in San Rafael, California, you might make sure your SEO includes “Fairfax,” “San Anselmo,” “Point Reyes,” “Greenbrae,” and so on.

Real Estate

A realtor stands to make a few thousand dollars commission on a sale, so it is worthwhile to get the best possible photographs of that house. Once you’ve become established with one or more realtors, they’ll want you to take all their pictures, knowing your service closes sales more effectively than their own photos.

Perhaps you have an eye for this sort of thing. You might know that showing off the high, open-beam ceilings is important. You might think it is worthwhile to bring in a dining table, chairs, place settings and food, to take a picture of the dining room in the most appealing way. You might realize that taking a picture with a wide-angle lens can make the yard seem larger. I don’t know all the tricks. Perhaps you do. If not, you’ll learn them.

In addition to realtors, you may find a market with many of the people who undertake to sell their homes by themselves.

In a large city, you might even specialize in rural or commercial properties.

News Photography

News services, local newspapers, magazines, TV stations and even some websites will pay quite well for news photography. If you know how to get to fires and accidents – without getting in the way, if you know how to get photos of celebrities, or are particularly good at special interest photos, you’ll have a market.

I mentioned it earlier in this book: To sell to the news editors, Photographer’s Market, available through Amazon: http://www.amazon.com/dp/1599636131 is almost a must. With this book, you’ll know who the editors are, how to reach them, what subjects they specialize in, what formats they prefer, and usually how much they’re paying.

Then there’s photojournalism. One can go to college for this, but it isn’t necessary. All you need to do is take good pictures, write well, and know how to approach the editors who will buy your work.

Photojournalism is easier to sell because you’re providing the entire package to the editor. Otherwise, in order to use your photos, they also have to find someone to write the text.

One of the downsides to providing freelance photos or complete articles is that most publications don’t pay very well. After you’ve sold a few freelance projects to editors, they’ll start to seek you out and they generally pay much more for assigned pieces.

Nightclubs and Beaches

Years ago, when people were enjoying a night out, a photographer might come to their table with a Polaroid, take a flash picture, and then sell it to them. This is not as common as it once was, but in certain clubs it would still be a big hit. You might even help the concept of nightclub photos (using digital technology) to make a comeback.

Starting would be easy. All you need to do is to convince a club owner to let you give it a try, and see if your presence seems to enhance the festivity of the club.

Along the same lines, you could take photos of people on the beach. Some people go to the beach to be seen, and would be honored that you think they’re worth photographing. This wouldn’t be a candid thing. You would walk right up, bristling with fancy-looking equipment, and let them know exactly what you’re about. And they’ll be honored to have their picture taken!

Since most people don’t carry cash on the beach, you’ll want to make a note of their contact information. Later on, you can correspond by email, using PayPal to collect the payments. I don’t know whether they’d be more interested in buying the pictures as .jpg files or in buying prints. You can experiment and find out for yourself.

A bit of a downside to this business is that people may not be as enthusiastic about buying the pictures after they’ve come home and thought about it.

On the plus side, you get to hang out on the beach, work your own hours, and in your own way.

Arial Photography

Having access to an airplane or helicopter puts you in a unique position. You get to take arial photographs. Not only is that fun in itself, it can be profitable.

Many homeowners would love an arial view of their houses. I mean, who hasn’t gone to Google Earth to see if they can find their own home viewed from a satellite. The problem is the resolution is poor. I know I’d be likely to spend $10 or $20 or even more for a closer arial photo of my home. And I might like one of the creek and ponds behind my house.

The biggest customers might be businesses, however. I would think car dealers would all buy arial photos, as would any retailer who has a place that looks interesting from above.

Perhaps the best way to sell arial photographs is the simplest. Just go up, take the pictures, then contact the homeowners or businesspeople with proofs by email or in person.

Another possibility is to take commissions to specifically photograph certain places. Because this would probably necessitate special trips, it would take more time on your part, and so you’d have to charge more, and ultimately may be harder to sell. On the other hand, once people know what you do, they’re likely to say something like, “Hey, next time you’re in the neighborhood, could you swing by and take a picture of my brother’s house?” For this, you could charge more than the freelance photos, but wouldn’t have to charge as much as for a special job.

If you have a website or people can find out that you do this other ways, there may be use for your services in lawsuits as well. If you could provide photos of an intersection where a crash occurred, for instance, no doubt a lawyer would pay handsomely for it to demonstrate the details of a case in court.

Construction Sites

Anyone can go by a construction site and take pictures. Imagine a business where you do exactly that, going by some construction sites every day and documenting the development of houses and buildings. Once they are built, you can sell your photos to the lucky home or business owners.

Resume Pictures

Most resumes can be submitted as all text, on a plain piece of paper. If there are 400 applicants for the job, something added may make one resume stand out. What might that something be? Hmm. . . How about a photograph?

In most cases, these photos would be portraits of the applicants themselves. But in some cases, perhaps photos of their work is more appropriate. For instance, a carpenter trying for a job with a big construction company might submit a photo of a complex spiral staircase s/he has built. Or even better, a picture of the carpenter in action, finishing the staircase.

I knew a welder that specialized in custom-made utility racks for pickup trucks. He had an album that showed many of his finished racks, completely decked out in the tools and equipment the rack owners used. He showed this album to everyone, and it closed many sales for him.

Some resumes require a photo, such as people applying to modeling agencies or as TV reporters. These applicants will certainly want a high-quality photo.

You can use the usual approaches to start this business. It will most likely take a year or more to develop it into a full-time occupation. As with many such businesses, once it is going strong, most of your business will come by reputation, not advertising or publicity. This is a business, however, in which small display ads in your local newspapers may be helpful. Since craigslist is free, that would be another good place to advertise if craigslist is available in your area.

Rolling Studio

What could you do with an old bread truck? How about make it into a rolling studio? Depending on your specialty, if you serve a local market, this could be great free publicity. Of course you’d put signs on the sides. Then, you could make house calls. You could carry a generator or batteries and have lighting, furniture, a few costumes, and backgrounds set up just perfectly in the truck for portraiture or pet photography.

Or, you might go to flea markets for portraiture. You might add a unique flavor, such as providing witch and wizard costumes, placing your clients behind a crystal ball or handing them a wand before you take their pictures.

Perhaps there are eBay sellers in your city who would love to have a rolling studio come by once a week and take professional photos of their merchandise. For that matter, some of the retailers might like you to use your rolling studio to provide photos of their items that are going out in sales flyers that week.

Lecturer

Some people enjoy speaking before groups. Photography gives you that opportunity. If you have photographed something interesting, you can provide a lecture with a slide-show. You may have traveled somewhere exotic, you may specialize in taking pictures of microscopic bugs, or perhaps you and your camera have toured with a famous rock band.

There are several ways to do this.

One way is to rent a venue that could be anything from a coffee house to a major auditorium. You then publicize or advertise the event. Finally, you sell the tickets or collect admission at the door. You can start small, perhaps initially presenting to four or five people in your own home.

That way sounds kind of difficult, doesn’t it? Wouldn’t it be easier to work in cooperation with an entity that’s already set up for presentations? You could work with a church. Most will work cooperatively with a wide variety of events. They’ll provide the space and publicity. Their congregations may even talk up your event and sell tickets. You can also work with event centers. Most communities have them. Another venue is community adult education programs. Almost all of the schools host one-off events.

Another approach is to ride on someone’s coattails. Perhaps there’s another presenter who has a similar topic, and would love to have you as an opening act with your slide show. S/he will have done all the renting, publicity and so on, so you don’t have to do any of that. She may even have a following and experience, so you can know how many people to expect.

Yet another approach is to do it under the auspices of a like-minded organization. The payment options are as vast as your imagination. You can propose anything you can think up, such as a percentage of ticket sales, or a flat fee.

If your slide-show is of interest to students, schools may pay you directly to present in their auditoriums or classrooms. If of interest or benefit to employees, especially if it will cause the employees to be more effective for their employers, companies will pay for your presentations. For instance, if you have been to India, and you know of a company with a number of employees who frequently communicate by phone with India, they’ll benefit from your lecture.

Or, forget the lecture, just present the slide-show, as a background behind a musical group.

Novelty Items

There are companies that can print copies of your photo onto just about any little trinket you can think of. It can be made into a little keychain viewer, can be made into lapel buttons, business cards, tiny books, embedded in the clear barrels of pens, you name it.

The most common use would what’s called novelty advertising. If a car dealer gives out little tape measures that can be put on key rings, people will remember this dealer when it is time to buy a car. If the tape measures have an appealing picture of the dealership or one of their cars, all the better. If a music store gives away T-shirts with their name and a picture of a guitar, they’ll get more business. It just so happens that you’re the one who can take the guitar photo.

Novelty advertising can take many forms such as coffee mugs, baseball caps, and USB flash drives.

There are many companies that can print your pictures onto things. One way to go is Newton Manufacturing newtonmfg.net. You provide the picture, you order something from their catalog, and in short order, 100 or 1,000 or however many you want of the item are sent to you. You then present these to the car dealer or music store, and collect your payment. Another is Cafe Press. They will work out all sorts of interesting arrangements with you, in which you can sometimes have as few as one copy of an item made up and shipped.

Pre-Filled Digital Photo Frames

You’ve seen the prices plummet on digital photo frames. These are the little flat devices that look like an ordinary picture frame that you can hang on a wall or set on a desk, except they provide a slide-show of whatever photos you want to load them up with. They provide a whole cornucopia of opportunities to the photographer.

You can buy these frames for around $20 and on up. Even less if you buy them in bulk. You can fill them with specialized photographs of interest to people in various fields. An employee could have pictures of the company’s products in a frame. In fact, a company may want to hire you to take the pictures of the products, and then fill orders for a frame for every worker in the company.

A bicycle enthusiast may want a frame filled with racing photos, and would be happy to spend $100 at a bike shop to get it. So you would sell them or consign them to bike shops.

A family might hire you to photograph their reunion, then order a bunch of filled frames from you.

A band’s agent might want frames showing the musicians playing gigs. The agent will then give these frames away to promoters, so the band stays foremost in the promoters’ minds.

A company that manufactures gear-cutting machines would order gear-cutting machine photo-filled frames to give away to potential clients.

These may even be a good eBay play. Just find a specialty, one in which you have good photos or can take good photos. Make up a frame, list it on eBay and see what happens. If your first attempt doesn’t sell well, try another approach; or photos about something else, and list another frame, until you discover exactly what sells on eBay, then flood the market with them!

Smartphone Printing

Would you agree that most people walking around flea markets and fairs with smartphones have many pictures of friends, family, places, and things of interest on their phones? What would happen if at the fair, they came across a person with a large printer who was willing to make prints on the spot, of their favorite pictures from their phones for the reasonable price of, oh, let’s say $12? Perhaps you could charge even more. Maybe $12 would be for an ordinary 8-1/2 x 11 print. If you have a large printer, that’s a fairly rare thing, and you might be able to charge quite a bit for large prints.

If you are not very familiar with printing, you might immediately think that ink is prohibitively expensive. For most name-brand printers, if you go to a retail store for their ink cartridges, they’ll cost anywhere from $20 to $40 each, and will only print a handful of pages before they’re empty. The trick is to buy them on Amazon or eBay. You want the kind of printer in which the print head is part of the printer, not the cartridge. Then you can get cartridges for as little as $4 each, shipping included.

The only real downside of this business is that it doesn’t make use of your skill as a photographer. It’s just about printing other people’s photos.

Equipment Rental

Another business that doesn’t make use of your photographic skill is equipment rental. Is there a place in your community to rent lighting? Reflectors? Or a big printer? You might offer to rent such equipment. Once you reach a level of success, you can invest in your business, widening your line with more inventory, such as a large paper cutter, chairs, party supplies, yard care equipment. . . Well, that’s getting pretty far afield, but you get the idea. You can also carry supplies, such as printer ink, replacement bulbs, and photo paper.

Teach Photography

Some people enjoy teaching. Others would, but have never tried teaching, so they don’t know if they’re good teachers or not. A good teacher is one who enjoys working with people, and has a knack for breaking subjects down into easily managed chunks. For instance, I could tell you all about exposure, F-stops, shutter speeds, and all sorts of technical things. I could try to teach you all at once, but that probably would leave you more confused then you were before. Or, I could start by explaining only one thing: F-stops. I’d just tell you that if you block some of the light coming through the lens, you’ll have a darker picture. Then, after you get that, I could tell you that each F-stop, even though the numbers seem odd, lets in exactly twice as much light as the stop before. In small chunks, you’d get the whole picture without confusion. If I could do that, I’d be a good teacher. Are you a good teacher?

If so, you might get a kick out of teaching photography. There are many subjects within photography that you could teach. You might start with an absolute beginners’ course on how to use a digital camera. Intermediate courses might include photo composition and lighting. Advanced courses might teach those crazy F-stops, even though no one really uses them any more. Or you might teach digital darkroom techniques using Corel PhotoPaint, Adobe Photoshop or Gimp. You might teach a course on file formats, so your students will understand the difference between lossy and lossless compression, and the reasons for, and maybe even the history of.gif, .tiff, .png, .bmp, .jpg, and so on.

You could wallpaper your town with flyers, send out press releases and pass out business cards in your community. You could then hold your classes in your home, or in a venue ranging from a coffee shop to a church auditorium, depending on how many people sign up.

That’s the hard way, but you get to keep all the money. An easier way is to teach at a community adult education centers. Most communities have these. They offer quarterly catalogs with a whole range of classes such as Spanish, ballroom dancing and bicycle repair. All you need to do is visit their office, or email them with a course proposal.

Some of these schools pay a small flat rate, typically around $15 per hour, and some such as OLLI (Osher LifeLong Learning Institute) pay nothing at all.

What you want is a school that pays a percentage of their gross sales. In other words, they give you 40, 50 or 60 percent of the course fee paid by each student.

The great communication teacher, Dale Carnegie, started this way. He taught his course, How to Win Friends and Influence People, at the local YMCA on a commission basis. I think he started with just four students. In time, he was lecturing to stadiums filled with 20,000 people.

Or, you could teach for free. In that case, as you are teaching, you also offer something that your students may want to pay for, such as individual tutoring, a local photographic service, or advanced courses. You might even build up a reputation as a teacher through the school that doesn’t pay, and when you have a waiting list of a hundred students, you move away from the school, and offer your own classes, in which you charge a reasonable fee per student.

If you make your classes lively and fun, students are more likely to encourage their friends to sign up. This is especially true if they really learn the subject and find value in what you have taught.

Living Testimonials

All through this book I’ve been assuming you’re primarily interested in still photography. You may also have an interest in videography. As you can imagine, most of the still photography opportunities, with just a bit of adjustment, will work well for videography as well.

I once met a videographer who had a specialty that seemed especially appealing. She interviewed elderly people. The point was to make what she called “living testimonials.” At some point in the future, her clients would pass on. Their bodies would no longer be with us, but at least a record of what they thought, felt, wanted, loved, and remembered would be left behind. What a great gift idea, don’t you think? Who would you buy a living testimonial for? A grandparent or parent perhaps?

In order to do this well, you have to be an empathetic interviewer. With skill in drawing a person out, and asking questions that illicit in-depth, authentic answers, you can conduct a good, even compelling interview.

Expansion

Almost all of the ideas presented in this book can be expanded – if that’s what you would like. Some people keep their businesses small on purpose. As a business grows, the owner frequently becomes more of a manager than one who does the actual work s/he intended to do. They like exactly what they’re doing, and do not want to expand.

If expansion is your thing, know that by simply and patiently running your business every day, growth is automatic. You’ll know when it is time to offer additional products or services. You will probably come to a time when you need to delegate some of your work to partners, contractors or employees. As these things come up, if you take each new situation in stride, you’ll find nothing is too difficult to learn and you’ll end up making more money, and being happier than you could ever be as someone’s employee.

The Final Bit

Now you have everything you need to start your own photography business, If you can stay focused, motivated and on track, you’ve got it made!

Enjoy and prosper! – Jeff

Posted on Leave a comment

12 Unique Ways To Make Money With Secondhand Clothing




Table of Contents

Start Here

Getting Clothing

Garage Sales

Professional Thrift Store Buyer

Craigslist and Reputation

A Buying Website

A Clothing Exchange

Donation Boxes

Selling Clothing

Garage Sales, Flea Markets and Co-ops

Your Own Retail Store

Consignment Stores

Your Own Consignment Store

eBay

Route Sales

Modifying Clothes

Tayloring

Rip-Downs

Costuming

Pet Clothing

Celebrity Clothing

Replication

Genuine Bits

Patterns

Doll Clothes

Patches

Buttons and Accessories

Add-Ons

Embroidery

Tie-Dye

The Final Bit


Start Here

Dealing with secondhand clothing is rewarding in many ways. First, you are treading a light footprint on the earth. You are eliminating the need for the manufacturing and transportation of new clothing, with its attendant energy waste and pollution. This also eliminates the waste of disposing of clothes that still have life left in them. The other side of the coin is that you are helping people who couldn’t otherwise afford to put themselves and their children in good clothes, and dress fashionably.

Most of these business ideas can be started with little or no money, time or experience. Some are great partnership opportunities, so you can get your friends, your family, your church or group involved in the fun and profit.

The profit can be what you want. You can just dabble, making some rainy day money, or build a business into a clothing empire. These are not get-rich-quick schemes. They are get-rich-slow schemes.

Just to give you an example, one business I started was a clothing exchange, which I’ll explain in full detail later in this book. I made a profit while giving away free clothing. I was especially happy when low-income parents came in and got literally boxes of clothing for all their children and themselves, and didn’t have to pay a cent. I remember one woman drove up in a beat-up 1970s station wagon with a broken exhaust system, and running on 7 of its 8 cylinders. She and her four children came in, and picked out their own full wardrobes. They left without having to pay one cent, which I doubt they had anyway. That month, and every month, I gave away $44,000 in free clothing, and made $5,000 for myself in the process. I only ran the business for four months because I’m a business writer, not a ‘clothing exchange guy,’ but I did have fun while the experiment lasted. There is room for at least one free clothing exchange in every community in the world.

If that doesn’t float your boat, read on, because I’ll talk about all sorts of creative ideas from custom tailoring to eBay sales. You may want to read this ebook in sequence, even if some of these ideas aren’t for you, because in each section, you will find many useful and effective business tips you can use in whatever business you take up.

You may want to use these ideas directly, or use bits and pieces in a business of your own invention.

Have fun & prosper! – Jeff Napier

How to Get Clothing

Garage Sales

In just about every city and large town, on any weekend when the weather is good, you can visit a half-dozen or more garage sales. At most of these sales, you’ll find clothing. Sometimes it is overpriced or in bad condition. Surprisingly often, it is in fine condition, at remarkably good prices. You can buy T-shirts for as little as 25 cents. A bridesmaid’s dress for $5. A pair of shoes that originally sold for $90 might be $2. A pair of men’s slacks might set you back a dollar.

Imagine what would happen if you went to six garage sales every weekend and picked up whatever you felt you could sell for more? On average, you’d probably fill the back seat of your car with good things. What if you went to a big city and hit all the garage sales on Friday, Saturday and Sunday?

Once you get these clothes there are many ways to sell them ranging from simply bringing the whole bunch to a consignment store, to selling each individual item on eBay. We’ll talk about all sorts of ways to sell clothes later on.

If you have no experience with clothes, you can start by just grabbing things that you find attractive. If you are a man, you might specialize in men’s clothing. A woman might go with women’s clothing, of course. It helps to buy what you know.

Here are some guidelines:

In almost every case, a bit of clothing that is stained or damaged is worth almost nothing, unless you can repair it. Look for blown seams at the stress areas such as at the tops of shoulders and under the arms. Look for stains, even very faint ones in all the usual spill locations. This would be top of thighs, and at the cuffs of pants, and the fronts and shoulders of shirts. Also look for stains and tears everywhere else, time permitting.

Children’s clothing sells like wildfire, but for quite a bit less money than equivalent adult clothes.

Small and medium sizes sell quite a bit more quickly than the very large sizes, but you can make more money in large sizes, because the people who need large sizes have trouble finding a good selection at reasonable prices.

So, a pair of women’s size 9 shoes will sell quickly for a small amount of money. A pair of woman’s size 13 shoes may take a while, but when a woman who needs them comes along, she’ll pay twice as much as the size 9 woman would.

Vintage clothing can be a goldmine, but it is somewhat like large clothing. If it is only mildly different than run-of-the-mill modern clothing, it will take a while to sell. Really cool stuff, the things that can be a fashion statement when worn by someone who knows what they are doing, can sell quickly, for a lot, especially if you put it in the right market, such as eBay.

Items that can be used as costuming can have a lot of value, especially things that clearly represent a bygone era, such as a ruffled blouse with a pinched waist, or a bowler hat.




Lindsey Stirling

Knows About Costuming!

Click for YouTube Video
(on devices that support it).

Secondhand clothing is a good investment. That’s because there is a huge gap between what some people will sell an item for, and what others will pay. A good rule of thumb when shopping at a garage sale or elsewhere, is to pay one-fourth or less of the price you think you can get.

During the week, when you have time to look things up, you can use eBay as a guide. With an eBay membership, which is free and easy to set up, you can look at listings that have closed during the past 30 days. You’ll see items that didn’t sell marked with prices in red. They didn’t sell because the time expired with no bids, or because the seller deleted the listing. Items that did sell have their prices printed in green. You can click on the specific items to drill in and find out about condition, size, and exact details.

Let’s say you have purchased a pair of men’s leather gloves. On eBay, you can type the brand name and ‘men’s leather gloves’ in the search field at the top of practically any eBay page. On the left, you can narrow down the search. Near the bottom of the things you can do at the left is “More Refinements.” Click that, then select “Show Only” and finally “Completed Listings.”

You can now go through the list, and see whether many people listed similar gloves and they didn’t sell (lots of red prices), whether a few just like yours sold for just a few dollars, or whether lots sold for many dollars.

There are variables that you’ll learn to read between the lines with experience. For instance, if men’s leather gloves of type you have are rare, there may have been only a few pairs sold because few were listed. You may find, on the other hand, that they are way too common, and perhaps you shouldn’t have bought them. Oh well, that’s a lesson. Hopefully, not an expensive one, because you only spent $1 or less, right?

That’s probably the most important rule in buying: Don’t spend much. Spend almost nothing, unless you know absolutely that a thing will sell.

At the beginning, you can afford to run a lot of experiments if things don’t cost much. Five dollars can buy you 20 experiments!

If you come to a garage sale, and everything is nice quality, but pricey, and you don’t have experience, just skip on ahead to the next garage sale, where you can get things for under a dollar.

As the day progresses, the variety goes down, but so do the prices. At the end of the day, or the end of the weekend, people will sell whole boxes full of clothing for $1, just so they have less to clean up or move.

If your are shopping in the off season, or are in a small town, there may be only a few garage sales. In that case, you can afford to take your time. If you have a smartphone, you can download the free eBay software, and check prices on the spot. Amazon has similar free smartphone software. This way, you can see if the Tommy Hilfinger item is really worth what you think it is, or not. More than once, my guesses have been off by a factor of ten.

If you are in the high season in a big community, it is very profitable to organize your garage sale approach. The day before you go to the sales, you can check the listings on Craigslist if it services your area, and your local newspaper classified ads.

Some sales should be disregarded out of hand, so you don’t waste your time driving to sales where there won’t be anything you want.

Those that remain, you can mark on a map, arranging a schedule so that you hit the ones that open early and are likely to have the best clothing first, and in such a way, that you’re driving a sensible circuit, not just criss-crossing all over town. Having GPS is very helpful when garage sale shopping.

On busy weekends, you want to shop as efficiently as possible. With experience, you’ll learn not to wait to ask a price of an item on which you’ll only make $5 or $10, but to move on to other, more lucrative sales.

When you come across a large collection of clothing on which you can make money, rather than negotiating it piece by piece, you might offer to buy the entire collection. You’ll be amazed how little people are sometimes willing to accept. They’re just happy to get rid of it because they’re moving, or they don’t want to schlepp it back up into the attic. Sometimes, they’ll be insulted if you offer what they consider a too-low price.

I have learned to say something like, “Feel free to turn this offer down, because I know these boxes of clothing are worth more, but would you accept $20 for the whole lot?”

There’s no insult there, and they know it. More often than not, they’ll say, “sure!”

If you have purchased a large lot of clothing, you might want to pay for it but leave it with the seller, and pick it up in the evening when you are less busy. Most sellers can be trusted, if you ask them to set it all aside so no one can look through it since you’ve bought it. I’ve done this hundreds of times, and only once that I recall did a seller accidentally sell something I had already purchased. On two occasions, however, I forgot to note the address, and couldn’t find the things I bought.


Professional Thrift Store Buyer

Professional shoppers can go into a thrift store with a $20 bill, and come out with $200 worth of clothing.



You may have to be experienced however, because there may be other professional buyers in competition with you. But even in big cities where thrift stores may be few and far between, these professional buyers will overlook things. That’s because everyone specializes. For instance, if you are mother, and your kids are 5 to 9 years old, your eye naturally goes to children’s clothing of about the size for your kids. You won’t notice a set of Air Jordans on the shelf. Or maybe, you’re a sports-oriented man. Of course you’ll see the basketball shoes right away. But what are the chances you’d pay any attention to a prom dress? You may even develop into your specialty. You might do regular rounds of all the thrift stores looking only for men’s shoes. That will become your thing, and in time, you’ll know exactly what everything is worth, and what sells quickly, and what sells slowly. A hundred women looking for evening gowns won’t bother you a bit.


Or maybe, you’re in charge of the clothing for your local theater group. You’ll have an eye for items from the 1950s if you just outfitted a play based in the 1950s. There is quite a market for that kind of clothing, yet most people don’t know how to spot it.

Along with thrift stores are flea markets, monthly church bazaars, and so on. It doesn’t take long to figure out where all the great clothing deals are in your community.

If you are lucky, you might have something like Bargain Barn in your town. Many large towns and cities have these. It is a last stop for clothing before it ends up at the landfill. These are places run by the thrift store chains where they send the clothing that didn’t sell after a month or two in all their various thrift stores. They bundle it up and send it to the super thrift store, where clothing is often sold by the pound or by the full grocery bag for anywhere from 75 cents to a couple of dollars. You’ll rub shoulders with lots of professional buyers at these places, and they pick through the clothing quickly and roughly. Don’t expect anything to be on racks or neatly folded. It is about going through piles on tables or in bins, barrels or carboys, throwing things over your shoulders that others may want, and making your own piles of things that fit your specialty.

I knew a woman who shopped at only one place, generally twice a week. It was “Bargain Barn” in Santa Cruz, California. She’d take the stuff home, sort through it, enjoy it, maybe try an item or two on, wash a few things, maybe iron one or two. She might even keep one for herself, taking something else out of her closet to make space. Then she sold her items through two consignment stores. That’s all she did to earn her living.

You can buy things on eBay. It might not be the best way to buy things for yourself unless you are not fussy about size, because sizes can end up being incorrect for you. But if you’re buying to resell, size doesn’t matter. Someone will come along who needs whatever sizes you get. Many non-professional eBay buyers are reluctant to buy things that might not fit, leaving a smaller market, naturally depressing prices in your favor. On the other hand, there are zillions of professional buyers on eBay looking to snap up anything that they can make a profit on.

If you know what you are doing, if you specialize in one type of clothing, you can learn to find the deals on eBay that are right for your market, and snap them up yourself. The usual rules of buying clothing apply. You don’t want anything stained, ripped, missing pieces, or otherwise damaged, unless you can fix it. You may have to pay a shipping charge, which adds to the cost. In general, you won’t get the huge markup that you get a garage sales and sometimes at thrift stores. But sometimes, you’ll find an item that the seller didn’t understand, or something that’s listed incorrectly.

People sell on eBay in one of two ways. Auction, and Buy-It-Now. Auction-style listings are just what you’d think: People list an item for one, three, five, seven or ten days starting at a low price. Buyers bid, and the one willing to pay the most for an item gets it. The seller has the option to start the bidding at any price. If too high, no one bids. Lots of items end up this way. You can bid on an item at any time, offering the most you are willing to pay. If no one bids more, in the end, you win, and it is shipped to you. Interestingly, you may get the item for less than you bid. Your winning payment is only the next increment higher than the next highest bid. Increments are usually one dollar.

So, you may find a belt with a great turquoise and silver buckle on eBay and the current price is $6. You might be willing to pay up to $20, so you bid $20. But, when the auction ends, perhaps the second highest bidder was only willing to pay $10. So, you get it for $11.

With Buy-It-Now listings, also known as fixed-price listings, the seller states a specific price. As soon as anyone decides they’d like to pay that price, they buy it, and the listing ends. In the case of the belt with the turquoise buckle, the seller could have listed it as Buy-It-Now at $18. If you felt that was a sufficient deal, you just click the Buy button, and it’s yours.

Payment is most often handled through a company owned by eBay called PayPal. Through millions of transactions, it has proven to be safe, fast, reliable. A PayPal membership is free. When you pay, the money is taken from your checking account, debit or credit card, or cash that you have deposited with PayPal – your choice. There are also a couple of credit options available through PayPal for those who qualify.

You might wonder about the reliability of people selling on eBay. Someone could advertise a solid-gold whatever, and ship a box of rocks instead, couldn’t they? Yes and no. They can. Their account won’t last long. eBay will shut them down. Now, that doesn’t help you, but fortunately, eBay and PayPal offer Buyer Protection which refunds your money if an item isn’t as advertised, or doesn’t arrive.

Furthermore, eBay has a feedback system. When you buy something on eBay, you get to offer a feedback point and a comment up to 80 characters. If all was well, you’d leave positive feedback, if not, you can leave neutral or negative feedback. Before you leave less than positive feedback, there are some other mechanisms in place to help resolve issues. You can communicate with the seller, and if that doesn’t work, you can communicate with eBay representatives. Most problems are resolved before you’d need to leave less than positive feedback.

So, before you buy, you can check the seller’s feedback and make sure that it is mostly positive. Almost no one has 100% positive feedback, but if your seller has a number of feedback points, and they are 99% or better, you can be fairly assured there’ll be no problems that can’t be resolved.

Interestingly, because of the Seller Protection, I often didn’t check a seller’s feedback. I just went ahead and bought things, and it almost always went perfectly without a hitch.

I’ll bet you’ve already figured out the best strategy for buying from auction-style listings. If you bid too soon, you may drive other buyers into a frenzy. You’ll also have to wait a long time to see whether you won the item or not. So, you might prefer to bid at the last possible moment. And that’s just what thousands of people do. In fact you can download software to bid on items automatically at the last moment for you.

Better yet, you can just sort eBay listings by end time, so the ones ending soonest will be at the top of the page. Then, when you see something that’s closing in the next few minutes for less than it’s worth, that’s what you bid on. Some remarkable deals can be had this way. Especially if you have found something that’s misspelled, or listed in the wrong category. Other buyers will have missed noticing that. I saw perfectly good items worth $30 or more close for a penny or a dollar. Sometimes even with free shipping, if the seller wasn’t paying attention to the format of the listing. This is fairly rare however, so you’d probably have to spend quite a bit of time pouring over listings that are about to end.

Getting good deals on Buy-It-Now listings is done in the opposite way. What you’re looking for are listings that were listed at a too-low price. Many others are looking for these also, so they don’t last long. Therefore, what you want to do is sort the eBay Buy-It-Now listings by time created, most recent first. I have often picked up deals literally within one minute of the time the listings were created. No doubt it is a surprise to the sellers that their items sold that quickly!

In general, you won’t get as good a deal by snapping up Buy-It-Now listings as you will for auctions that opened for a penny or a dollar and got no bids. That’s because people start Buy-It-Now listings at the price they’re actually expecting to sell their items for. But with practice, you can consistently get good deals on which you can make a profit.

Whether you focus on Buy-It-Now or Auction listings, you might want to consider common misspellings, and seek those out. For instance, Afghan is most commonly misspelled Afgan. In fact, people spell it this way 75 percent of the time. So, you might see what’s available under that spelling.

So what do you do with the stuff you can pick up on eBay? You can sell it through consignment stores, through flea markets or your own store, out of the trunk of your car, on craigslist, or maybe, if you get it just right, you can turn things right around and sell them again, for a profit, on eBay. If you like working on clothing, you can repair damaged clothing, cut down clothing, dye it, or sell bits and pieces on eBay.


Buying on Craigslist and By Reputation

Does craigslist service your area? You can put an ad in the items wanted section. Just let people know you buy clothes. You can optionally direct them to your own website where you can tell them what you don’t buy, what you do buy, and approximately how much you pay. Or, you can just post your email address or phone number, as long as you’re willing to take a number of calls that don’t pan out. But those that do, may pan out quite well. Most people won’t contact you to buy a single item. They may have a dozen, a hundred or even a thousand items for sale. These are the sellers you want. A person who has a single hat for sale would be a waste of your time, even if the hat is a good deal, due to the time the transaction will take. Also, the person selling a single item generally wants a fair bit of money for it. The person selling everything in an estate, or a closet full of items that no longer fit will often accept far less than market value.

When this happens, it helps to be professional. The first thing you have to do is make sure the clothing is acceptable. So, you do want to take as long as you need to make sure it is not torn, that shoes, gloves and so on have mates, that the items aren’t all weird sizes (unless that’s OK in your selling paradigm), that they are clean or can be cleaned, not worn-out, not torn, not moldy, and don’t smell like cigarette smoke or cat pee.

An odor is serious trouble, because most people won’t buy anything with even a faint odor. And, odor is contagious. Put that smoky smelling pair of jeans between a couple others, and they’ll all smell like smoke.

What I recommend for most bulk buying situations is to offer a single price for the whole lot. Another option is to offer a price per item. Don’t be afraid to offer a too-low price. You’d be surprised how often people will accept a remarkably low offer. Often their primary objective is not to make money, but to make space, or be rid of something that’s been bothering them. In other cases, they have a plane ticket for tomorrow. Being able to sell the stuff they can’t take for any price beats dumping it in the trash.

Sometimes people will act offended if your price is too low. Occasionally they really will be offended. That’s their business. In my opinion, they are allowed to feel and act any way they want, as long as they don’t treat you badly. Remember, your bottom line is to buy things at a low enough price that you are sure to make a profit. You don’t need to buy everything from everyone. Sometimes it is difficult to offer a small sum to someone who obviously needs the money. But if you can’t stay in business, you can’t help anyone else who wants to sell clothing.

I used to preface my offers with something like this, “What you have here is worth far more than I’m offering, but all I’m willing to pay is. . . (Then I state the price.) “You don’t have to take me up on that. I won’t be offended if you don’t, and I thank you for showing me what you have.”

This makes it very difficult for them to be offended. And, it makes it difficult for them to think back on the transaction a few days later and say you took advantage of them, because you were clear and honest right up front.

When a situation comes along that a seller asks way too little, assess the situation. He may be someone who is quite timid. She may be someone who really needs whatever money she can get. There may be an element of desperation. In those cases, you can often pay more than the asking price without making it unprofitable for yourself.

As time goes on, your craigslist ad becomes less important. Assuming you treat everyone well, people will remember you, tell their friends, and keep your business card. They’ll call or write from all corners of your community.

I heard a story about a fellow in Baltimore or Boston who was interested in books, but the idea is the same as it would be with clothing. He placed an ad on craigslist that he would pick up books from anyone who had some they wanted to get rid of. He didn’t promise anything specific. His ad didn’t say he’d donate them, or even donate a portion of his profit. He didn’t say they’d be used to fill libraries or sent to schools overseas. He didn’t address the fact that they’d be recycled. He just said he’d pick them up. And, if the story I heard is true, he picked up tons of books per month.


A Buying Website

Whether or not your advertise that you’re buying – or just picking up – on craigslist, having a website can be a big plus, especially if you’re also selling clothes in your community. I’ll talk more about that later.

One difficulty with craigslist is that after you post, others will post, and your listing will scroll down and out of sight, especially in a large community. Craigslist will only let you delete and re-post a listing every two days.

One semi-spammy way around this is to juggle perhaps four postings, one posted every 12 hours. One for buying shoes, another for hats, another for dresses, and so on. Then, each of your postings can have a link to your website.

A much better way requires that you sell clothes locally. If you do, then you can post an ad and a picture for each piece of clothing you have for sale in the clothing section. In each ad, you mention that you also buy clothing. You can post a reasonable number of items every day and it’s not spam at all.

Where having a website really shines is in what’s called ‘second contact.’ It is difficult to create a website that people will somehow just find, and then discover that you buy clothes. But if people already know that you do, then they’ll look up your website to find your email address, or phone number and contact you.

I don’t want to discourage you entirely. Through SEO (Search Engine Optimization) you can make a website that’s effective for first contact. The trick is to have a phrase on your website that people will use when they’re looking for a place to sell clothes, and the names of all your local communities. Something like, “Sell your secondhand clothes in Medford, Grants Pass, and Rogue River.”

You put this phrase in the title tag of your page, and make a large title using the H1 tag. You can also put it in the body of your text and in the meta keyword and content tags. This way, someone who is googling something like, “sell my clothing in Medford” will come across your website, and unless you have a lot of competition that also knows SEO tricks in your community, your site will be the first that appears in the Google search results.


A Clothing Exchange

Perhaps your church or group has sponsored an occasional clothing exchange. I’m not talking about a rummage sale where you donate your unwanted clothes and they sell them to support the organization. I’m talking about an event where everyone brings their unwanted clothes, perhaps on a Saturday morning, and everyone can carry away other members’ unwanted clothes. So, you can get rid of that funky blouse someone ‘gifted’ you with and pick up a gorgeous. . .

What if this happened on a grander scale? Imagine a regular location where this free exchange of clothing went on every weekend, or even every day? Do you see where the profit is in this? Since you could be the one who organizes and maintains it, it is only fair that you get first pick on everything that comes in. If you let everyone know right up front that that’s exactly what you’re doing, they’ll all be OK with it. I can assure you of that, because I set up a business that grew nearly overnight into a large, ongoing free exchange in Marin County, California, and that’s what actually happened.

More specifically, I rented a 2,500 square-foot store, primed it with stuff I bought for next to nothing at garage sales, and opened to the public. In my exchange, I allowed exchange of anything of reasonable size (no couches or mattresses, please!) There were many books (another profit-bearing business in itself), garden tools, car parts, sports equipment, you name it. But I could have specialized in clothes. In fact, it was more than 75 percent clothes anyway.

Never once did anyone complain that I had first pick. Quite the contrary, I received complements all day long for the nature of the business.

Another thing that might surprise you is that I received much more clothing than I gave away. I actually had volunteers who took the excess to local thrift stores. There were hundreds of wealthy people who brought things to the exchange just so other less wealthy people could get them. All these donors knew full-well that I was supporting the business by picking the cream off the top.

I’m sure you can imagine what I did with the one percent or so that I picked. Right, I sold them on eBay.

I only ran this experiment in Marin for four months.

During that time, a volunteer ran some math and worked out that I gave away $44,000 per month worth of clothing. This was just wonderful for all the people who came from the poorer areas east of Marin and were able to get good clothing for their children and themselves. Even though the store was in a rather fancy suburban neighborhood, and many of the ‘shoppers’ came in junky cars and looked kind of scary to the locals, I was often told how much it was a great community service by these well-off locals.

I have been more of an experimenter than a do-the-same-profitable-thing-year-after-year person – probably to my detriment, but it could have been a huge success. Instead of closing it and moving on to the next experiment, I suppose it could have branched out, and I’d be very successful in the exchange business. But, being an experimenter and a writer, I’ll leave starting the next exchange up to you.

If I was going to do it again, there would be some things I’d have to work out first. My version started out quite large, and I had a rag-tag assortment of about 20 volunteers. Not being a great manager, I quickly lost a degree of control over these people. Some came in drunk, some complained about everything in sight, some treated the clientele crudely. So, if you do this, you’ll either want quality employees rather than volunteers, or you’ll want to screen your volunteers better, or you’ll want to have a more alpha personality. Or, perhaps the best solution, is keep it small and manageable, perhaps in a 700 – 100 square foot space.

The next problem was waste. Since I was taking everything, not just clothing, I had to rent larger and larger dumpsters to accommodate the things that weren’t worth even giving away. At the end of the fourth month, I was paying $250 per month for dumpster rental. Half of the stuff that went in these dumpsters was not clothing. But half was. You’d think people would know better, but some of the stuff that was donated was brought in damp, mildewed bags. They went right into the dumpster. Much more was stained or damaged beyond usefulness.

To not discourage people from bringing things, I decided never to decline any reasonable donations. I stand by this, and believe it’s fine to spend a bit on garbage pickup.

I had a sign on the front window that told people not to leave donations after hours. But they did. Most mornings I’d find a pick-up truck full of bags of worn-out clothing, broken lawnmowers, sofas without cushions, and so on. These were the things that people just wanted to dispose of, didn’t want to pay landfill fees, and would be too embarrassed to try donating to the store during the day.

And parking was a problem. My store became rather popular within a very short time. (Advertising and publicity is absolutely not necessary in a business that exists to give things away.) The problem was the parking lot became congested. And that, ultimately, was the downfall of my experiment. When traffic started clogging the little strip mall I was occupying, the neighboring businesses started to complain. The property manager suggested I leave. Oh, I could have worked things out, but since I was ready to move on, I just pulled the plug.

I’m not the first one who set up a store to give things away. The precedent was set in 1968 at the Digger Store in the Haight-Ashbury neighborhood of San Francisco. The Diggers were a loosely assembled group of people who started making free soup, beans, and bread, for the hippies that came to the Haight during the Summer of Love. In time, they rented a storefront in which they accepted donations and gave everything away. I did a bit of research and never found out how they paid the rent. That store, too was a short-lived experiment.

Digger Archives




The Digger Store

Digger Archives


Donation Boxes

You may have seen clothing donation boxes in front of stores and at street corners. Perhaps the best known are Gaia green boxes. The idea is that anyone can drop off clothing in these boxes, the clothing is then used to bring money to charities. That’s the idea. However, a quick check of “clothing donation boxes” on YouTube will let you know that quite often the money that these clothing donations generates is not used for charity at all, but for the profit of some greedy small companies.

It can be different. There’s no reason it couldn’t work as it should. Perhaps you are the person to do it. It is completely reasonable and morally correct to make some money in the process, as long as you are up-front about it. This model can have at least two benefits – in addition to your profit. One would be that you can give some of your profit to your favorite charity. Another could be what you do with the clothing you collect that you don’t sell. It can cloth the less fortunate folks in your own community, or do what the Gaia green boxes promised, but evidently didn’t deliver on: To send the clothing to third-world countries where it would be seriously appreciated.

If you can figure out how to get or make a suitable box, then starting this business is super-easy. All you need is one box to start. Then you’ve got to find a property owner who would be willing to let you set it down. Most property owners, if they have the space, would be glad to help you do something good. As I have discovered, even though you are doing it for profit, as long as your side effect helps someone, people will very willingly support you. As long as you are upfront. Trying to hide your profit motive would be a big mistake. Advertising that you are doing it for profit, and that it helps people, makes a world of difference. People like the entrepreneurial spirit, and they, too, have expenses. They understand that you have to earn a living.

Another approach is to set it up as a genuine non-profit. What, in the United States is called a 501-C3. When you get this permit from the government, you can say you are a charity, and collect donations in various forms such as clothing, but also cash if you wish. As a non-profit charity, you do have to be accountable. There is some paperwork to be filed, you have to have at least two people willing to help with oversight – typically a treasurer and president, as I recall, and you actually have to do some sort of charitable work. When you run a non-profit, you don’t just grab whatever money is left after expenses. Instead, you pay yourself a salary. If you’re starting something like a clothing business, initially with perhaps one drop-box, your salary might be $10 per year. But it could be $40,000 to $80,000, once your organization can support it. In fact, it can be much more. The people running many large charities take home six-figure incomes. I personally feel that’s fine, as long as the work they’re doing ultimately benefits people at least as much as those who donate believe it does.

Selling Clothing


Selling at Garage Sales, Flea Markets and Co-ops

OK, you know how to get secondhand clothes. Finding ways to sell them profitably is easy. You can start as simply as having garage sales. Even though you can buy clothing for as little as a dime or 25 cents, you can sell clothing for $5 and $10 each at a garage sale. The trick is having things that people want. You know the sweater you bought at a garage sale for 50 cents is worth $10 (or more), and so you just go ahead and sell it at your garage sale for $10.

One of the big mistakes people make with garage sales is not putting prices on everything. Without prices, many shoppers will just assume the price is too high. They often won’t ask. They just walk away.

If you have a mixture of clothes, some worn, faded or worse, and others that are great, people will often see the ratty clothing first, and not even look at the good stuff. So, you’ll want to avoid showing the junk clothing.

These days, craigslist is the one main place to advertise your garage sale, assuming it services your community. Second-best is to place a classified ad in your local paper. If your community allows, you can put up signs on trees and street sign poles directing people to your sale. Make the address prominent, and make the lettering big and high-contrast. When folks are driving by your signs, you want them to be seen right away. I believe it is actually dangerous to make little hard-to-read lettering on garage sale signs, because it causes drivers to focus on your sign, not on pedestrians and so on.

If parking is a problem where you live, you’ll want to work out a way to make it easy for your visitors. This could be big signs showing where and where not to park, or maybe even a volunteer in a safety vest directing traffic.

You’ll want to start your sale early. Many buyers set up a route starting at 8am. If your sale starts at 9, and you’re on their route to visit before 9, you lose out. No matter what time you start, you’ll probably have earlier visitors, hoping to find a deal before everyone else. Some people handle this by refusing to let anyone in until the exact time they have said they’ll start. Others just let people come in and buy things. I think the best approach is to have everything priced and ready to go at least an hour before your sale is to start, and let the early people come on in. They’ll ask for deals. They’ll want your $10 sweater for $8, even first thing in the morning. Best bet is probably to hold tight on your prices early, and as the afternoon approaches, lower the prices on things that didn’t sell.

Eighty percent of your visitors will come through before 11am, so plan accordingly.

A step up from garage sales is flea market selling. This has two advantages. The first is that people are coming to buy things. They come to garage sales to buy things also, but they are more focused as buyers at flea markets. The second is that you don’t have to sell everything at once. If some items don’t sell, you can simply display them next week and the week after until they do sell. At many flea markets, you can rent space in which you can store your things between weekends, so you don’t have to carry everything in, then carry everything back out at the end of the day every time.

Closely related to a flea market is a cooperative store, set up in the fashion of an antique mall. Merchants rent spaces, often as small as 60 square feet, for reasonable amounts of money, such as $100 month. As a merchant, you display your things in your space, but you don’t have to be there all day everyday to sell your clothing. There is someone at a front counter that handles all the transactions for you, typically for a 15 percent fee. At some cooperative stores you have to ‘volunteer’ some of your time at the counter. Volunteering two days a month is common. At others, the store provides the hired help.

At a cooperative store, you don’t meet and greet the public, unless you are volunteering at the counter, so you don’t learn some things that you might otherwise learn, such as which clothing items are currently in demand. But, your time is your own. You can go out and buy more clothes. Better yet, you can set up accounts and sell at several co-op stores.

After you’ve gained some experience and made some money at garage sales, a flea market, or co-op, you’re ready to start a real retail store, if you wish.


Your Own Retail Store

Most people think starting a retail store is expensive, risky and difficult. As you’ll find out in this chapter, it’s really quite easy.

You will need quite a bit of inventory – clothing, to start a store. The one other thing that you will need is a bit of cash. You need to have $5,000 or $10,000 that you can risk – that you can afford to lose – even if you do it in the simplified way that I’ll recommend. Most people who follow this recipe will do fine, but there is an outside chance that you are one of those people who just isn’t balanced enough to run a business. There is a chance that something unexpected could happen, such as a forest fire taking out the entire town, including your new store, just as you have filled it with inventory.

If you don’t have enough clothing and sufficient money, there is no problem. All you need to do is run one of the other businesses in this book until you do.

To make it even easier to start a retail store, you might consider a partnership. If you are lacking something, perhaps time, experience, or money, a partner who has what you don’t have can make all the difference.

You don’t want a partner who has what you have, and lacks what you lack. That’s a recipe for disaster.

If you decide on a partnership, you’ll want to make sure every eventuality is discussed up front, and a written agreement is signed in which things like who makes decisions, how much investment (if any) is expected, and how the profit will be disbursed, is all spelled out. The most important thing in that contract should be an escape clause for each partner. What if one person gets sick? What if there is an irreconcilable conflict? What if one partner loses interest, or doesn’t participate as expected? More than one business has been ruined because there wasn’t a clean escape clause.

When you consider a partnership, remember that the profit is divided. For instance, if your business makes $40,000 in the first year, and you have a partner, then you only get to keep $20,000 as opposed to $40,000.

One way to start a store is to spend thousands of dollars for inventory, then rent a large store, spend a lot on advertising, and see what happens.

That’s not the way I recommend. What I suggest is to learn the ropes at a flea market, eventually accumulating money, and more clothes than you need for the flea market. Then, rent a small, inexpensive store. In time, as your business grows, you can move into a larger store.

Let’s talk about what kind of store you might want to start with. You want a lot of square feet for your money. But much more important is exposure.

It is very important that people in your community will be aware of your store. So, look for a place where you can put up signs that can be seen from the street. And not just any street, but one which has a lot of traffic. And not just any traffic. You don’t necessarily want a commuter route. A tourist area, or one where the traffic varies every day – or one with a whole lot of commuter traffic is best. For instance, along U.S. Highway 1, in the small coastal towns of California, they have two million cars a year going by. And it isn’t the same 20,000 people going by 100 times. It is mostly tourists.

Another kind of exposure that’s very nice is foot traffic. In a way, that’s even better, because in most areas where people walk a lot, they are already shopping. So, getting a place in a busy shopping mall is ideal.

If you are not in a mall, then it is very important to consider parking. If people can’t park, or if they have to go through antics to come into a parking lot, they won’t stop at your store.

If you are not in a mall, then signage is important. Ideally, you’ll want explosively powerful, very bright, huge signs letting people know that you have clothing for sale. The problem is that zoning ordinances seldom allow anything that isn’t tasteful enough to fit into the community. So, before you rent a store, find out from your local zoning board what you can do with signs. They’ll tell you the limits. For instance, they may tell you that you can have one square foot of signage for each linear foot of front wall, no sandwich signs, but illumination at night is OK. In most cases, whatever you put in your front windows is OK, even if it is very sign-like.

If you do have foot traffic or drive-by traffic and good parking, you don’t need to spend even a penny on advertising.

On the other hand, if you the signs on your store are not sufficient, see what free publicity you can get before spending any money on advertising. You might be surprised what you can come up with, using a bit of inventive thinking.

You can send press releases to all the newspapers, radio stations and TV stations in your area. You can also inform the websites that focus on your community. Some charge for advertising. I wouldn’t recommend spending any money there. But some sites, such as most chamber of commerce sites, are happy to provide a free listing and a link to your website.

Your website can be a simple one-page affair, or something more. For the most part, people won’t discover your store through your website. Instead, those who already want to contact you or stop in, will use your website to get your phone number, hours of operation and address.

You can make it more of a destination site by taking pictures of your most interesting clothing, and posting pictures on your site that change every few days.

I believe I said something about inventive thinking and free publicity, didn’t I? Let me tell you two quick stories about bookstores. I believe this will fire up your imagination, and you might be able to figure out something similar or even better for clothing.

One bookstore in San Francisco was sometimes criticized because it was a bit dark, especially in the deeper shelves. The owner decided to make fun of this deficiency, and so he had a “Midnight Flashlight” sale. He turned out all the lights, and handed out flashlights at the front door, opening at midnight for his one-time-only sale.

Only a hundred customers came and bought books that night, but all of San Francisco was talking about it for years afterward. Eventually, tens of thousands of people came to the store, to see if it really was that dark in there, or just to see the place with the funny sale.

Another bookstore, in cooperation with a college art department, had all the books arranged, not alphabetically, or by subject, but by color. This lasted one week. During that time, a customer would be hard-pressed to come away with a specific desired title. But they came away with books they didn’t even know they wanted. But the main thing, is that 20 years later, people are still talking about it.

If you want something more than free publicity, there’s craigslist. If it serves your area, you can place free ads. The ads scroll down as other people post ads for their clothing, and soon your ad is lost from sight. However, you can delete and re-post your ad every two days.

Better yet, you can post a whole bunch of ads for individual pieces of clothing. You might take a picture of an interesting hat at 10 am, and post an ad for that hat. Then at noon, you can post a great dress. Then at 2 pm, post an ad for a purse. You get the idea.

Taking the craigslist idea one step further, on every ad you post, you can have a link to your website, saying something like, “If this dress isn’t your size or quite the one you wanted, check out my website where you’ll find dozens of others.”

I did this with secondhand computers in Marin County, and in two months, I had 20,000 visitors to my site, brought almost entirely from my craigslist postings.

As far as paying for advertising, for a small retail business, it almost universally does not work! Phonebook ads, although expensive, used to work fairly well, but no one uses phonebooks any more. They go to the Internet.

Local newspaper advertising doesn’t work. Same thing: People look to the Internet for local news. Actually, advertising a small retail business in the local newspapers never did work well, even before the Internet.

So, I recommend that you simply don’t spend any money whatsoever on advertising. To ensure that you’ll have plenty of business anyway, make sure you rent in a location with good exposure. Then take advantage of free publicity if you have to.

When you start your first store, unless you have inherited a lot of money, you don’t want to risk your savings. Your first store can be just a few hundred square feet. You don’t need to be on Park Avenue or Rodeo Drive. Your rent can be under $1,000 per month. You don’t need a cash register at first. A desk drawer will do. You don’t need an alarm system until your store grows.

General liability insurance is something you’ll want to get as soon as you can afford it. The cost is around $500 to $700 per year. It covers you if a customer is injured in some way. Let’s say a customer pulls a belt too tight, or trips over his underwear in the changing room. You would want to help that person cover his medical bills, right? But not if it has to come out of your pocket. That’s what the insurance is for. If a lawsuit should ever happen, the insurance company will fight it with their own lawyers, and pay whatever costs come to you in the end.

In the used clothing business, a lawsuit is very unlikely. Especially, if you treat your customers well. That’s a good idea anyway. Most retail businesses start slowly, and build on reputation. People will shop with you because they like the conversation and the ambiance of the store. They’ll buy things they don’t even need just to help you out. They’ll tell all their friends and family. Especially if you go out of your way to be a good citizen.

Another good thing about this business, is that there are opportunities to practice philanthropy. For instance, when an unfortunate family’s house burns down you could give them a $100 gift certificate for clothing in your store. You don’t have to tell anyone. You don’t have to issue a press release. The recipient of the certificate is sure to tell people, and the word will get out.

I’m speaking of the retail store as if it is a one-person enterprise. That’s the way I recommend you start, unless you form a partnership.

Having employees is a huge expense, and it cuts directly into your profit. When you are small, there is no employee cost at all. If you buy a pair of shoes for $5, and sell them for $15, the $10 profit is all yours.

On the other hand, if you have an employee at $9 per hour, and the person sells only one pair of shoes during that hour, you get to keep only $1.

As your business grows, then employees become important. You might think that the bookkeeping for having an employee is difficult. In fact, it is easy to learn. There books and websites on the subject. But, easier than that, there are agencies such as ADP that do all the paperwork for you. They work out the withholding taxes, they tell you how to get Workers Comp (compensation) insurance, send you the occasional forms that need signatures, and write the checks for your employees. The cost is around $40 or $50 per pay period per employee.

There is a tendency among new retailers to hire too many people, too soon. It is far better to be a bit short-handed, until you absolutely know that if everyday, in the season and out, you need more help.

When interviewing, you’ll want to be careful not to ask questions that are discriminatory. You cannot choose to hire or not based on color, religion or anything like that. But you probably wouldn’t anyway, right?

When hiring, you want to spell out responsibilities up front. You don’t want to hire someone, and then be surprised when s/he balks at having to clean the bathroom. If you expect the bathroom to be cleaned, state it up front, before the deal is done.

If you have an employee that’s not working out well, it is best to talk early on, and in earnest, with this employee. See if you can discover underlying motivations for the behavior that’s bothering you. You’d be surprised what you’ll discover, if you have a compassionate, but totally honest conversation about problems. Usually after such conversations, both you and the employee feel better, and the problem is resolved.

If after such conversations the problem can’t be resolved, then you may need to let someone go and hire someone else. Do not cripple your business because you don’t have the heart to fire someone. In fact, letting them go is the best thing you can do for them. No one really wants to be a misfit. And, the lesson is unmistakable: Mess up, and you’ll lose your job. In the person’s next job, they may be a much better fit. They may have learned to perform better. When firing someone, state the exact reason, being careful not to mention anything that could be discriminatory. For instance, “I just can’t understand your accent” is a troublesome thing to say. On the other hand, “We are losing sales because the customers are having difficulty communicating with you,” is perfectly acceptable.

A moment ago, I was saying that it is better to be a bit short-handed than having too many employees. The one place where this really matters is at the cash register. Customers do not like to wait. Therefore, it is best to work out ways to be as efficient as you can be in handling sales transactions.

A technique I learned many years ago, but which is seldom seen in retail environments, is to juggle customers. While on person is getting out a credit card, I converse just a bit with the person behind him, while handing some merchandise to another person alongside the sales counter, and field a question from someone ten feet away. I just keep doing a few seconds of work with each of three or four people. No one feels they had to wait. Oh, it might seem a bit impolite, especially if I don’t get it just right, but people seem to think it’s quite novel, and have no problem being ‘juggled’. This is much preferable to handling the one person right in front of you, to the exclusion of everyone else, until the transaction is finished. Doing it this way, I have commonly had customers start to relate with and enjoy each other, rather than a boring quiet wait in a line.

It used to require a two or three year commitment and cost a couple hundred dollars to set up an account to take credit cards. Not any more. You can set up with PayPal, a company that was originally developed to make it easy to transfer money online. They now offer a simple and low-cost credit card solution.

In the very first weeks or months of your store, you don’t even need to take credit cards. I have run a few cash-only small businesses. Customers who had no cash, were sent to the ATM machine across the street. I almost never lost a sale.

Many retail businesses start by remodeling the retail space they’re going to occupy. I recommend doing as little of that as possible early on. If you have really good deals on clothing, people aren’t going to care whether your floor has brand new carpeting or wall-to-wall concrete. They probably won’t even notice your walls. All you need is an old desk or something for a sales counter, and some way to hold up and display the clothes. You can grow into proper store fixtures and decoration later. You can start selling items from the first day you have the keys. This isn’t necessary if it isn’t your style, but the point is you don’t need to waste rent money in preparing a grand opening. You don’t need a grand opening at all. You can just show up like a toadstool. One day, there’s an empty store. The next day, there’s a great new place to buy used clothing. You can be making money almost immediately.

The only thing you need to do is get the proper paperwork filed. There are only a handful of steps to the process. The following steps are what you do in most communities in the US. In other countries, the procedure will be similar. In almost all the offices where you do these steps, they’ll tell you exactly what to do, what the next step is, and which next office to contact.

1. Before you even rent the building, go to your local zoning department, and find out if you can conduct retail sales at that location. Also find out if they have prohibitive sign restrictions.

2. Go to your bank and get a commercial checking account. It is free.

3. Find out whether your city or county handles business licenses. A quick look on the Internet, or a couple of calls, perhaps starting with the Chamber of Commerce, will let you know which office to visit. There, you can register your business name (even if you are doing business under your own name), and get what’s called a DBA – Doing Business under Assumed Name certificate. This is also known as a business license. In most places, there is an annual fee ranging from just a few dollars, to a small percentage of your gross sales. It is typically around $150/year for a small retail business.

4. If you are not in one of the five US States that do not require sales tax – Alaska, Delaware, Montana, New Hampshire and Oregon, then you need to visit the local sales tax office (called the State Board of Equalization in California). Using a one-page form that’s very easy to fill out, they deputize you to collect sales tax. With the sales tax number, also known as a resale certificate they give you, you can contact wholesalers get their catalogs, and secret price lists, in case you want to branch out to new clothing. If you are in one of the sales tax-free states, the wholesalers typically ask for a faxed copy of your DBA. The sales tax office will give you a brochure that tells you exactly how to collect sales tax. For instance in some communities, secondhand goods are exempt. They’ll tell you the exact percentage, which ranges from 2 percent to just under 10 percent in US states, and can be as high as 25 percent (VAT – Value Added Tax) in Europe.

Typically, you set aside the amount of sales tax you collect every week or so, and deposit it into a savings account. Then, every three months, you fill a one or two-page form, and mail in a check for the sales tax.

Although rare, in some communities, there is an inventory tax. Once a year, you pay a small percentage of the value of your inventory. Your city or county office can tell you about that.

Bookkeeping is easy. You need to keep all your paperwork – receipts, licenses, and other such documents related to your business. Manilla file folders, and a plain banker’s box, that you can buy for $2 in any office supply store will do. You’ll also want to make a chart of the money that comes in, and the money that goes out. You can do this with a spreadsheet, or software on your computer. Quicken is a program that makes it super easy once you answer 20 minutes worth of questions to set it up.

Once every three months, you file a Form 1040-ES with the Federal government, and perhaps a similar form with your state government, prepaying approximately 1/4 of the amount of tax you guess that you may end up paying for the entire year. Since it is a guess when you prepay, you don’t have to be particularly accurate. If you are way low, you pay a small fine, perhaps $20, at the end of the year.

You may be surprised that by being in business (at least in the United States), rather than someone’s employee, your Social Security tax suddenly doubles. Whereas 7.15 percent was withheld from your paycheck, now, you are responsible to pay 13.3 percent. What’s up with that? Your employer paid half – the other 7.15 percent.

Once a year, you fill out a Schedule C in addition to your 1040 income tax form. This is a two-page form that’s fairly easy to fill out. If you’d like to make it even easier, you can use TurboTax, HR Block Online, or other such services to work out the details for you. These programs ask questions, you answer them, and voila, your tax forms are printed out, and you have instructions on where to sign, how much money to pay, and where to mail them.

If this sounds overwhelming to you, there is a very easy solution! Contact a bookkeeper or accountant for a lesson. In one hour, they can teach you what you need to know. Then, if you still feel overwhelmed, you can pay the professional to do everything for you.

As your business grows, you’ll want to hire employees. You need to get a special insurance, called Workers’ Compensation or “workers’ comp” that covers the possibility of someone being injured on the job. This is inexpensive in comparison to the cost of the employees. Your regular insurance agent can help you with that.

That’s it. If you get something wrong, and most people do from time to time, since people in small retail businesses are not MBAs from Harvard, the branch of the government that discovers the problem will simply mail you a letter telling you what’s wrong, and what to do about it. They may issue a fine, but these fines are manageable, like $20 or $30. They don’t want to break you after all. They support you in your business, so you’ll be able to flourish for years and years, paying them lots of tax money.

The only exception is someone who repeatedly disregards the requirements. When you hear of a business person who had a heavy fine, or even went to jail, this is always someone who flaunted disrespect for the government. You may disagree with a lot of what the government does, but if you make too big a stand, your business will suffer.

Consignment Stores

One of the easiest ways to sell clothing is through consignment stores. They exist in most communities, and look like ordinary secondhand clothing stores, so you may not have known of their existence. They don’t own their inventory. Instead, they depend on customers bringing them things to sell.

When you bring in some clothing, they check it out, and accept some or all of it. They put a code tag on each piece identifying you as the owner. When an item sells, you get all but 33% (typically) of the amount. In many consignment stores, you don’t get to set the price. They set the price using their experience with clothing and with the market. In other stores, you dictate a price for each piece.

The very nice thing about consignment stores is they bear all the expense of having a store, and they do all the work. Someone has to be there from 10 to 5 everyday, and that person isn’t you.

In some consignment stores they may entertain offers. When a customer says, “I’ll give you $10 for this $12 item,” they may phone you and see if you’ll accept the sale for $10. If so, you’ll get $6.67.

Some pay for all the items of yours that have sold monthly, some pay for what has sold whenever you show up, others pay on Tuesdays.

Some specialize, and many only accept clothing in nearly perfect condition.

They love professionals. If you start bringing more and more clothing to a store, they learn who you are, and a professional friendship develops. More and more, they trust you, and you trust them. You learn what sells and what doesn’t, so in time, nearly everything you bring them is highly profitable for them, and for you.

There is no need to do all your business with one consignment store. You can sell at as many as you can reach. You may discover that Shop X is the best place for selling shoes, and Shop Y, you get a better price for high-end clothing, and at Shop Z, they sell inexpensive articles quickly.

Thousands of people throughout the world earn good livings simply by consigning clothing.


Your Own Consignment Store

I recently stopped in a local clothing consignment store and was shocked to discover they give back only 35 percent of what clothing brings to the consignors! Yet, their business was obviously successful. I did a bit of asking and they told me a bit more about what they do.

This conversation got me to thinking how much I’d like to start a similar store, and do things better. But, I’m a writer. So instead, I’ll tell you how to start a consignment store.

Like any big business, it is safer and less stressful to start small. How small could you start? I wonder if you could start out of your car’s back seat? Could you tell your friends and associates that you’re planning to start a consignment store, and have them seed your business with some of their clothes? At the same time, you could tell people that you have clothes in your car – or in your garage, basement, or back bedroom, and encourage them to come buy some. It could be as simple as telling George or Sally that you have a nice pair of slacks that’s just the right color, will probably fit perfectly, and is only $10. Do they want to try them on?

This way, with no money invested in a business, signs, advertising or employees, you’ve got a start on a business in which you can gain experience and grow.

You can accelerate the growth of your business by advertising on Craigslist and setting up at a flea market on weekends.

A consignment business can naturally grow faster than an ordinary retail store because the people who bring clothes to consign will most likely also buy some of the clothes you have. And, they’ll tell their friends, who could be buyers as well as consignors.

There’s no reason you couldn’t be your own good customer. As you are building the consignment business, you could buy things at thrift stores, on eBay, and elsewhere to add into your inventory.

Once you’ve gained that experience, and have a large pool of people who have consigned clothes to you, it is time to rent a building. You can see the chapter on starting your own store, if you haven’t already, for details on starting a retail business. A consignment store is just like a retail store, but with one huge advantage: You don’t have to spend money on inventory, which is usually a big cost.

Whereas the shop I visited charges a whopping 65 percent consignment fee, and that seems to work for them, I think you can charge less, and will be more successful. I’d recommend something between 30 and 50 percent.

The biggest downside to the consignment business compared to regular retail is that you have to keep careful track of all the inventory. At any given moment it might be important to know who owns a specific piece of clothing. When it comes time to pay your consignors, you want it to be a simple process.

The consignment store I visited uses their computers for all that, probably with expensive custom software. That’s not necessary, especially at first. You’ll probably want to use a computer, but you can get by with an ordinary spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Office or Open Office, a free download created by volunteers that many say is just as good as Microsoft Office. If you don’t know anything about spreadsheets, you can hire a bookkeeper or computer person to show you the basics in an hour. It is really quite simple if you already know how to click a mouse and write email. All you need is two charts. A list of consignors with their contact information, and a list of inventory. Each consignor gets a number. Each item of clothing carries the consignor’s number. In the inventory sheet, you have a description for each piece, a price, the date it came in, and most importantly, the consignor’s number.

For each piece of clothing you need a nearly bulletproof tag of some sort. You’d be in a bit of trouble if the tag becomes separated from an item, because then you won’t know who the consignor is. You might spend a few bucks and get two or three types of tags. You might have ones that can pin securely onto shirts, pants and sweaters, and another kind that comes with a loop and can be tied onto shoes, belts and non-pinnable items.

When a new consignor comes to your store, you start by putting them on the consignors’ sheet with their unique number.

You’ll probably also want to have them sign a form for your records that informs them of how your consignment system works, and puts all the responsibility for theft, loss, damage and mix-ups on them. If something sets off the fire sprinklers in the middle of the night, you wouldn’t want to have to pay all your consignors for all their clothes. Once they sign the form, give them a copy for their records.

When a consignor brings items, for each one you accept, you immediately add a price tag with the consignor’s number, and the price. You might also give the consignor a receipt.

At the beginning, you can do the whole thing on paper, but it won’t be long before the size of your business demands a computer. With that, you can get as sophisticated as you want. For instance, in time, you can invest in software that with a single click of a button, prints checks for all your consignors every month.

At the store I recently visited their computer even told them which clothes to accept, and which not, as well as what price to set on each item of clothing. Then, they could tell the consignors, “the computer says. . .” whenever a consignor is dissatisfied with a price or what the store is willing to take for consignment.

You get to decide your policies. You can take everything consignors bring in, although you probably don’t really want to clog up your store with undesirable stuff. What you carry will dictate what kind of clientele you attract. For instance, if your consignment store is all upscale, with few items under $60, you’ll get all upscale customers. It won’t take long for the people who must shop in the lower prices to figure out your store is not worth going to – for them. You’ll make more per sale, but may have fewer sales. Or maybe not, because the upscale people may all shop at your place.

If you go too upscale, you’ll only attract customers who can easily afford to buy new clothes, and so you may have almost no customers at all. On the other side, if you go low-end, you spend a lot of time handling a lot of transactions for smaller profits per sale.

You can also decide who sets the prices. If you decide, consignors may grumble or argue. If you let them decide, you may grumble or argue. Price charts are difficult in this business, but not impossible. You could say all sweaters are $25. But some are not worth that much, and many name brand sweaters are worth far more.

You can decide whether consignors can be paid whenever they drop in, or just on Tuesdays, or you can mail checks once per month.

When your business is small and you’re running it yourself, everything is easy. To start bringing in employees complicates things because unless a person knows clothes values well, and unless they understand how you like to do things, the training period may be long and awkward. The store with a computer that sets prices is a big asset once you have employees.

You get to decide whether your prices are flexible when customers ask for deals. I’ve run stores where that was my policy. In time, I was inundated with people who wanted to wheel and deal, which took much of my valuable time. Sometimes, I’d give a guy a good price, and the customer right behind him would say, “What about me, can I get such a good discount also?” Consignors will only be happy with wheeling and dealing if they know up front that that’s store policy. If they know in advance that they may get 15 percent than the usual amount, they’ll generally accept that.

If your prices are set in concrete, your items may spend a lot of time on the shelf, which tends to bother consignors. Rather than wheeling and dealing, you can have a sort of reverse auction. Let’s say you start with a wedding gown at $200. After a week, you lower it to $190. Then after another week, $180, and so on. Perhaps it will sell at $140. This is the most profitable way to get as much as the market will bear for each item, but it requires that you set up a system that allows for such flexibility. For instance, you don’t want to go through everything in the store, marking new prices on tags every week.


eBay

Imagine having a retail store with unlimited space, where you don’t have to actually greet customers, it’s open 24 hours a day, has almost no overhead costs, and has not thousands, but millions of customers!

That would be eBay. More than 150,000 people are earning their livings on eBay, and you can be one of them. eBay is one of the easiest businesses to set up, and can start bringing you money within just days. It is possible to start an eBay account, list your first-ever item, and have it sell 10 minutes later.

Setting up an eBay account is as easy as falling off a log. You enter your name and contact info, make a couple of choices, and you’re all set. You’ll also want to set up a PayPal account, which is equally easy, and also free. PayPal is a division of eBay that takes care of collecting money, so you don’t have to deal with credit cards or anything like that.

You can start your eBay business with a single article of clothing. For an example, let’s say you have a collectible Grateful Dead T-shirt.

You might first want to assess the market for your T-shirt. On the top of most pages on eBay is a search field. You can type in a description of your T-Shirt. Maybe something like “1972 San Francisco Grateful Dead Shirt.” You will see a list of any such shirts currently being sold on eBay.

This list is interesting, but not very helpful. It shows only what’s currently being offered. Some items are being sold as fixed price, but you don’t know if they will actually sell, or not. Others are being sold through auction, and you don’t know what value they’ll rise to when finally sold. So, scroll down the column on the left where you can narrow down the search results. Click “More Refinements,” then “Show Only” and finally “Completed Listings.” That’s more like it. Now, you have a list of all items that closed during the past 30 days.

Items that didn’t sell have their prices shown in red. The sellers may have ended the item early, or let the time expire without a sale.

Items that have their prices in green did sell. So you can see how much people have actually paid for your T-shirt. You can click any of the items, see the pictures and read the description so you can better understand competing conditions. For instance, you might find that four of the shirts sold for only $10, while two others sold for $50. Upon reading the descriptions, you see that the four $10 shirts were all faded. You might see one that sold for $250. What’s up with that? Click through, and you might discover that it was signed by Jerry Garcia. And look at that! You didn’t notice it before, but yours is also signed in nearly the same place! (If only. . .)

Now it is time to take some pictures. eBay requires that you supply at least one picture, and allows for up to 12 pictures at no cost. You’ll want to take your pictures in such a way that they make your T-shirt as appealing as possible. I suggest to set the contrast up just a little tiny bit. Make sure the camera is held still, and the focus is good and sharp. Think about the background. It should be non-distracting, and of a contrasting color.

You might model the shirt on a real person, or on a mannequin. Or on a hanger. Or just against a towel or rug on a table. Whatever you think makes it look most appealing. The one downside to a live model, is it makes it clear in peoples’ minds that someone has worn the shirt. Although it is obvious when one thinks about it, being secondhand (although possibly not with a collectible shirt), you don’t want to point out that it is used by showing someone using it. On the other hand, with a live model, you can show the shirt in action on an attractive person, which makes the shirt itself more appealing. Eventually, you’ll probably not use live models because it takes too long, since you may end up listing dozens of items per day.

Keep in mind that the first picture that you upload will be used as a little thumbnail. You want your shirt to either be obviously a shirt at first glance in the thumbnail. Better yet, make it questionable. It is possible to create thumbnails that spark curiosity. People will want click in so they can figure out what they’re seeing.

Then you create the listing. First you select the right category. Most of the time, the right category is within the clothing section. Other possibilities include the “Weird Stuff” section under “Everything Else.” This would only be if you do have a weird bit of clothing. People look in that category who don’t know they’re going to end up buying a shirt. The other possibility is categories that some clothing specifically addresses. A painter’s smock can be classified as clothing, or a painter’s accessory. A T-shirt with a gardening logo might do better in the Gardening section.

For the item title, describe your item in appealing terms, but don’t forget to use the keywords someone who wants this T-shirt will actually be entering.

Click the various options as you create the listing to set it up the way you want. Be honest and straightforward throughout.

These options include:

Condition: New, used, etc.

Description: If it is collectible, state why. If it has special features such as signed by Jerry Garcia, make sure to include that information, even if it is in the pictures.

If there are any flaws, you must mention them. You cannot omit something like a small stain on the back. If you try to sell it without mentioning such flaws, you will not be an eBay seller for long. On the other hand, honest mistakes can be made, and as long as you don’t do it excessively often, all will be OK.

Size: For most clothing items, you can select a size. Whether or not you have a field in which to enter a size, put it in the description also. You don’t want buyers to forget that they have to take size into consideration. However, there are also many professional buyers. They don’t care so much about size, because they’re just going to sell it to whomever it fits.

Auction or Buy-It-Now: An auction listing can run for 1, 3, 7, or 10 days. You get to pick an opening price. For instance, you may decide that there’s no way you’d accept less than $30 for your T-shirt. So that’s your opening price. As the auction progresses, people will hopefully bid higher and higher. There is no limit. I once started an item at $50, figuring I’d be happy if at least one person would bid and give me $50. It sold at $1,200. If you’re lucky, at least two people will want your T-shirt, they’ll get into a bidding war, and the winner will pay way too much!

You can also set a secret reserve price. You can start your T-shirt at 99 cents, with a $30 reserve. This way, you can see what people are willing to pay. If no one pays $30, you get to keep it, yet you can see what they were willing to bid. Maybe the bidding stopped at $25, for example. Most savvy eBay sellers don’t use reserve pricing.

For ordinary non-collectible things, Buy-It-Now is probably a better option. You set a price, and your T-shirt remains available until someone is willing to pay your price. Many people don’t like the auction game. They come to eBay to get something, and they want it as soon as possible, and it would drive them crazy to have to wait and see when an auction closes whether they won or not. Buy-It-Now generally closes a bit higher than auctions on non-collectibles. Buy-It-Now runs 30 days, and can be set to automatically renew every 30 days until the item is sold. It is not uncommon for a merchant to list an item for a fairly high price, and then wait 8 months until it sells.

Return Policy: With clothing and buyers who want things for themselves (as opposed to professional buyers and sellers), size can be very important. You can decide what happens if an item doesn’t fit. Will you accept a return? Will you pay return shipping cost? If so, you may find that 10 or 15 percent of what you sells comes back. On the other hand, the individual buyers are happy to pay much more when they know that they can return things.

Shipping: You get to decide whether you’ll ship an item for free, or whether the buyer has to pay a shipping charge to you. Many sellers offer free shipping, thinking that will make their items more attractive. Others charge the exact amount the shipping will cost them. I charge a bit more, to cover the cost of packing materials (when I don’t use the free envelopes and boxes provided by the Post Office), and to cover my time in packing the item and applying postage. I feel that whereas free shipping is an attractive offer, my prices feel lower, because people don’t really think very much about the shipping cost when they’re considering an item. You can ship by any carrier you like. You may prefer UPS, FedEx, US Mail, or another. I like US Mail because most of my items are fairly small and light, so the costs are smaller. Working with the US Postal Service seems a bit easier to me than the other services.

When you list an item, there is a small listing fee. Depending on a few factors it can range from five to 30 cents. You can also add options so the listing fee will be over one dollar, but I do not recommend any of these options.

When an item sells, there is also a closing fee. This too, is a variable amount, but it averages around eight percent. Finally, PayPal has a fee of around three percent. I like to ballpark my figuring by saying all the fees add up to twenty percent. It is a bit less, but this factors in mistakes and return expenses. So, if something sells for $100, you actually get about $80 after costs.

You’ll find shipping is easy, because eBay includes a free part of their website called Shipping Manager. You put your item in a box or envelope, click Shipping Manager, enter the weight of your item, a couple of other choices, and print a shipping label with the address already filled out on an ordinary printer using ordinary paper. Later, you can get a fancy label printer, if you wish. The shipping cost is automatically deducted from your PayPal account. Shipping with eBay Shipping Manager is slightly less expensive than taking this to the Post Office and paying there.

eBay has a feedback system in which a buyer can rate the transaction. They can give you a positive, neutral, or negative vote. In almost all cases, they’ll give you a positive one. In order to get a neutral or negative rating, you have to misrepresent your item, ship it quite late, and communicate badly with your customer. If you have made a mistake, such as listing the size incorrectly, but communicate with your buyer and do your best to make things right (offer an exchange or refund), then you won’t get negative feedback. Oh, there is the occasional crackpot who is mad at the world and issues negative feedback for no good reason, but that is rare, and eBay has some mechanisms in place to keep that to a minimum.

You can sell things if you have no feedback. Many people will trust a brand new seller with low-value items. If you have something that is selling for a lot of money, lack of feedback can cause some people not to bid. However, most people understand that eBay offers so much buyer protection that even if you turned out to be a horrible seller, they’d be covered by eBay.

As you start selling things on eBay, you will build more and more feedback, and that enhances your profit slightly.


Route Sales

I’m going to propose something that hasn’t been done that I know of, but seems like it has great potential. Maybe you’ll be the first to do it.

Imagine a large vehicle, perhaps a bread truck, filled with secondhand clothing. The driver would have a route, much like the Fuller Brush or Jewel Tea salespeople of a bygone era. The driver (you) stops at customers’ homes or business places, and they step onto your truck, looking over clothing, and buying the things they want. As you get to know your customers, you buy things with them in mind, and show those special items to your specific customers. You’ll build relationships, dare I say friendships, with the people on your route.

Once you get your truck, have signs made on the sides, and fill it with clothing, you could start by pulling into your local flea market. Everyone who boards your truck would be told about your route sales idea. Many will sign up. Your route will build quickly, as people tell people, who tell people, and so on. In time, you can decide who to visit, and which customers to drop, eventually optimizing your route into exclusively big-buying customers. You could specialize in high-end men’s clothing, children’s clothing, sports apparel, anything you want. Sounds like fun, doesn’t it?

This model is being done successfully in modern times, but not very often with clothing. Snap-On and some other tool companies have trucks filled with tools. They visit mechanics in car repair shops.

I wonder how it would be to combine route sales with a consignment operation?


Modifying Clothes

Tailoring

I wouldn’t be surprised if you’ve already been wondering how much any clothing business could be enhanced if you could modify clothing. Right. What if you have the skill and interest in repairing or modifying clothes?

First on the list is repairing. If you have tailoring skill, you can buy things for next to nothing, and sell them for much more by simply adding a button, reducing a worn cuff, replacing a zipper, sewing a seam, or bleaching a stain.

If you can do that, you can do tailoring for others. In most of these businesses, you’ll be in contact with people, and they’ll know that you are a clothing expert. All you need to do to start a tailoring business, either on the side of your clothing buying and selling business, or as a business in itself, is to hand out business cards. After a while, your reputation will be all the advertising you need. You can seed the business by putting cards and flyers on bulletin boards all over town, advertising on craigslist, and so on.

Rip-Downs

What can you do with a long-sleeve shirt that has a stain on one cuff? How about a pair of pants that’s torn near the bottom? How far can you go with this idea? Is it possible to take a turtleneck sweater in which the neck is all stretched out, and turn it into a collarless sweater? Can you remove the brim from a hat, thereby creating a brimless hat? Can you remove the frilly stuff from a Halloween costume, turning it into an ordinary jumpsuit?

Costuming

Much of costuming can start with ordinary clothes. You cut and attach as you see fit to make something that represents (or actually becomes) something else. You may find a market with local theaters. You may find a market (consider costume rentals) right before Halloween. You may find a market with musicians, magicians, jugglers and clowns. I can imagine taking two pairs of pants, one torn on the left, one of an entirely different type and color torn on the right, sewing the good halves together and selling that goofy pair of pants to a clown.

Pet Clothing

I once saw a mother standing behind a stroller while waiting for a traffic light to change. In the stroller was her baby. The stroller had a cloth roof, and on the roof of the stroller was her poodle. While standing there, she paid considerable attention to the dog, and no attention to the child. I’m hoping that she wasn’t always like that, but it is true that some people love their pets – a lot!

People will often dress up their pets, especially their dogs. Cat’s don’t really go for being dressed up so much, because they like to spend a lot of time licking their fur, and clothing inhibits that. But I’ve seen hats and sweaters on ducks and chickens, and I suppose it is possible to make clothing for a snake, lizard, turtle, hamster. . . Well, I suppose the hamster would eat his clothing.

A visit in any pet store will give you an idea how much people are willing to spend on sweaters for their dogs. What else can you invent in pet clothing? If you come up with something that’s an obvious ‘fit’ – pardon the pun – and something that’s positively eccentric, then people will pay anything reasonable to get it for their pet. I can imagine that material costs would be next to nothing. You could cut down, or use the material from human clothing that’s been stained on the sleeves, is torn, or whatever. In fact, these bits of human clothing from which you can start may inspire your pet designs.

Where might you sell it besides selling to, or consigning in pet stores? I believe eBay is a natural and huge market. You might also look into Etsy.com, and Amazon.com as venues for your hand-built pet clothing.

You could become mechanized, building hundreds or even thousands of identical dog sweaters or whatever. Or, you could be an artist, making one-off creations, even taking custom orders from pet owners. You might be asked to make an ascot to tie on a German Shepard, or a cowboy hat for a duck. Are you up to the challenge?

Celebrity Clothing

Most celebrities are quite wealthy. This enables them to buy clothing frequently, and discard all the clothing that’s the least bit worn or uninteresting to them. Where does it go? If you can find out, or better yet, offer to pick up and recycle clothing they no longer want, you can get their old clothes. Depending on the popularity of your celebrities, you can sell their old clothing for a lot of money. eBay would certainly be a good market for secondhand celebrity clothes, as fans will bid whatever it takes to get Kevin Costner’s old T-shirt. Especially if it is one he wore in “Field of Dreams,” for instance.

As with anything of higher intrinsic value, celebrity clothing is worth more if you can have it authenticated. Or, better yet, autographed.

Replication

Maybe you don’t know any celebrities. Maybe you can’t arrange to get their old clothes. But you can watch movies, right? In a currently popular movie, you may see a bit of interesting clothing. Perhaps a T-shirt with a unique picture on the front, or an unusual hat, or maybe even a cane. Can you get or make replicas? (You’ll want to be careful not to violate copyright restrictions.)

Movie fans will go to great lengths to emulate their favorite stars. If you can modify off-the-rack clothing, or better yet, low-cost used clothing to look exactly like something in a recent movie, you can probably sell many copies online. Of course you wouldn’t want to claim you have the original items. You can plainly state that what you are selling are replicas, and you’ll still find plenty of takers.

Genuine Bits

I read about a fellow who came across a construction project. Workmen were replacing the original wooden sidewalk of the Brooklyn Bridge. He saw a pile of old wooden planks, and asked whether he could have them. The workmen were happy to give the old wood away, because then they wouldn’t have to take it to the landfill. He took the wood home and cut it into one-inch (2.5cm) squares. He drilled a hole in the corner of each square and attached a keyring. He then advertised these for sale as genuine keepsakes of the Brooklyn Bridge. He made tens of thousands of dollars very quickly.

That kind of gives you some clothing ideas, doesn’t it? Can you get a costume that was in a big movie? Can you get something that President Obama wore? If you get one bit of important clothing, and sell it as a whole, you have only one chance to make a profit. But if you cut it into thousands of pieces, you can make a profit thousands of times over. Making keepsakes out of as little as a few threads is possible. These bits can be made into keyfobs, pendants, clear plastic blocks, jewelry, glued onto buttons, or directly onto clothing. You could simply glue a few threads onto a sheet of paper documenting what you have. This stuff can be sold concurrently on eBay, Etsy, DeviantArt, Amazon, all sorts of websites.

Patterns

When you see something at a thrift or garage sale that’s unique, you can buy it, take it apart and make a pattern from its pieces. You can then make the same thing, but using your own choice of color and material. You might even like to modify some of the dimensions, creating something entirely new.

Being a business coach, I haven’t looked into the market for patterns, but you probably know: Are they profitable? Could you sell patterns? What if yours are unique, or presented in a unique market. Are people looking for patterns on Amazon? On eBay? Are there patterns already for sale in those venues? What could you do different in order to sell your patterns?

Doll Clothes

I have heard that more clothing is sold by Mattel for their Barbie Doll line than any real clothing company. I wonder if there is a market in making doll clothing? Perhaps to collectors? I’ll bet ordinary clothing would provide plenty of material for doll clothes. eBay would probably be the best outlet for hand built doll clothing.

Patches

Take an ordinary T-shirt, pair of pants, skirt, hat or backpack, and cover it with patches. Done artistically, you may have a very sellable product line.

Buttons and Accessories

People don’t think much about buttons and accessories, but there are things that can be done with them. I wonder if someone who knows what they are doing could go into a thrift store, buy a sweater or shirt for its buttons, take them off, and sell them for a nice profit on eBay? I wonder if a rather ordinary blouse could be enhanced with just the right buttons, frills, or what-have-you?

Add-Ons

Think about an ordinary pair of pants or a dress. What could you add to it so it will become someone’s fashion statement? Another good eBay play, don’t you think?

Embroidery

If you can embroider, and can think up designs that someone would want, you could earn a great living. I’m not thinking so much about ordinary stuff, like “One for the Road” or “Stuff Happens.” I’m thinking of specialized markets. What would a bicycle racer like? How about an ice skater? How about a guitar player? How about all the guys at the XYZ factory? Wouldn’t that be a nice commission? To sell embroidered jackets to the XYZ company for every one of their employees.


Tie-Dye



Remember tie-dyeing of the 1960s? The idea is that you bunch up shirts, skirts or pants in various places with rubber bands, and dip those bunched areas into pots of dye. In the end, you have colorful large splotches, that at one time were almost essential fashion. That’s the way it was done back then in America. Tie-dyeing has been done for centuries in other parts of the world. You can learn about and utilize some of the ancient techniques, as well as inventing your own, such as painting the dye in designs onto clothing that’s bunched in inventive ways, using layers or stages of dying, and incorporating unique folds.

The Final Bit

Now you have everything you need to start your own clothing business, If you can stay focused, motivated and on track, you’ve got it made! However, these attributes are difficult for most people. I’m a business coach, so I know! In fact, that’s exactly what I do: I help people actually become successful in business.

Over the years, I have developed a support system for you that works great, costing just $188/month. I work entirely by email. Besides much lower cost, this gives you several advantages over the traditional once-weekly phone conversations. You don’t have to schedule a time, and make sure to be ready for the calls. We can write as often as you like, even once a day if needed. As things come up, we can discuss them right away. And, email tends to work better than voice communication in terms of taking the right actions for the greatest success.

As you read this, I probably still have room for more clients, or the waiting list is short, so go ahead and drop me an email at jeff@jeffnapier.com or check out JeffNapier.com for more details.

Have fun and prosper! – Jeff Napier